e-Sword User’s Guide
     Revision: 1/20/2012




            By:

   BibleSupport.com




    e-Sword 10.0.6
     By: Rick Meyers
Table of Contents
About this User’s Guide .........................................................................................................13
   About e-Sword ......................................................................................................................13
   Goal of this Documentation ...................................................................................................13
   Documentation Authors .........................................................................................................13
   Copyright and Distribution .....................................................................................................13

What’s New in e-Sword 10?....................................................................................................14
   Reference Library..................................................................................................................14
       Search All Topics At Once ................................................................................................14
       REFX File Format .............................................................................................................14
       Support For Pictures .........................................................................................................14
   New Editor with True Word Processing Power ......................................................................15
   SermonAudio.com Integration ...............................................................................................15
   STEP Reader Still Included ...................................................................................................15

Chapter 1: Getting to Know e-Sword .....................................................................................16
   e-Sword Interface Overview ..................................................................................................16
       e-Sword Quick References: Tooltips .................................................................................17
       Common Tasks Menu .......................................................................................................18
       e-Sword Hotkey Reference Sheet.....................................................................................18
   The Main Toolbar and Main Menu .........................................................................................21
       Main Toolbar Icon Summary .............................................................................................21
   Maximizing Window Views ....................................................................................................23
   Bible Books Navigation Tree .................................................................................................23
   Introduction to the Bibles Window .........................................................................................24
       The Compare Tab.............................................................................................................26
       The Parallel Tab ...............................................................................................................27
   Introduction to the Commentaries Window ............................................................................28
   Introduction to the Editors Window ........................................................................................29
   Introduction to the Dictionaries Window ................................................................................30
   Introduction to the Reference Library ....................................................................................31

Chapter 2: Customizing e-Sword ...........................................................................................32
   Adjusting the Layout of e-Sword’s Main Screen ....................................................................33
       Maximizing / Minimizing Window Panes With Push Pins...................................................33

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                  Page 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS

      Maximizing Window Panes With the Window Menu ..........................................................34
      Making Window Panes Larger or Smaller .........................................................................35
      Window Docking Introduction ...........................................................................................36
      Docking Windows – Getting Started .................................................................................37
      Docking Windows: Overlapping ........................................................................................39
  Floating Window Customization ............................................................................................42
  Zoom Feature: A Gift for Old Eyes ........................................................................................43
      The Zoom Icon ................................................................................................................43
      Zooming with the Mouse Wheel ........................................................................................43
  Changing Fonts and Sizes ....................................................................................................44
  Changing Text and Background Colors .................................................................................45
  e-Sword Multilingual Settings ................................................................................................45
      Changing the e-Sword Application Language ...................................................................45
  Tooltip and Bookmark Options ..............................................................................................46
  Search Options .....................................................................................................................47
  Reset e-Sword Settings.........................................................................................................47
  Hiding and Uninstalling Resources ........................................................................................48
      Hiding Resources .............................................................................................................48
      Permanently Delete Resources ........................................................................................49
      Deleting Editor Notes ........................................................................................................49
  Configuring Resource Tabs ...................................................................................................50
      Display Tabs on a Single Row or Multiple Rows ...............................................................50
      Resource Tab Sorting - Advanced ....................................................................................50
      Renaming Resource Tabs ................................................................................................51
      Resource Tab Conflicts ....................................................................................................51
  Changing the e-Sword Resource Location ............................................................................52
  Downloading Additional Resources .......................................................................................53
      Unofficial Resources .........................................................................................................53
      Official Resources.............................................................................................................53
  Installing Unofficial Resources ..............................................................................................55
      Self Installing Resources ..................................................................................................55
      Compressed Zip File.........................................................................................................55
      Raw e-Sword Resources ..................................................................................................55
      Support for Unofficial e-Sword Resources ........................................................................55




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                 Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 3: The Bibles Window in Detail ................................................................................56
   Navigating the Bible in the Bibles Window.............................................................................57
       Using the Bible Books Window .........................................................................................58
       Using the Lookup Scripture Reference Popup ..................................................................58
       Viewing Your Previous Bible Search Results ....................................................................59
       Viewing Your Verse History ..............................................................................................59
   Searching the Bible - Basic ...................................................................................................60
   Quick Searching – Context Menu ..........................................................................................62
   Additional Search Options Wheel ..........................................................................................63
   Searching Only the OT, NT, and Apocrypha .........................................................................64
       Apocrypha ........................................................................................................................64
   Extended Bible Search - Multiple Translations ......................................................................65
       Search Results .................................................................................................................65
   Searching the Bible - Advanced ............................................................................................66
   Copying and Printing Bible Searches ....................................................................................67
       Printing .............................................................................................................................68
       Quick Copying ..................................................................................................................68
   Copying/Printing Entire Bible Passages ................................................................................69
   Copying and Printing from Parallel Mode ..............................................................................70
   Working with Strong's Hebrew and Greek Numbers ..............................................................71
       Strong’s Number Basics ...................................................................................................71
       e-Sword Modules with Strong’s Numbers .........................................................................71
       Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions Without Leaving the Bible Window .........................71
       Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window ........................................72
   Searching by Strong's Numbers ............................................................................................73
   The Compare Tab .................................................................................................................75
   The Parallel Tab ....................................................................................................................76
   Split Bible View .....................................................................................................................77
   Analyzing Verses – Passage Theme and Word Distribution ..................................................78
   Using the Gospel Harmony ...................................................................................................80
   Displaying Information about a Bible Translation ...................................................................81

Chapter 4: Highlighting, Marking, and Bookmarking Resources ........................................82
   Highlighting Text ...................................................................................................................83
   Marking Text .........................................................................................................................85
   Working with Bookmarks .......................................................................................................86
       Setting Bookmarks............................................................................................................86

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                       Page 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS

       Accessing Bookmarks ......................................................................................................86
       Bookmark Hotkeys/Shortcuts ............................................................................................87
   Bible Markup File ..................................................................................................................88

Chapter 5: The Verse List Feature – Saving Verses .............................................................89
   Navigating Verse Lists...........................................................................................................90
   Changing Verse Lists ............................................................................................................90
   Creating a Verse List and Adding Verses ..............................................................................91
       Adding a Verse from a Verse List .....................................................................................91
       Deleting a Verse from a Verse List ...................................................................................91
       Sorting Verses in a Verse List ...........................................................................................91
   Viewing Verse Lists ...............................................................................................................92
   Quickly Adding a Verse to a Verse List .................................................................................93
   Creating a Verse List from a Search......................................................................................94
   Updating a Verse List ............................................................................................................95
       Adding a Verse from a Verse List .....................................................................................95
       Deleting a Verse from a Verse List ...................................................................................95
       Sorting Verses in a Verse List ...........................................................................................95
   Deleting Verse Lists ..............................................................................................................95

Chapter 6: Printing in e-Sword...............................................................................................96
   The Print Preview Window ....................................................................................................97
   Printing Bible Chapters..........................................................................................................98
   Printing Selected Verses and Chapters .................................................................................98
   Printing from the Editors Window ..........................................................................................99
   Printing from the Commentaries ............................................................................................99
   Printing from the Dictionaries Window ...................................................................................99
   Printing from the Reference Library Window .........................................................................99
   Printing Bible Reading .........................................................................................................100
   Printing Daily Devotions ......................................................................................................100
   Printing Prayer Lists ............................................................................................................100
   Printing with the STEP Reader ............................................................................................100

Chapter 7: The Commentaries Window ...............................................................................101
   Using Commentaries ...........................................................................................................102
   When to Synchronize/Unsynchronize a Commentary ..........................................................102
   Selecting Between Verse, Book, and Chapter Comments ...................................................104
   Viewing “Next Comment” and “Previous Comment” ............................................................104


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                  Page 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS

   Viewing Commentary Information .......................................................................................104
   Viewing All Commentary Entries – Birds Eye View..............................................................105
   Searching a Commentary....................................................................................................106
   Searching More Than One Commentary Simultaneously ....................................................106

Chapter 8: Introduction to the Editors .................................................................................107
   New Editor Features in e-Sword 10 .....................................................................................108
   Editor Hotkeys .....................................................................................................................108
   Using the Editor – Word Processing ....................................................................................110
       Find (Ctrl-F), Replace (Ctrl-R), Go To (Ctrl-G) ................................................................110
       Spell Check (F7) .............................................................................................................111
       Thesaurus (Shift-F7) .......................................................................................................111
       Cut (Ctrl-X), Copy (Ctrl-C), Paste (Ctrl-V) .......................................................................111
       Pasting Formatted Text (F11 Toggle) ............................................................................111
       Undo (Ctrl-Z) and Redo (Ctrl-Y) .....................................................................................111
       Insert Bookmark .............................................................................................................112
       Insert Hyperlink ..............................................................................................................112
       Insert Table.....................................................................................................................113
       Dragging Table Boundaries ............................................................................................113
       Table Properties (Table Settings) ...................................................................................114
       Adjusting Rows and Columns .........................................................................................115
       Insert Picture ..................................................................................................................115
       Image Attributes .............................................................................................................116
       Header and Footer..........................................................................................................118
       Page Layout ...................................................................................................................119
       Show/Hide Formatting Symbols ......................................................................................119
       Font Selection and Size ..................................................................................................119
       Bold (Ctrl-B), Italic (Ctrl-I), Underline (Ctrl-U) ..................................................................120
       Font Color .......................................................................................................................120
       Highlight .........................................................................................................................120
       Format Scripture Tooltip (Ctrl-J)......................................................................................121
       Align Left, Align Center (Ctrl-E), Align Right, Justify ........................................................121
       Numbering and Bullets ...................................................................................................122
       Bullets and Numbering Format .......................................................................................122
       Indent Paragraph (CTRL-TAB) and Outdent Paragraph (SHIFT-TAB) ............................122


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                     Page 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS

       Format Paragraph...........................................................................................................123
       Border.............................................................................................................................123
       Columns .........................................................................................................................124
       Page Break .....................................................................................................................124
       Save Notes .....................................................................................................................124
   Understanding Where the Editors Read Notes Files. ..........................................................125
   How to Backup Your Notes - Advanced ..............................................................................125

Chapter 9: Journal Notes......................................................................................................126
   Viewing Journal Notes.........................................................................................................127
   Creating a Journal Note ......................................................................................................128
   Editing a Journal Note .........................................................................................................128
   Deleting a Journal Note .......................................................................................................129
   Viewing All Journal Notes – Birds Eye View ........................................................................130
   Searching Journal Notes .....................................................................................................131
   Additional Search Options Wheel ........................................................................................131
   Copying from the Bible to Your Journal Notes .....................................................................132
   Copying from Other Windows to Journal Notes ...................................................................133
       Copying the Entire Text ..................................................................................................133
       Copying an Excerpt ........................................................................................................133
   Importing and Exporting Journal Notes ...............................................................................134
       To import a file: ...............................................................................................................134
       To export a Journal note: ................................................................................................134
   Managing More than One Journal Notes File - Advanced ...................................................135
       Creating a New Journal Notes File .................................................................................135
       Opening a Journal Notes File .........................................................................................135
   Changing Where e-Sword Reads Journal Notes - Advanced ..............................................136

Chapter 10: The Study Notes ...............................................................................................137
   Viewing Study Notes ...........................................................................................................138
   Creating a Study Note .........................................................................................................138
   Editing a Study Note ...........................................................................................................140
   Deleting a Study Note .........................................................................................................140
   Viewing All Study Notes – Birds Eye View...........................................................................141
   Searching Study Notes........................................................................................................142
   Additional Search Options Wheel ........................................................................................143
   Copying from the Bible to Your Study Notes .......................................................................145
   Copying from Other Windows to Study Notes .....................................................................146

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                     Page 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS

       Copying the Entire Text ..................................................................................................146
       Copying an Excerpt ........................................................................................................146
   Importing and Exporting Study Notes ..................................................................................147
       To import a file: ...............................................................................................................147
       To export a Study note: ..................................................................................................147
   Managing More than One Study Notes File - Advanced ......................................................148
       Creating a New Study Notes File ....................................................................................148
       Opening a Study Notes File ............................................................................................149
   Changing Where e-Sword Reads Study Notes - Advanced .................................................149

Chapter 11: Topic Notes .......................................................................................................150
   Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library?......................................................151
   e-Sword 9 Users: Can’t Find your Topic Notes? ..................................................................152
   Viewing Your Topic Notes ...................................................................................................152
   Creating a Topic Note .........................................................................................................153
   Editing a Topic Note ............................................................................................................154
   Optimizing Topic Notes Files with Images ...........................................................................155
       How Image Bloat Happens .............................................................................................155
       Removing Image Bloat ...................................................................................................155
   Deleting a Topic Note ..........................................................................................................155
   Searching Topic Notes ........................................................................................................156
   Additional Search Options Wheel ........................................................................................157
   Copying from the Bible to Your Topic Notes ........................................................................159
   Copying from Other Windows to Topic Notes ......................................................................160
       Copying the Entire Text ..................................................................................................160
       Copying an Excerpt ........................................................................................................160
   Importing and Exporting Topic Notes ..................................................................................161
       To import a file: ...............................................................................................................161
       To export a Topic note: ...................................................................................................161
   Managing More than One Topic Notes File - Advanced ......................................................162
       Creating a New Topic Notes File ....................................................................................162
       Opening a Topic Notes File ............................................................................................163
   Changing Where e-Sword Reads Topic Notes - Advanced .................................................164
   Reference Library (.REFX) Files .........................................................................................165
   When to Use Reference Book Files.....................................................................................165
       Why Convert to Reference Book Files Then? .................................................................165
   How to Convert Topic Notes to Reference Book Format .....................................................165

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                   Page 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 12: The Dictionaries Window .................................................................................166
   Using Dictionaries ...............................................................................................................167
       Topics List and Performance ..........................................................................................167
   Quick Lookup Inside the Dictionary .....................................................................................168
   Viewing Your Dictionary Search History ..............................................................................169
   Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window...........................................170
       Strong’s Number Basics .................................................................................................170
   Searching a Dictionary ........................................................................................................171
   Searching More Than One Dictionary Simultaneously.........................................................171

Chapter 13: Reference Library .............................................................................................173
   Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library?......................................................174
   Why Can’t I View Topic Notes Files in the Reference Library? ............................................174
   Opening the Reference Library ...........................................................................................174
   Viewing Resources in the Reference Library .......................................................................176
   Filtering Resources in the Reference Library.......................................................................176
   Searching the Reference Library - Basic .............................................................................177
   Additional Search Options Wheel ........................................................................................179
   Searching the Reference Library - Advanced ......................................................................181
   Extended Search - Multiple Reference Books .....................................................................182
       Search Summary ............................................................................................................182
   Paste Into Topic Notes ........................................................................................................183
   Highlighting Text .................................................................................................................183

Chapter 14: The Bible Reading Plan ....................................................................................184
   Opening Bible Reading Plans..............................................................................................185
   Using Bible Reading Plans ..................................................................................................186
       Previous Reading and Next Reading ............................................................................186
       Incrementing the Reading Plan Progress Bar .................................................................186
       View Chapter as Paragraph ...........................................................................................186
       Changing Bible Reading Plans .......................................................................................186
   Creating a Bible Reading Plan ............................................................................................187
   Show at Startup...................................................................................................................187

Chapter 15: Daily Devotions.................................................................................................188
   Opening the Daily Devotions ...............................................................................................189
   Using the Daily Devotions ...................................................................................................189
   Show Devotions at Startup ..................................................................................................190


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                  Page 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 16: Prayer Requests ...............................................................................................191
   Opening Prayer Requests ...................................................................................................192
   Viewing Prayer Requests ....................................................................................................192
   Adding Prayer Requests .....................................................................................................192
   Editing or Deleting a Prayer Request ..................................................................................193
   Managing Prayer Request Files ..........................................................................................195
      Creating Prayer Request Files ........................................................................................195
      Loading Prayer Request Files .........................................................................................195
   Show Prayer Requests at Startup .......................................................................................196

Chapter 17: Scripture Memory .............................................................................................197
   Opening Scripture Memory .................................................................................................198
   Viewing Verses to Memorize ...............................................................................................198
   Adding Scripture Memory ....................................................................................................199
   Editing or Deleting a Memory Verse ....................................................................................200
   Testing Memory Verses ......................................................................................................201
      Associate Reference Test ...............................................................................................201
      Fill In The Blanks ............................................................................................................202
      Word Position .................................................................................................................202
      First Letter ......................................................................................................................202
   Managing Memory Verse Files ............................................................................................203
      Creating Memory Verse Files .........................................................................................203
      Loading Memory Verse Files ..........................................................................................203
   Show Memory Verses at Startup .........................................................................................204

Chapter 18: SermonAudio.com ............................................................................................205
   Opening the SermonAudio.com Window .............................................................................206
   Listening to a Sermon .........................................................................................................206
      Learning More About the Speaker or Sermon .................................................................207
      Using the Sermon Player ................................................................................................208
   Listening to Sermons On Different Verses...........................................................................209
   Sorting Sermons By Heading ..............................................................................................209
   Adjusting the Width of Heading Columns ............................................................................209

Chapter 19: Sermon Illustrations .........................................................................................210
   Unlocking Sermon Illustrations ............................................................................................211
   Opening Sermon Illustrations ..............................................................................................211
   Viewing and Copying Sermon Illustrations ..........................................................................212


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                   P a g e 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS

   Filtering Sermon Illustrations ...............................................................................................212
   Adding Sermon Illustrations ................................................................................................213
   Editing or Deleting a Sermon Illustration .............................................................................214

Chapter 20: The Graphics Viewer ........................................................................................215
   Opening the Graphics Viewer..............................................................................................216
   Viewing Graphics ................................................................................................................217
       Selecting Graphics within the Graphic File ......................................................................217
       Panning Graphics ...........................................................................................................217
       Resizing Graphics...........................................................................................................218
   Copying Graphics................................................................................................................218

Chapter 21: The STEP Reader ..............................................................................................219
   Opening The STEP Reader ................................................................................................220
   Viewing STEP Books ..........................................................................................................221
   Pasting Into Notes ..............................................................................................................221
   Searching STEP Books .......................................................................................................222

Chapter 22: Searching e-Sword Using Regular Expressions ............................................223
   Regular Expressions ...........................................................................................................224
   Conventions Used in this Chapter .......................................................................................224
   Lesson 1: Case sensitive; Characters found anywhere .......................................................225
   Lesson 2: Literal vs. Special Meaning Characters ...............................................................225
   Lesson 3: Word Boundaries ................................................................................................226
   Lesson 4: Dot Character .....................................................................................................227
   Lesson 5: Brackets “[]” ........................................................................................................228
   Lesson 6: Range of characters “-” .......................................................................................228
   Lesson 7: Caret “^” ..............................................................................................................229
   Lesson 8: Word Characters “w” ..........................................................................................230
   Lesson 9: Non-Word Characters “W” .................................................................................231
   Lesson 10: Pipe Character “|” and Parenthesis “()” ............................................................232
   Lesson 11: Digit “d” ............................................................................................................233
   Lesson 12: Quantifiers "*", "+", and "?"................................................................................234
   Lesson 13: Curly brackets “{}” .............................................................................................236
   Lesson 14: Beginning Verse Anchor “^” ..............................................................................236
   Lesson 15: Ending Verse Anchor “$” ...................................................................................237
   Lesson 16: Putting It All Together with Useful Examples .....................................................238
       Example 1: Verses Starting/Ending with a Specific Characters .......................................238
       Example 2: Finding Words Beginning/Ending with Specific Characters ..........................239

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                               P a g e 11
Example 3: Finding Verses Only If They Contain Two+ Specific Words. .........................240
     Example 4: Finding “Wildcard” Verses References. ........................................................241
     Example 5: Finding a Verse with Words in Proximity to other Words. .............................242
     Reference Information on Regular Expressions. .............................................................242




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                            P a g e 12
ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE


About this User’s Guide

About e-Sword
Rick Meyers, the creator of e-Sword, has given us a wonderful tool to study the Word of God.
Learning the many features available through e-Sword Bible study software will bring new life to
your study of the Living Word.

This documentation is for: e-Sword 10.0.5. If you are not running the latest version of e-Sword,
please visit the http://www.e-sword.net to download the latest version.

e-Sword® is a registered trademark of Rick Meyers. All rights reserved.

BibleSupport.com is run independently of e-Sword by a community of volunteers.

Goal of this Documentation
The goal of this documentation is to explain every e-Sword feature for both the casual and
advanced user. This documentation is the product of hundreds of hours of work.

If you have questions about a feature, we hope you can easily find the answers you are seeking
by referring to the hyperlinked Table of Contents. If you’re viewing this document in a PDF
browser, the Table of Contents is available in the Bookmarks window. The Table of Contents is
invaluable for using this documentation.

This documentation uses informal, conversational English, keeping with our goal of real-world
use by Christians wanting to learn more about e-Sword. The best way to accomplish our goal is
to use conversational English.

Documentation Authors
A concept of this manual was first written in 2003 by Barrie Gordon and Johan Struwig.

Sarah Valente completely rewrote the manual in June 2011. Other than the organizational
structure, the documentation Sarah produced bears little resemblance to the 2003 version.

Josh Bond rewrote and reorganized the manual, split in two revisions: July 2011 and November
2011.

This documentation is produced by BibleSupport.com.

Copyright and Distribution
This text is copyrighted only to prevent the documentation from being used for commercial
profit.

You may freely copy and distribute this documentation as long as you do not make any
changes or use the documentation commercially, including charging, in any way, for it’s use,
reading or distribution.

If you have any questions on this policy, contact Josh Bond at BibleSupport.com.


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 13
What’s New in e-Sword 10?
e-Sword 10 brings powerful new features to make your Bible study more productive. Rick
Meyers listened to users’ feedback and delivered on some of the most asked for functionality.

All properly constructed e-Sword 9 modules are compatible with e-Sword 10.


Reference Library
The Reference Library is now the central place to view your downloaded Topic files and a new
type of file called Reference Books (.refx). In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes
window displayed downloaded, third party Topic Notes. Now, this material is viewed through
the Reference Library instead of the Topics Editor.

Search All Topics At Once
The Reference Library lets you filter your resources by title and search all of your Topic
Notes at once! These two features are so powerful, they alone could have been the upgrade!

REFX File Format
Also new with the Reference Library is the ability to convert a Topics Note file to Reference
Book format (.refx). This file is compressed and prevents others from modifying your data!
You can convert your Topic Note files into Reference Book format. Here’s a comparison
between .refx and .topx formats:


 Reference Library Book (.refx)                         Topic Note (.topx)

Cannot be edited.                            Can be edited.


                                             Can be viewed in either the Reference
                                             Library or the Topic Editor. (But third
Can only be viewed in the Reference
                                             party Topic Notes should be viewed
Library.
                                             with the Reference Library unless you
                                             need to edit them).


                                             Compatible with e-Sword 9.x-10+, but
                                             images, headers/footers, hyperlinks,
Only compatible with e-Sword 10+
                                             and bookmarks will not display
                                             properly.



Support For Pictures
The new Reference Library Book format supports pictures. And that’s not all. Topic Notes also
support pictures!

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 14
WHAT’S NEW IN E-SWORD 10?

New Editor with True Word Processing Power
e-Sword 10’s editor seems less like an editor and more like a word processor. The new editor is
more robust and supports an array of new features. Now your Journal, Study, and Topic
Notes will benefit from:

   •    Hyperlinks
   •    Bookmarks
   •    Images/Pictures
   •    Tables
   •    Borders
   •    Columns
   •    Headers/Footers
   •    Page Layout View


SermonAudio.com Integration
e-Sword is integrated with SermonAudio.com. You can listen to sermons while you study the
Bible. This window automatically organizes sermons by verse according to the active
passage of scripture in the e-Sword Bibles window!


STEP Reader Still Included
Don’t worry— the STEP Reader is still included with e-Sword 10! But the icon has been
removed from the e-Sword main window. You can still access the STEP Reader by clicking
Tools from the main menu and choosing STEP Reader.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 15
Chapter 1: Getting to Know e-Sword

This chapter is intended for Christians who have not used e-Sword previously. The pages that
follow explain how scripture appears in e-Sword, the main e-Sword screen, the content
windows, the toolbars, and other helpful hints and tips to get you started.



What’s in this Chapter?
     e-Sword Interface Overview..............................................................................................17
     The Main Toolbar and Main Menu ....................................................................................21
     Maximizing Window Views ................................................................................................23
     Bible Books Navigation Tree .............................................................................................23
     Introduction to the Bibles Window .....................................................................................24
     Introduction to the Commentaries Window .......................................................................28
     Introduction to the Editors Window ...................................................................................29
     Introduction to the Dictionaries Window ............................................................................30
     Introduction to the Reference Library ................................................................................31




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                        P a g e 16
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

e-Sword Interface Overview
When you launch e-Sword, you will see a screen similar to:




This is the e-Sword interface. All e-Sword features are available from this screen.

Notice the important screen areas: Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editors, and
Reference Library. Also notice the Bible Books window on the left side of screen.

e-Sword Quick References: Tooltips
You may have noticed the green, underlined Bible
verses in the Commentaries window above. e-Sword
automatically recognizes Bible verses and Strong’s
numbers. When you see a scripture reference or a
Strong’s number, hover your mouse pointer over the
reference. A “tooltip” window appears, revealing the
text of the scripture or the definition of the Strong’s
number.

TIP: Press the F4 button to copy the
reference text to the Windows clipboard. You
can paste (Ctrl-V) the definition into the
Notes Editor or your own word processor!




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 17
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

Common Tasks Menu
A universal, time saving feature available almost
everywhere in e-Sword is the “Common Tasks Menu”, or
“context menu”.

Right-click your mouse in nearly any display window to
reveal a “popup menu” of common tasks. These
shortcuts are available in the Bible, Commentary,
Dictionary, Editor, Reference Library, and other windows.


e-Sword Hotkey Reference Sheet
The hotkey shortcuts may be used throughout e-Sword
unless otherwise noted. When more than one key is
shown, press both keys simultaneously.

Hotkey                    Description

F2                        Lookup Reference                        (dialog)

F3                        Next Search Result

F4                        Copy ToolTip

F5                        Previous Bible Chapter

F7                        Spell Check                             Editors only

F8                        Next Bible Chapter

F9                        Previous Bible Verse

F11                       Toggle Paste As Formatted               Editors only

F12                       Next Bible Verse

ALT-1                     Bookmark 1

ALT-2                     Bookmark 2

ALT-3                     Bookmark 3

ALT-4                     Bookmark 4

ALT-5                     Bookmark 5

ALT-6                     Bookmark 6



e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 18
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD


Hotkey                    Description

ALT-7                     Bookmark 7

ALT-8                     Bookmark 8

ALT-9                     Bookmark 9

ALT-0                     Bookmark 0

CTRL-A                    Select All

CTRL-B                    Bold                                    Editors only

CTRL-C                    Copy

CTRL-D                    Font                                    Editors only

CTRL-E                    Center                                  Editors only

CTRL-F                    Find                                    Editors only

CTRL-G                    Goto Bookmark                           Editors only

CTRL-H                    Highlight Scripture

CTRL-I                    Italic                                  Editors only

CTRL-J                    Format Scripture ToolTip                Editors only

CTRL-L                    Lookup Reference

CTRL-M                    Mark Scripture

CTRL-N                    Next Reference

CTRL-P                    Previous Reference

CTRL-R                    Replace                                 Editors only

CTRL-S                    Bible Search

CTRL-U                    Underline                               Editors only

CTRL-V                    Paste                                   Editors only

CTRL-X                    Cut                                     Editors only


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 19
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD


Hotkey                    Description

CTRL-Y                    Redo                                    Editors only

CTRL-Z                    Undo                                    Editors only

CTRL-TAB                  Indent Paragraph                        Editors only

SHIFT-TAB                 Outdent Paragraph                       Editors only

CTRL-F1                   Show All Windows

CTRL-F2                   Bible Maximized

CTRL-F3                   Commentary Maximized

CTRL-F4                   Dictionary Maximized

CTRL-ENTER                Insert Page Break                       Editors only

CTRL-(Backspace)          Delete Previous Word                    Editors only

SHIFT-F3                  Previous Search Result

SHIFT-F7                  Thesaurus                               Editors only

SHIFT-ENTER               Insert Line Feed                        Editors only

CTRL-SHIFT-C              Copy Formatted Bible Text

CTRL-SHIFT-S              Extended Bible Search

CTRL-SHIFT-V              Paste Formatted Bible Text              Editors only

CTRL-SHIFT-                                                       Editors only
                          Insert Non-breaking Space
(Spacebar)




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 20
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

The Main Toolbar and Main Menu
The Main Menu contains menu commands and the Main Toolbar contains icons and pull down
menus. This documentation refers to the Main Toolbar and Main Menu using this terminology.

        TIP: Hover your mouse over the any icon on any Toolbar to view the
        command’s hint.




              Main Menu                                                              Main Toolbar

Main Toolbar Icon Summary

    Icon         Icon Name                          Icon Function                        Hotkey
                 Lookup           e-Sword will navigate to the Bible location
                 Scripture        typed in this box. Press the hotkey to quickly         CTRL-L
                 Reference        activate this box.
                 Lookup           e-Sword will popup a Lookup Scripture
                 Scripture        Reference window for navigating to a Scripture            F2
                 Reference        passage.
                 Previous         Click to retrieve the previous verses in your
                 Reference        verse history (resets each e-Sword session).           CTRL-P


                 Next             Click to move forward in your verse history, if
                 Reference        you moved backward with the above
                                                                                         CTRL-N
                                  command (resets each e-Sword session).


                 Search           Use to perform a Bible search.
                                                                                         CTRL-S

                 Search           Use to return to previous search results (resets
                                                                                        SHIFT-F3
                 Previous         each e-Sword session)..
                 Search           This box displays the verses from the last
                 Results          search result. Scroll down to view additional
                                  results from the same search.


                 Search Next      Use to move forward in search results. Only
                                  works if you moved back at least once. (resets
                                                                                            F3
                                  each e-Sword session).


                 Verse List       Click to display the Verse List window.



e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                 P a g e 21
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD


    Icon         Icon Name                          Icon Function                    Hotkey
                 Previous         Click to display the Previous Verse in the
                 Verse            Verse List.
                 Verse List       This box displays the current verse in the
                 Display          Verse List.
                 Next Verse       Click to display the Next Verse in the Verse
                                  List.


                 Show All         This icon reveals the preset e-Sword layout:
                 Windows          displaying the Bibles, Commentaries,
                                                                                    CTRL-F1
                                  Dictionaries and Editors.


                 Bible            Click to display the Bible Translation window
                                                                                    CTRL-F2
                 Maximized        only.
                 Commentary       Click to display the Commentary window only.
                                                                                    CTRL-F3
                 Maximized
                 Dictionary       Click to display the Dictionary window only.
                                                                                    CTRL-F4
                 Maximized
                 Editor           Click to display the Editor window only.
                                                                                    CTRL-F5
                 Maximized
                 Graphics         Click to open the Graphics Viewer window.
                 Viewer
                 Reference        Click to open the Reference Library window.
                 Library




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 22
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

Maximizing Window Views
New users sometimes accidentally click one of the Maximized icons and struggle to restore the
correct view. Let's learn about the different views and how to control them.

Click the Bible Maximized icon      on the Main Toolbar. Notice how the Bible window is
maximized to display the current Bible translation only. You may also click the Commentary
Maximized       , Dictionary Maximized           , and Editor Maximized     icons.

Clicking on the Show All Windows    icon restores the original e-Sword layout. Click
Window from the main menu to see the same layout options, along with their shortcuts.


Bible Books Navigation Tree
The Bible Books window (shown to the right) contains all books of the
Bible in the order of the Christian Biblical canon.

You may use the Navigation Tree or the verse lookup box when
looking up specific references.

Above the Navigation Tree you will see an empty box:



This is the Lookup Scripture Reference box. Enter the text: “john
3:16” and click the Lookup Scripture Reference icon (Scripture icon).
The results will display in the Bibles window.

        TIP: Press the Ctrl-L key combination anywhere in e-Sword to
        place your cursor inside the Lookup Scripture Reference box
        so you can begin typing. For many uses, this is faster than
        using the mouse.

To minimize the Navigation Tree, click the push pin icon in the upper
right corner.

The Bible Books Navigation Tree may be e-Sword’s most simple yet
most convenient feature because of its speed and ease of use.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 23
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

Introduction to the Bibles Window
The Bibles window lets you view scripture and compare Bible translations. To minimize the
Bibles window, click the push pin icon in the top, right corner.




The Bibles window consists of three parts:

   •    The Bible tabs - you can switch from one translation to the another. Notice how e-
        Sword displays the full translation name when you hover your mouse over a tab. The
        KJV translation tab is selected in the screenshot above.

   •    The Main Text window - this window displays the Bible text.

   •    The Translation Toolbar - this toolbar contains the following icons:


    Icon         Icon Name                          Icon Function                    Hotkey
                 Print Preview Click to display the Print Preview window.

                 Print Verses     Click to print the current Bible chapter or
                                  selected text.
                 Bible Search     Search the active Bible translation.               CTRL-S
                 Select All       Select the entire Bible chapter.

                 Copy             Copy the selected text.

                 Copy Verses      Copy verse(s) to the Copy Verses window.

                 Paste Into       Pastes to the currently selected tab in the
                                  Editors window.


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 24
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD


    Icon         Icon Name                          Icon Function                    Hotkey
                 Highlight        Highlight a particular reference.
                                                                                     CTRL-H
                 Reference
                 Mark             Underline a reference in a variety of styles.      CTRL-M

                 Zoom             Makes the Bible text bigger or smaller.

                 Split View       Click to view two translations at once. Select
                                  the translations by using the translations tabs.
                 Chapter          Navigate backward one chapter. (Compare
                                                                                       F5
                 Back             Verse Mode: navigate backward one verse.)
                 Chapter          Navigate forward one chapter. (Compare
                                                                                       F8
                 Forward          Verse Mode: navigate forward one verse.)

Notice the Bibles window contains two tabs that are not Bible translations, the Compare
Verses tab and Parallel tab.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 25
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

The Compare Tab
The Compare tab lets you easily compare different translations of the Bible.

   1. Click a verse in the Bibles window using any translation.

   2. Notice the verse reference turns red.

   3. Click the Compare tab. e-Sword will list the verse you selected in every Bible
      translation, one after the other.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 26
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

The Parallel Tab
e-Sword lets you view up to eight Bible translations in parallel. Click the Parallel tab. At first,
only one translation appears:




Notice the pull down menus with Bible translations below. The first menu will show a Bible
translation, such as the KJV. Click the second drop down menu, and select another Bible
translation. You may view up to eight translations at once.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                  P a g e 27
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

Introduction to the Commentaries Window
The Commentaries window is shown in the top, right window by default. To minimize the
Commentaries window, click the push pin icon in the top, right corner of this window.




This window contains commentaries on the passage of Scripture displayed in the Bibles
window. The screenshot above shows the BBC commentary for Genesis 1:1. Each commentary
is represented by a single tab. Other commentaries you install appear in additional tabs.

By default, the Commentaries window displays the commentary for the current Bible verse.
You can verify this by clicking a different Bible verse in the Bibles window. The Commentary
window will update to show any comments for the new verse. See Chapter 7 for more
information on using the Commentaries window.

The icons in the Commentaries window are similar to the ones in the Bibles window:



The additional icons are:

    Icon         Icon Name                          Icon Function                    Hotkey
                 Link             Click to link the window to the Scripture in the
                                  Bibles window.
                 Book             Click to view a summary of the selected book.

                 Chapter          Click to view a summary of the selected
                                  chapter.
                 Verse            Click to view a summary of the selected verse.


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 28
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

Introduction to the Editors Window
The Editors window is displayed on the bottom, right in e-Sword by default.

The Editors window lets you view and write Journal Notes, Study Notes, and Topic Notes.

        TIP: In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes window displayed
        downloaded, third party Topic Notes. Often, Topic Notes contain books, essays,
        and papers written by other people. This material is now viewed through the
        Reference Library.

Most people use Journal Notes and Study Notes for personal note taking. The Journal Notes
are date specific because they contain your thoughts written on a specific day. The Study
Notes are verse specific, meaning each comment is related to a verse. Topic Notes are
subject specific, meaning your thoughts on various subjects. In previous versions of e-Sword,
you may have considered Topic Notes as “Books”. e-Sword now handles this functionality
through the Reference Library.




The Editors window is a fully functioning word processor within e-Sword. You may write and
save notes in the Journal Notes, Study Notes and Topic Notes sections.

        TIP: The Bibles, Commentaries, and Dictionaries windows have a Paste Into
        icon. Clicking this icon will paste your highlighted text into the active tab of the Editors
        window.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                 P a g e 29
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

Introduction to the Dictionaries Window
The Dictionaries window is on the bottom, left by default. To minimize the Dictionaries
window, click the push pin icon in the top, right corner. This window contains a number of Bible
dictionaries as well as an Encyclopedia (the International Standard Bible Encyclopedia).




To view Dictionary entries, click once on any word or Strong's number in the Bible,
Commentary, or Editor windows. Make sure the Link icon          is pressed to synchronize the
Bibles and Dictionaries windows with the Dictionaries window.

If a dictionary contains an entry for a word, a blue Information (i) icon appears on the left side
of the tab (see above).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 30
CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD

Introduction to the Reference Library
The other “Introductory” sections explained major sections of the e-Sword screen. The
Reference Library is represented on the main e-Sword screen with just a small icon:




                                                                         Reference
The Reference Library is now the central place to view your                  Library
downloaded Topic files and a new type of file called Reference Modules (.refx).

Material available from the Reference Library includes books, essays, and papers written by
other authors. Some may be as short as a few pages, and other resources may contain
thousands of pages. For example, BibleSupport.com hosts a number of William Evans’ and F.B.
Meyer’s books in Reference Book format. You can also download official Reference Modules
through the e-Sword Module Downloader.

        TIP: In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes window displayed downloaded,
        third party Topic Notes. Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library
        instead of the Topics Editor.

With the Reference Library you can:
   • Select resources to read with the drop down menu near the top of the screen.
   • Filter your resources by title (see top, right of the screen, which says “evans”)
   • Search all of your Topic Notes and Reference Library Books at once!




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 31
Chapter 2: Customizing e-Sword
You can customize e-Sword to suit your needs by adjusting the layout, window sizes, text and
background colors, and even font sizes. You can also choose a different application language,
download additional resources, delete resources, configure your resource tab settings, and
more. This chapter discusses most customizations possible with e-Sword.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Adjusting the Layout of e-Sword’s Main Screen ................................................................33
     Floating Window Customization ........................................................................................42
     Zoom Feature: A Gift for Old Eyes ....................................................................................43
     Changing Fonts and Sizes ................................................................................................44
     Changing Text and Background Colors ............................................................................45
     e-Sword Multilingual Settings ............................................................................................45
     Tooltip and Bookmark Options ..........................................................................................46
     Search Options .................................................................................................................47
     Reset e-Sword Settings ....................................................................................................47
     Hiding and Uninstalling Resources ...................................................................................48
     Configuring Resource Tabs ..............................................................................................50
     Changing the e-Sword Resource Location ........................................................................52
     Downloading Additional Resources ..................................................................................53
     Installing Unofficial Resources ..........................................................................................55




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                              P a g e 32
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Adjusting the Layout of e-Sword’s Main Screen
You may adjust the layout of e-Sword in several ways. Feel free to make changes knowing that
if you cannot undo the changes, e-Sword can. To restore e-Sword to the default settings, click
Help and then choose Reset e-Sword Settings. However, all settings are reset, not just the
layout settings.


Maximizing / Minimizing Window Panes With Push Pins
You may minimize any portion of the screen with a push pin icon. To minimize the
window, click the push pin icon and the window will minimize to the left side of the
screen. Click the push pin again, and the window area will maximize.

        SPACE SAVING TIP: On a laptop or small screen, every pixel counts. You can
        minimize the Bible Books window (which shows the Books and Chapters of the Bible
        by default). When you need to change Bible verses, press the F2 button and a Lookup
        Scripture Reference window appears at the location of your mouse pointer. Use this
        window to change Bible verses. The window closes after you select a verse.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 33
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Maximizing Window Panes With the Window Menu
You may maximize any of the four windows panes to full screen. Click Window from the main
menu, and then click one of the Maximized options shown below. In our example, we chose
Bible Maximized to expand the Bibles window full screen.

To show all windows again, click Window from the main menu, and click Show All Windows.

If you need to switch between Show All Windows and one of the Maximized options
frequently, use the hotkey combinations shown in the Window menu:




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                        P a g e 34
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Making Window Panes Larger or Smaller
You can make the Bible, Commentary, Dictionary, and Editor windows larger or smaller
relative to each other.

Notice the yellow-highlighted divider lines between the windows below. You may adjust the
width and length of the windows:

   1. Position your mouse pointer over the divider line,

   2. Left-click and hold the divider line, and

   3. Drag the line up/down or left/right as appropriate.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                        P a g e 35
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Window Docking Introduction
By default, e-Sword shows five windows, including the four labeled below and the Bible Books
window on the far left.




You can re-arrange these windows in hundreds of different combinations!

        REMEMBER: If you’re unhappy with your new configuration, you can restore e-Sword to
        the default settings by clicking Help and then choosing Reset e-Sword Settings.
        However, all settings are reset, not just the layout settings.

The first time you experiment with window docking, be prepared to spend a few minutes gaining
a feel for this feature.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 36
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Docking Windows – Getting Started
You can reposition the four window panes (shown and labeled on the previous page) by
dragging window’s blue "title bar". This can result in hundreds of different views.


   1. Left-click the window pane you want to move (hold this click until step 4).




   2. While still holding the mouse left-click, move your mouse to another window and a
      Docking Image appears. Hover your pointer one of the Arrow Indicators (see red
      boxes below ).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 37
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

3. Notice a blue footprint shows you where this window will dock if you release the mouse
   click.




4. After releasing the mouse click, notice how your window pane is repositioned, with the
   Commentaries and Editors windows side-by-side instead of above/below each other.
   There are hundreds of possibilities, so keep experimenting until you find a combination you
   like.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 38
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Docking Windows: Overlapping
Two or more windows can occupy the same space—or overlap each other. For example, in the
screenshot below, notice the Commentaries and Editors tabs, shown in the red box.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                        P a g e 39
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

To produce the “overlapping” screen above, follow these steps:

   1. Left click the Commentaries window pane(1) and drag the window to the Editors
      window pane(2) until a blue footprint appears:




   2. Release the mouse click and the windows now overlap. The Commentaries and
      Editors tabs appear at the bottom, as shown in the screenshot on the previous page.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                        P a g e 40
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

To return the Editor and Commentaries to their original positions, as separate windows,
follow these steps:

   1. Left click the Editors tab(1) at the bottom of the screen and drag the toward the Arrow
      Indicator(2).




   2. Release the mouse click and Editors and Commentaries windows will return to
      separate windows, as shown in the screenshot on the previous page.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 41
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Floating Window Customization
Many of e-Swords features use Floating Windows. For example, the Reference Library
window “floats” on top of e-Sword’s main window. Other examples of floating windows include
the Step Reader, Prayer Requests, Bible Reading, Search/Extended Search, and many
other windows.

Floating Windows share properties you should be aware of:

   •    You can access the underlying e-Sword main window without closing a floating window.
        For example, if you need to reference the Bible, lookup a dictionary definition, view
        commentary text, or create a Study Note, click the e-Sword main window in the
        background.

   •    You can also move the e-Sword main window and floating windows so they are offset or
        in any configuration that suits your monitor (see below).




   •    You can resize a floating window (larger or smaller) by
        positioning your mouse over the edge of the window until the
        mouse pointer turns into a double arrow (as shown to the right).
        Drag the window in the direction you want to resize.

   •    Some floating windows have Minimize and Maximize buttons
        (left of the red X). Maximize will expand over the whole screen.
        The Minimize button will cause the window to disappear. To
        display a minimized window, click the e-Sword icon on your
        Windows taskbar.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 42
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Zoom Feature: A Gift for Old Eyes
e-Sword includes a very flexible Zoom Feature. Nearly every window containing study text
supports zooming, including Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editors, Reference
Library, and many other windows.

The Zoom Icon
Anytime you see the Zoom          icon, you can enlarge the text in that window by clicking the
icon. Click the icon again to restore your original view.

As you can see from the comparison below, the text isn’t just zoomed. The text is reflowed so
you do not have to use a horizontal scroll bar to view the text. The same holds true for images
and tabular charts.




Zooming with the Mouse Wheel
The advantage of this zoom method is you can quickly zoom to a custom magnification.

   1. Click anywhere in the window you want to zoom.

   2. Press the Ctrl button while scrolling the mouse wheel forward to zoom in or
      backward to zoom out.

   3. To restore the default zoom, click the Zoom            icon twice.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 43
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Changing Fonts and Sizes
e-Sword allows you to change the default fonts
to a style pleasing to your eye.

Click Options from the main menu, and then
click Fonts.

Default Font and Size: Specifies the font used
throughout e-Sword, including text for Bibles,
Commentaries, Dictionaries, Devotions, etc.

Tooltip Font Size: Specifies the font used to
“popup” the text from verse references (called
tooltips).




Editor Font: Specifies the default font used in
the Editor’s Window (Journal Notes, Study
Notes, and Topic Notes).

Greek, Hebrew, and Latin Font: Specifies the fonts e-Sword uses to display these commonly
found languages in Bibles, Commentaries, and Dictionaries.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                        P a g e 44
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Changing Text and Background Colors
e-Sword allows you to change the default
text colors to a configuration pleasing to
your eye.

Click Options from the main menu, and
then choose Text Colors.

You can select a Background color,
along with the text colors shown in the
screenshot to the right. The preview pane
at the bottom of the screenshot shows
your new color selections.

Popup: This color choice refers to the
ToolTip popup background window
where scripture text and Strong’s
definitions appear. This category does not
appear in the preview pane.

If you’re unhappy with the colors you selected, click the Cancel button. Otherwise, click the OK
button to save your changes.


e-Sword Multilingual Settings
Changing the e-Sword Application Language
If you prefer e-Sword communicates with you in a language other than English, you may select
another language.

Click Options from the main menu, and then select Language. Choose your preferred
language.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 45
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Tooltip and Bookmark Options
e-Sword lets you toggle the display of several
miscellaneous items. Click Options from the main menu to
see the toggle items shown to the right.


Display Scripture Tooltips: Toggles the appearance of
Scripture ToolTips. Scripture ToolTips are colored verse
references that “popup” the complete verse text from the
verse reference. John 3:16 is an example shown to the
right.


Display Strong’s # ToolTips: Toggles the
appearance of Strong’s Number ToolTips. Strong’s
Tooltips are colored Strong’s references that
“popup” the complete Strong’s text from the Hebrew
or Greek Strong’s reference. See the “H6838”
example.


Display Bookmark Navigator: Toggles the
appearance of the Bible window bookmarks, shown
in the red box below.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                        P a g e 46
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Search Options
e-Sword lets you toggle two search options. The search
options apply to searching throughout e-Sword, including
Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, and everywhere .

Click Options from the main menu to see the toggle items shown to the right

Highlight Search Results: When you perform a
search, e-Sword will highlight each word(s) that match
your search term(s), if you select this option.


Save Search Terms: e-Sword will “remember” your
search terms if you select this option. If enabled, you
can review your search terms and re-select a search
term to search again.

Reset e-Sword Settings
You can restore e-Sword to the default settings by
clicking Help and then choosing Reset e-Sword
Settings. This includes all settings presented in this
chapter up to this point.

Reset e-Sword Settings will not delete any modules you
added to e-Sword. But the reset will show all resources. If
you hid resources in the Resource Options window (see
next page), your selections will be discarded and all
resources will be visible.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 47
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Hiding and Uninstalling Resources
As you download e-Sword resources, your screen may become cluttered and overwhelming.
You may want to hide resources you don’t use often, or delete resources permanently.

Hiding Resources
You can hide resources without uninstalling them from your computer.




   1. Click Options on the main menu, and select Resources. The Resource Options
      window appears, as shown above.

   2. All of the installed Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Devotions, Graphics, and
      Reference Books will be listed. Remove the checkbox next to resources you want to
      hide.

   3. When you are pleased with your selections, click OK. You may reactivate any installed
      resource by adding a checkbox beside the resource.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 48
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Permanently Delete Resources
You may also permanently delete most resources.

   1. Click Options on the main menu, and select Resources. The Resource Options
      window appears, as shown above.

   2. All of the installed Bibles, commentaries and dictionaries are listed

   3. Right click any resource and a context menu appears. Select “Delete Resource
      Permanently” and the resource will be deleted. You cannot “undo” this operation without
      re-downloading the resource, so be absolutely sure first!

NOTE: e-Sword will automatically reinstall the modules below even if you delete them. The
modules below are essential to running e-Sword. While you can delete the modules for the
current session, when you restart e-Sword, the modules will be reinstalled. However, you can
hide these modules, as shown on the previous page.

          King James Bible                                   kjv.bblx
          King James with Strong’s Numbers                   kjv+.bblx
          Treasury of Scripture Knowledge                    tsk.cmtx
          Strong’s Dictionary                                strong.dctx
          Robertson’s Harmony of the Gospels                 robertson.harx


Deleting Editor Notes
Deleting a Journal Notes file, Study Notes file, or Topic Notes file must be done outside of e-
Sword. By default, e-Sword stores these files in your e-Sword user folder, usually “My
Documentse-sword”.

        WARNING: You should only delete files from your Windows computer if you have
        competent computer skills. If you’re not comfortable browsing folders and deleting
        files, you should not attempt this. Otherwise, you risk deleting the wrong file. e-Sword,
        or other programs on your computer, may not work properly.


   1. Make sure the Editor is not displaying the file you want to delete. If you delete a file,
      and exit e-Sword while the Editor is displaying the file you deleted, e-Sword will recreate
      a blank version of that file when you restart e-Sword.

   2. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to your “My Documents” folder. Then open the “e-
      Sword” folder. Select the file you want to delete by clicking it once.

   3. Press the Delete button and a Confirm File Delete window appears.

   4. Click Yes if you want to proceed with deleting the selected file. Otherwise, click No.

        WARNING: If you delete a file, and exit e-Sword while the Editor is displaying the file
        you deleted, e-Sword will recreate a blank version of that file when you restart e-Sword.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 49
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Configuring Resource Tabs
e-Sword present Bibles, commentaries, and dictionaries as resource tabs. You can control how
e-Sword presents resource tabs.

Display Tabs on a Single Row or Multiple Rows
In the screenshot below, the resource tabs span multiple rows. This is the default e-Sword
configuration:




This second screenshot shows the resource tabs on one row, with Scroll Left/Scroll Right
arrows to show resources that do not fit on the screen:




To display resource tabs on a single row:

   1. Click Options from the main menu.
   2. Choose Resources.
   3. At the bottom of the Resources window, tick the Display Tabs in a Single Row box.




Resource Tab Sorting - Advanced
e-Sword sorts resources in reverse alphabetical order, left to right, starting with the bottom
row. Confusion sometimes arises because e-Sword does not sort based on the resource tab
name. e-Sword sorts based on the actual filename of the resource.

If you’re an advanced user, you can change the e-Sword’s sort order by renaming the files. For
example, in most configurations, renaming a resource with a letter from the end of the alphabet
is likely to show the resource on the top row.

The e-Sword developer does not provide support for renaming resources to achieve a specific
sort order. Find support for this at BibleSupport.com.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 50
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Renaming Resource Tabs
This is a technical topic for advanced users. The e-Sword developer does not provide support
for renaming resource tabs. Instead, find support for this at BibleSupport.com.

You will not need to change the resource names for official e-Sword downloads.

However, you may find an unofficial resource that needs a different tab name. For example, a
resource may have a long tab name and you want to shorten the tab name. Occasionally, you
may find two unofficial downloads with the same tab name and you need to rename the tab.

Advanced users can download a free, third party database tool to edit unofficial resources.
BibleSupport.com hosts a tutorial explaining how to accomplish this and we also provide
support.


Resource Tab Conflicts
This is a technical topic for advanced users. This section does not apply to official e-Sword
downloads. The e-Sword developer does not provide support for resource tab conflicts.
Instead, find support for this at BibleSupport.com.

Resource tab conflicts arise when two resources have the same tab name. e-Sword resolves
this by showing only the first resource in the resource tabs. To display both resources, the tabs
must be renamed. Another way to resolve the conflict is to delete one of the resource files from
your hard drive.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 51
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Changing the e-Sword Resource Location
By default, e-Sword loads Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Devotions, Graphics, and
Reference Books from your “Program Filese-Sword” folder. On most Windows configurations
this folder is either:

   •    c:program filese-sword
   •    c:program files (x86)e-sword

If you want to store your e-Sword modules in a different folder or on a USB drive, you may
change the path and folder in the e-Sword resource Location field (see below).

For example, some churches configure e-Sword to read from a network drive so everyone
has access to the same material.

To change the e-Sword resource Location field:

   1. Click Options on the main menu, and select Resources. The Resource Options
      window appears, as shown below.

   2. Click the orange folder icon (inside the red box, as shown below).

   3. Navigate to your new folder in the Browse for Folder window and click the OK button to
      save and exit the Browse window.

   4. Click the OK button to save and exit the Resource Options window.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 52
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Downloading Additional Resources
You will find two types of e-Sword resources: official and unofficial.

Unofficial Resources
Unofficial resources may be found on many websites like www.biblesupport.com and
www.doctordavet.com. If you download unofficial resources, please see the next subsection,
“Installing Unofficial Resources”.

Official Resources
You may add official e-Sword resources by using the e-Sword
Module Downloader.

   1. Click Download on the main menu and select the type of
      resource you want to add from the drop down menu.

   2. The downloader is setup to browse by resource type.
      Click the resource category tab that interests you.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 53
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

   3. Click the blue hyperlink of the module you want to add.

   4. The selected module appears in the bottom window. You may add additional modules.

   5. When you are ready to start downloading, select Download from the Downloader
      menu and click Start.




        TIP: Before you can view the newly installed resource(s), you must re-start e-Sword.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 54
CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD

Installing Unofficial Resources
BibleSupport.com hosts thousands of e-Sword resources like the Pulpit Commentary. The list
grows nearly every day as members create additional resources. Downloading unofficial
resources requires you manually install the resources. Unofficial resources do not use the
official Module Downloader.

By default, e-Sword reads most resources from the “program filese-sword folder”, as discussed
in the Changing Your e-Sword Resource Location section.

Follow the steps below when downloading unofficial e-Sword resources. The instructions
assume the default resource installation folder.


Self Installing Resources
If the resource you download is an executable file (.exe), then run the executable to install the
resource automatically.


Compressed Zip File
If you download a resource that is compressed in a zip file (.zip), double click (or run) the zip file
to open it. Then copy the e-Sword resource to your e-Sword folder (see “Raw e-Sword
Resources” below).


Raw e-Sword Resources

Copy the following resource types to your “c:program filese-sword” folder

        Bible (.bblx)                  Commentary (.cmtx)                     Dictionary (.dctx)
        Topics File (.topx)            Reference Library (.refx)              Harmonies (.harx)
        Devotionals (.devx)

*64-bit versions of Windows use a slightly different e-Sword program files folder:
         “c:program files (x86)e-sword”.


Copy the following resource types to your “my documentse-sword” folder.

        Bible Reading Plan (.brpx)
        Memory Verse List (.memx)
        Verse List (.lstx)


Support for Unofficial e-Sword Resources
The e-Sword developer (Rick Meyers) does not support unofficial e-Sword resources. For
assistance viewing, installing, or using third party resources, please post on the message
boards at BibleSupport.com




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                    P a g e 55
Chapter 3: The Bibles Window in Detail
The Bibles window is the heart of e-Sword, as you might expect from Bible study software. You
can lookup, compare, and analyze translations in a fraction of the time required by traditional
Bible study methods.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Navigating the Bible in the Bibles Window ........................................................................57
     Searching the Bible - Basic ...............................................................................................60
     Quick Searching – Context Menu .....................................................................................62
     Additional Search Options Wheel .....................................................................................63
     Searching Only the OT, NT, and Apocrypha .....................................................................64
     Extended Bible Search - Multiple Translations ..................................................................65
     Searching the Bible - Advanced ........................................................................................66
     Copying and Printing Bible Searches ................................................................................67
     Copying/Printing Entire Bible Passages ............................................................................69
     Copying and Printing from Parallel Mode ..........................................................................70
     Working with Strong's Hebrew and Greek Numbers .........................................................71
     Searching by Strong's Numbers .......................................................................................73
     The Compare Tab.............................................................................................................75
     The Parallel Tab ...............................................................................................................76
     Split Bible View .................................................................................................................77
     Analyzing Verses – Passage Theme and Word Distribution .............................................78
     Using the Gospel Harmony ...............................................................................................80
     Displaying Information about a Bible Translation ..............................................................81




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                P a g e 56
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Navigating the Bible in the Bibles Window
The Bibles window displays the text of your Bible translations.

You can change the passage of Scripture displayed using several methods.

   •    You may use the scroll bar to show different verses.

   •    You may navigate from chapter to chapter buy using the Previous Chapter (F5) and
        Next Chapter (F8) icons (highlighted in red below).

   •    When you click a ToolTipped verse elsewhere in e-Sword, the Bible window’s active
        passage changes to match the verse you clicked.

   •    The active passage is always highlighted in red. In the example below, Genesis 1:5 is
        the active passage.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 57
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Using the Bible Books Window
The Bible Books window (shown to the right) contains all books of
the Bible in the order of the Christian Biblical canon.

You may use the Bible Books window or the Lookup Scripture
Reference box when looking up verse references.

The Lookup Scripture box is on the main e-Sword toolbar and by
default, above the Bible Books window. In the screenshot below, “john
3:16” has been entered. After entering the verse, press the Enter key
for the Bibles window to display the passage.




To minimize the Bible Books window, click the push pin icon in the
top, right corner.

        TIP: Pressing the Ctrl-L hotkey combination anywhere in e-
        Sword will place your cursor inside the Lookup Scripture
        Reference box. This may be faster than using your mouse.




Using the Lookup Scripture Reference Popup
Click the Lookup Scripture Reference              icon or press the F2
button to display this window.

This window is undocked. The window “floats” so you
can move the window as necessary.

Right-click a Bible book name to quickly open the first
verse/chapter. e-Sword will instantly change the Bibles
window to the first verse of the book you selected.

Right-click a chapter number to immediately view that
chapter.

Left-click or right-click a verse to show that verse.

        TIP: If you need more screen space, hide the
        Bible Books window (see image above) by
        clicking the push pin icon (top image, far right).
        Then you can use the Lookup Scripture Reference popup to navigate the Bible by
        pressing the F2 button.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 58
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Viewing Your Previous Bible Search Results
You can access the results of your last Bible search (or extended
Bible search).

Hover your mouse over the drop down menu between the Search
Previous     and Search Next       icons. This lets you see the search
word(s) of the last search (so you will know what the verses in the drop
down menu have in common).

The drop down menu contains the verse results of your last search.
Click any verse in the list to lookup and display the verse text in the
Bible window. You may also cycle through each verse in the list by
clicking the Search Previous        or Search Next      icons.

        TIP: Save time by using the hotkeys instead of the icons! Search Previous is Shift-F3
        and Search Next is F3. Press the Shift key and the letter at the same time.


Viewing Your Verse History
If you find yourself rabbit-trailing through the Scriptures you can easily
find your way back to the verse you started with.

You an access every verse you viewed since e-Sword started by
clicking the Next Reference     and Previous Reference
icons.

To review the complete list of verses, click the black, down arrows
to show the verse list window (see screenshot on the right).

To lookup and display the text of each verse, one-by-one, click the
blue left/right arrows.

        TIP: If you have not clicked the Previous Reference
        icon, the Next Reference        icon will be grayed-out.

        TIP: Save time by using hotkeys instead of the icons! Previous Reference is Ctrl-P and
        Next Reference is Ctrl-N. Press the Shift key and the letter at the same time.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 59
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Searching the Bible - Basic

   1. To search the KJV Bible, click the Search    icon in the Bibles window. Or,
      select Bible from the main menu and then select Search.

   2. A search window appears, as shown below. If you clicked the KJV tab, you will
      see "Bible Search - KJV" at the top of the search window.

        Your search is limited to this translation. To search a different translation, select
        the translation from the drop down menu. The KJV translation is selected below.




   3. Type your search word(s) in the first field. Not sure how to spell your search
      terms? Give it your best guess and then click the spell check       icon.

   4. In the following example, we typed, "help God righteousness" in the search
      field.

   5. To find a verse with all of these words, we selected Search for all of the words
      from the drop down menu.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                 P a g e 60
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL


   6. Click the Search      icon in the top, right corner of this window. As you can see,
      there is only one verse in the KJV Bible containing all three of these words.




   7. Click any of the verses that match your search (one in this example, Isa. 41:10) to
      change your Bibles window to that verse.

If we selected, Search for any of the words, e-Sword would have matched results for 4,211
different verses!

If we selected, Search for the exact phrase, e-Sword would have returned 0 verses.


        TIP: The Apocrypha (Orthodox Anagignoskomena and Catholic Deuterocanon) are
        supported. When you search the Bible as a whole (as with the example above),
        Apocrypha results are shown if your active Bible includes those books.

        The Apocrypha search results appear after the results for Revelation because of the
        Apocrypha’s location in the e-Sword database.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 61
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Quick Searching – Context Menu
You may right-click the mouse button from any passage in the Bibles window to perform a
quick search.

        1. Navigate to Matthew 13:41.

        2. Right-click your mouse on the word “angels”. Note the submenu:




        3. The first entry in the context menu is: “Quick Search on: angels”. Move your mouse
           pointer over this option. The menu will expand and prompt you to search the Entire
           Bible or to limit your search to the Old Testament, New Testament or Matthew
           only.

        4. Click New Testament and the current translation's search window will open with all
           New Testament matches for the word “angels”.

        5. Click Accept to return to the Bibles window. e-Sword will display the first reference
           to angels in the New Testament (Matthew 4:6).

        6. To view the next verse containing the word “angels”, right click any text in the
           Bibles window and select Search Next. This will display the next verse in the New
           Testament containing the word “angels” (Matthew 4:11).

        7. If you want to again display the previous verse where the word angels occurred,
           right click any text in the Bibles window, and select Search Previous. This will
           display the previous verse containing the word angels.

                TIP: Save time by using hotkeys instead of the icons! Search Previous is Shift-
                F3 and Search Next is F3. Press the Shift key and the letter at the same time.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 62
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Additional Search Options Wheel
For an even more specific search, click the search wheel, (highlighted in red below). You may
use this more specific search with or without Regular Expressions, discussed in Chapter 22.




Note the powerful search features above. You can limit your search to certain books of the
Bible or make your search case sensitive to find “god” with a lower-case “g”.

In the following screen, we have performed a Partial Search for the word "child". If we exclude
the word "children," e-Sword will display results for "child," "childless," and "child's".




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 63
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Searching Only the OT, NT, and Apocrypha
You can search only the Old Testament, New Testament, or
Apocrypha. When selecting either of these categories, the Search
Range automatically changes to include the beginning and ending
book.

These options are more for convenience than necessity. You can
perform the same searches by adjusting the Search Range
manually.

Apocrypha
The Apocrypha (Orthodox Anagignoskomena and Catholic
Deuterocanon) are now supported. Some Bible modules, such as the Revised Standard Version
and New Revised Standard Version include an additional section with these books.

Click Bible from the main menu and choose Search to show the Bible search screen. Notice
the Bible drop down menu. This menu lets you select which portions of the Bible to search,
including the Old Testament, New Testament, and Apocrypha.

        TIP: The Apocrypha search results appear after the results for Revelation because of
        the Apocrypha’s location in the e-Sword database.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 64
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Extended Bible Search - Multiple Translations
To search for words or phrases across multiple Bible translations, click Bible on the main menu,
and choose Extended Search.

        TIP: The more Bibles you search at once, the more time e-Sword will need to complete
        the search. Searching large numbers of Bibles may require a long time. The progress
        bar shows the current status of the search.



        You may press the Escape key to abort a search, while showing the results already
        found.

This window is almost identical to the basic Bible Search function, but you can select multiple
translations. Click the Bibles       icon to select which Bibles to search.

        REMEMBER: If you do not have any Bible translations selected with the Bibles
        icon, e-Sword will not display any results!




Search Results
Each keyword match is highlighted in yellow. Also notice that the search results are
grouped alphabetically by the Bible abbreviation.

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 65
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Searching the Bible - Advanced
Regular Expressions, also referred to as REGEX or REGEXP, use special codes to match
patterns of text in powerful ways. In e-Sword, regular expressions allow you to search the Bible
beyond the search methods you previously used.

This section is a very brief introduction to searching with Regular Expressions using e-Sword.
Chapter 22 covers this functionality in much greater detail.

If we select Regular expression from the drop down menu, we can perform a much broader
"wild card" search. For example, in the window below, we searched for words starting in “l” and
ending in “e” by typing b (the symbol for word boundary) followed by “l...e” and closed with the
word boundary symbol b.




For more information on searching with Regular Expressions and it’s exceptional power, see
Chapter 22.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 66
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Copying and Printing Bible Searches
If you don't have an active search, click Bible from the main menu and choose Search. Enter
your search text and click the Search       icon to search the active translation.

After performing your search, click the Copy/Paste Into             icon. You can choose from the
options below to format the search results:




        Abbreviate Book Names - When selecting this option, the book names of the Bible are
        abbreviated. For example, Genesis is copied as “Gen.”

        Include Translation Name - When selecting this option, the displayed text includes the
        name of the Bible translation.

        Include Character Formatting - This option is selected by default. Notice how the Bible
        references appear in green. If you deselect the Include Character Formatting option,
        the character formatting such as bold, italics, etc. is not included.

        Reference Delimiters - This option specifies how the references should be enclosed.
        The default is by using parenthesis. You may enclose the reference with quotation
        marks, or any other symbol by entering the character into the Reference Delimiters
        Starting and Ending fields.

        Format - e-Sword gives you the option of copying references in a variety of formats. For
        example, you may place the Bible reference at the beginning or ending of a verse. Click
        the numbers to the left of the Copy Verses window to see the different possibilities.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                 P a g e 67
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

        Include Commentary Notes - If you have one or more commentaries installed, you can
        also include one of the commentary notes in the copy process. Select the commentary
        of your choice by clicking on the drop down box next to the Include Commentary Notes
        option.

Once you’ve selected the formatting options, click Copy (to copy to your clipboard for pasting to
any other word processor) or Paste Into (to paste directly to the Editors window in the location
where you last placed your cursor).


Printing
To print your search result, click the Print    icon. You will be able to format your results
before printing just as you did before copying.


Quick Copying
When you right-click the mouse button on any text in the Bibles window, a submenu appears.
Copy, Copy Verses, and Paste into Study Notes are available as quick copy options.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 68
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Copying/Printing Entire Bible Passages
In addition to copying, pasting, and printing e- Sword search results, e-Sword lets you copy,
paste, and print entire Bible passages.

   1. Click Bible on the main menu and then select Copy Verses.

        TIP: You may also click the Copy Verses               icon from the Bibles window toolbar.

   2. Then select Copy Verses to copy/paste (or select Print Verses to print).

        TIP: You may also use your mouse to select the verses you want to print before loading
        this window. Your selected verses will automatically appear in the window below.




You have a variety of formatting options for your Bible passage:

        Abbreviate Book Names - When selecting this option, the book names of the Bible are
        abbreviated. For example, Genesis is copied as “Gen.”

        Include Translation Name - When selecting this option, the displayed text includes the
        name of the Bible translation.

        Include Character Formatting - This option is selected by default. Notice how the Bible
        references appear in green. If you deselect the Include Character Formatting option,
        the character formatting such as bold, italics, etc. is not included.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                   P a g e 69
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

        Reference Delimiters - This option specifies how the references should be enclosed.
        The default is by using parenthesis. You may enclose the reference with quotation
        marks, or any other symbol by entering the character into the Reference Delimiters
        Starting and Ending fields.

        Format - e-Sword gives you the option of copying references in a variety of formats. For
        example, you may place the Bible reference at the beginning or ending of a verse. Click
        the numbers to the left of the Copy Verses window to see the different possibilities.

        Include Commentary Notes - If you have one or more commentaries installed, you can
        also include one of the commentary notes in the copy process. Select the commentary
        of your choice by clicking on the drop down box next to the Include Commentary Notes
        option.


Copying and Printing from Parallel Mode
If you want to print the parallel Bible chapter as shown in the Bibles window (after clicking the
Parallel icon), select the Print Preview icon. The Print Preview window opens, and you can
print the chapter.

If you want to copy and paste the parallel Bible chapter, click the Select All    icon in the
Bibles window. This selects the entire chapter in all chosen Bible translations. Click the Copy
     icon to copy the chapter. The formatted text will be copied to your windows clipboard.

You can paste the text into the word processor of your choice. If you decide to use the Editors
window, instead of another word processor, the task is even easier. After you click the Select
All    icon, click the Paste Into    icon. The entire parallel Bible chapter will be pasted into
the Editors window at the location where you last placed the cursor.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 70
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Working with Strong's Hebrew and Greek Numbers
The study of Hebrew and Greek text, without first learning Hebrew or Greek, is one of e-
Sword's most powerful features. This is accomplished through the Strong's number system.
James Strong assigned every unique Hebrew and Greek word in the Bible a number. Thanks to
Strong’s numbers, we are able to easily search the Scriptures to locate Hebrew and Greek
words.

Strong’s Number Basics
The Old Testament was written in Hebrew, and the New Testament was written in Greek. The
Strong’s numbering system formats the Old Testament in Hebrew with an “H” in front of the
number and the New Testament Greek with a “G” in front of the number. For example, the
reference, “H430,” refers to Old Testament. “G430” represents a word in the New Testament
and has no correlation to the Hebrew “H430” word.

e-Sword Modules with Strong’s Numbers
e-Sword Bible modules include a “+” sign when the Bible includes Strong’s numbers, such as
KJV+, which refers to the King James Version with Strong's numbers.

Let's view a practical example. When reading the passage starting in John 21:15 (in the KJV+
version), notice the different Greek words that translate to a variation of our word "love". G25
correlates to “love” as does “G5368”.




Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions Without Leaving the Bible Window
Strong’s numbers can be viewed without leaving the Bible window.

Strong's definitions can be displayed as "ToolTips". Place the mouse pointer over a Strong's
number and the definition will display in a ToolTip popup, as shown above.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 71
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window
To view the Strong's definition in the Dictionary window, click a word in the Bibles window and
look for the blue (i) information icons to appear in the Dictionaries window (be sure the link
icon      is selected).

e-Sword notifies you that other dictionaries also have a match for this term by displaying an
information (i) icon next to the resource. Click that dictionary’s resource tab to view the entry.




Normally, we would compare similar words in the verse by repeating the process. In this case,
Strong’s identifies the word “G5368” above so we can click the link (see above) to view that
definition:




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 72
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Searching by Strong's Numbers
This feature lets you see the many ways a Hebrew or Greek word was translated into English
throughout the Bible. This is very helpful when conducting word studies.

Click Bible from the main menu and click Search. Choose the KJV+ version.

If you click a Strong's number (while using KJV+), and then click the Search         icon, you can
search any portion of the Bible for uses of that Hebrew or Greek word.

In our example below, we searched for “G25”:




        TIP: Strong’s numbers can be viewed without leaving the Bible window. Strong's
        definitions can be displayed as "ToolTips". Place the mouse pointer over a Strong's
        number and the definition will display in a ToolTip popup, as shown above.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 73
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL



From the Bible window view, you may quickly search for a Strong’s number by right clicking
the Strong’s number and selecting which portion of the Bible to search.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 74
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

The Compare Tab
The Compare tab lets you easily compare different translations of the Bible.

   1. First, click a verse in the active translation.

   2. Notice the verse reference turns red.

   3. Click the Compare tab. e-Sword will alphabetically list the verse you selected in every
      installed translation, one after the other.




To change which translations e-Sword compares, click Options from the main Menu. Then
click Compare and select or unselect Bibles to compare.

        TIP: When using the Compare view, the Chapter Back      icon navigates backward
        one verse (not chapter). And the Chapter Forward   icon navigates forward one
        verse (not chapter).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 75
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

The Parallel Tab
e-Sword lets you view up to eight Bible translations simultaneously.

   1. Click the Parallel tab. At first, only one translation appears:




   2. Notice the pull down menus with Bible translations (screenshot below). The first box
      shows a Bible translation, such as the KJV. Click the second drop down box, and select
      another Bible translation. You may view up to eight translations together.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 76
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Split Bible View

The Split icon      is on the Bible window toolbar. The Split feature lets you display two
different passages of scripture independently of each other. The Bibles window splits in two
sections, both showing a different passage. You can navigate to a different passage in one
section of the screen, while the other section remains anchored.

This is very useful when you want to display a passage in one half of the screen for reference
while you study a different passage in the other half. Another example is sometimes the New
Testament will reference the Old Testament. If you want to study the passages together you
can use the Split Bible feature.

To split the Bibles window into two sections, click the Split icon . The currently active
passage becomes "anchored" in the bottom pane of the view. You may then navigate to any
other place in the Bible and the top pane will change accordingly.

When finished, click the Split icon to a “raised” position to return the Bible view to a unified
view.

In the example below, we selected the King James Version and we split the Bibles window at
John 3. We then selected the LITV Bible and Matthew 3. Notice how both sections can be
scrolled independently. Even if we navigate to another part of the Bible, the bottom pane will
remain anchored.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                 P a g e 77
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Analyzing Verses – Passage Theme and Word Distribution
Have you wanted to know the theme or emphasis of a passage at a high level? Or have you
wondered how many times specific words are used in a verse, chapter, or book of the Bible?

The Analyze Verses feature lets you answer these questions.

         1. In our example below, we searched the verse range Genesis 1:1 – Genesis
            50:26 (first chapter of Genesis).

             TIP: e-Sword will automatically use your current verse shown in the Bibles
             window. If you highlight multiple verses in the Bibles window, e-Sword uses
             the range of verses you selected without you having to enter the range
             manually!

         2. To find out how many times "Word" is used in the first chapter of John,
            select Bibles from the main menu and choose Analyze Verses.

         3. Select the book, chapter and verses to analyze and click the Analyze
            button. e-Sword will analyze the passage in the active translation. To select
            a different Bible translation, click a different Bible tab in the Bibles window.




         4. From the partial list of results, we see a heavy concentration of “Jacob”,
            “Joseph”, and “son”. By excluding additional words and shortening our
            passage, we can refine our results.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 78
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL


         5. To exclude words from your search, click the Add Word to List  icon at
            the bottom of the Common Words location box. Be sure the Exclude
            Common Words checkbox is ticked before running your search.

         6. You may also move words to the Common Words panel by selecting words
             from the list and then clicking the blue directional arrow . To remove a
             common word from the Common Words list, press the Delete Selected
             Word from List         icon.

            TIP: Words such as "the", "of" "and", "in" and "to" are numerous in the
            English language and you may want to exclude them from the list. "But" is
            also common, although “but” has important theological implications in the
            Epistles. Use caution when excluding “but”. Personal pronouns such as "I",
            "you", "we" and "us" are also common, but they may be quite important to
            any passage in the Epistles because they show emphasis.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 79
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Using the Gospel Harmony
Traditionally, a Gospel harmony is an attempt to merge or harmonize the four canonical gospels
(Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John) into a single gospel account. e-Sword accomplishes this task
by showing you the gospels together, as shown below.

Click Bible from the menu and then click Harmony to display the Harmony window.

From this window, you can choose which Harmony to display from the Harmony tabs. You can
quickly see the content of a Harmony module by clicking the Harmony drop down menu (see
below).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 80
CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL

Displaying Information about a Bible Translation
To view information on an installed Bible translation, select the Bible translation tab in the Bibles
window. Then select Bible from the main menu and then click Information. The Bible
Information window appears.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 81
Chapter 4: Highlighting, Marking, and Bookmarking
Resources
e-Sword lets you mark, highlight and bookmark text in the Bibles window. You can also highlight
text for most resource types including Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editor Notes (Journal, Study,
Topical), and Reference Books.

Highlighting and marking features can be with Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editor Notes
(Journal, Study, Topic), and Reference Books.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Highlighting Text ...............................................................................................................83
     Marking Text .....................................................................................................................85
     Working with Bookmarks ..................................................................................................86
     Bible Markup File ..............................................................................................................88




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                                P a g e 82
CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES

Highlighting Text
When we like a verse in our paper Bibles, we often highlight important text for later reference.
Although the examples below use the Bible, you can highlight text for most resource types
including Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editor Notes (Journal, Study, Topical), and
Reference Books.

You may highlight text any where you see the Highlight Reference          icon.

To highlight text:

        1. Click to the left of the first word you want to highlight.

        2. While holding the left mouse button down, drag the mouse to
           the last word you want to select.

        3. Release the left mouse button. The text should be
           selected (the background will be blue and the text
           white).

                TIP: To quickly highlight text, right click your mouse and choose
                Highlight from the context menu or press the Ctrl-H key combination.

        4. After selecting a word, phrase, or reference, the Highlight Reference
           icon is activated. Click the Highlight Reference “down-arrow” icon, and then
           choose the highlighter color. Once chosen, the new color appears under the
           “abs” part of the icon for quicker use (see screenshot on the next page).




        To remove a highlight, repeat the process above and apply the
        white highlighter.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 83
CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES

        TIP: Highlighting text in one Bible translation does not highlight the text in any other
        Bible translation!

        WARNING: If the tab name of a Bible changes, your highlights for that resource will
        disappear. You can recover your highlights by editing the “markup.ovlx” file, which is a
        SQLite database. For help with this process, please post on the message boards at
        BibleSupport.com.

        REMEMBER: The above example uses a Bible. You may use this same process for
        Highlighting text in Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editor Notes (Journal, Study,
        Topical), and Reference Books. You can highlight text any where you see the
        Highlight Reference      icon.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 84
CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES

Marking Text
Marking text is similar to highlighting text, except Marking underlines the text instead of
highlighting. You can mark text in Bibles, Commentaries, and Dictionaries by clicking the
Mark Reference           icon.

e-Sword lets you use the highlight and mark functions both separately and together:




   1. Select the text and click the Mark Reference           icon to underline a reference in a
      variety of underline styles.

   2. To remove the underlining, repeat the process and select the unmarked option instead.

        TIP: You can also select text, right click your mouse, and choose Mark from the
        context menu.

        TIP: The above example uses a Bible. You may use this same process for
        Marking text in a Commentary or Dictionary. Marking does not work in the
        Editors Window (Topic Notes, Journal Notes, and Study Notes) or the Reference
        Library.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 85
CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES

Working with Bookmarks
e-Sword lets you bookmark verses just as you would in your paper Bible. e-Sword supports
ten bookmarks, and you can easily change them. The Bookmarks are the numbered ribbons
in the screenshot below.

If you do not see the Bookmarks bar in e-Sword, activate the feature by clicking Options on the
main menu and placing a checkmark next to Display Bookmark Navigator.

Setting Bookmarks

        1. Place your cursor on the top bookmark ribbon (the numbered ribbons
           on the right side of the Bibles window).

        2. If you haven't saved a bookmark, the screen tip will display the default
           John 3:16 reference. First, select a verse in the Bibles window by
           clicking on the verse reference. The reference will turn red (see
           Proverbs 10:12 below).

        3. Right click a bookmark to override the current bookmark with your
           selected verse. The next time you place your pointer over the selected
           bookmark, it will display your saved verse reference instead of the
           default John 3:16 reference.




Accessing Bookmarks
To access our example verse, Proverbs 10:2, left click the bookmark where you saved the
reference. You may also quickly access your bookmarks using the hotkey shortcuts shown
on the next page.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 86
CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES

Bookmark Hotkeys/Shortcuts
Bookmark Hotkeys are time-saving shortcuts to quickly access your bookmarks. Hotkeys
require you to press both keys at the same time.

Hotkey                           Bookmark
Alt-1                             Bookmark 1
Alt-2                             Bookmark 2
Alt-3                             Bookmark 3
Alt-4                             Bookmark 4
Alt-5                             Bookmark 5
Alt-6                             Bookmark 6
Alt-7                             Bookmark 7
Alt-8                             Bookmark 8
Alt-9                             Bookmark 9
Alt-0                             Bookmark 0




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                    P a g e 87
CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES

Bible Markup File
When you highlight or mark text in Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, or the Reference
Library, e-Sword stores these “marks” to the current markup file. You can create multiple
markup files in e-Sword to track your marks separately.

        IMPORTANT: e-Sword tracks highlights to Journal, Study, and Topic Notes inside
        the module itself. Creating a new markup file, or deleting your existing markup file, does
        not erase marks to these files.

By default, markup.ovlx stores your markup information for the four resource types listed
above. The default location for this file is your e-Sword user folder, usually “My Documentse-
sword”.

To create a new, blank markup (clean from highlights and underlining) without disturbing your
existing markups:

   1. Select Bible from the main menu
      and then select Markup File.

   2. Click New.

   3. Specify a filename and click Save.
      You may check the folder location
      to see where the markup file is
      stored.

To open a markup file:

   1. Select Bible from the main menu
      and then select Markup File.

   2. Click Open and select a markup
      file to open.

        TIP: If you and your spouse both
        use e-Sword, you may each want
        to track your markings separately. You can accomplish this by creating a new
        markup file.

        TIP: When printing Bible passages in e-Sword, all marks will be printed
        (highlights can only be printed from a color printer). To print a clean copy, you will
        need to create a new markup file.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                 P a g e 88
Chapter 5: The Verse List Feature – Saving Verses
The Verse List feature lets you save verses in topical lists. For example, you could compile a list
of verses relating to the Trinity, Salvation, or any number of theological topics.

The Verse List feature also lets you save (some or all) verse references from a search you’ve
performed. If you searched for all verses containing “Jesus” and “Peter”, you could save those
to a Verse List.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Navigating Verse Lists ......................................................................................................90
     Changing Verse Lists........................................................................................................90
     Creating a Verse List and Adding Verses .........................................................................91
     Viewing Verse Lists ..........................................................................................................92
     Quickly Adding a Verse to a Verse List .............................................................................93
     Creating a Verse List from a Search .................................................................................94
     Updating a Verse List .......................................................................................................95
     Deleting Verse Lists ..........................................................................................................95




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                             P a g e 89
CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES

Navigating Verse Lists
Each verse list you create should have a different name. That
helps you recognize and give context to the verses in the list. To
see the name of the currently active list, hover your mouse
over the drop down menu on the main toolbar (see the “Rom
3:10” example).

The Previous Verse       icon and the Next Verse      icon let you
lookup each verse in the list with the Bibles window.

You can change the active verse list by clicking the Select Verse
List    icon.

Changing Verse Lists
To change the active Verse List:

   1. Click the Select Verse List
      icon or click Bible from the main
      menu and choose Verse List.

   2. Select a Verse List, such as
      “Roman’s Road” in our example.

   3. Click the OK button to save your
      selection.

The new verse list will be visible in the
screenshot in the “Navigating Verse Lists”
section above.

Similarly, when you add verses, the newly
added verse will appear in this list. See the
section, “Adding a Verse to Your Verse
List”.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                        P a g e 90
CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES

Creating a Verse List and Adding Verses
You can create a Verse List from verses you enter, such as our Roman’s Road example below.

   1. Click Bible from the main menu and then click Verse List.

   2. Click the Add button. The screen turns gray,
      and the Add button becomes the Update
      button.

   3. Enter the title of your Verse List, such as
      “Roman’s Road”.

   4. Click the Update button.

   5. To add verses to your new verse list, click the
      green “+” icon at the top of the vertical icon
      bar. The Verse List window prompts you to
      enter a verse.

   6. You can add, delete, and re-order verses by
      clicking the appropriate icon on the vertical
      icon bar on the right side of the screen.

        Adding a Verse from a Verse List
        To add a verse to the selected
        Verse List, click the green "+"
        icon and enter the new verse.

        Deleting a Verse from a
        Verse List
        To delete a verse from the
        selected Verse List, click the
        red “-” icon and confirm the
        delete.

        Sorting Verses in a Verse
        List
        To move a verse up or down
        in the Verse List, select a
        verse. Use the blue “Up” and
        “Down” icons to move the
        verse.

        To view your list in Canonical
        order, click the Reorder all
        Verses by Canonical Order
            icon.

                Warning: There is not an “undo” for the Reorder all Verses by Canonical
                Order!

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 91
CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES

Viewing Verse Lists
You can view Verse Lists in two ways.

First, the Toolbar method:

   1. On the main toolbar, look for the Verse List icons.

   2. Click the drop down menu with "Rom 3:10" in our
      example. Your list will have different verses.

   3. Select any verse from your verse list. Scroll through
      verses by clicking the Next Verse      and Previous
      Verse     icons.

Next, the Menu method:

   1. Click Bible from the main menu and then select Verse List. The Verse List window
      opens, showing your Verse Lists:




   2. When you select a Verse List, your selected Verse List moves to the Verse List drop
      down menu on the main toolbar (see top of this page).

   3. Click OK to show the Verse List you selected.

        TIP: Note the Copy/Paste Into     icon and Print      icon in the Verse List window
        above. With these icons, you can print a Verse List and paste a Verse List into the
        Editors Window.

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 92
CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES

Quickly Adding a Verse to a Verse List
You can quickly add a verse to your Verse List without leaving the Bibles Window.

   1. Right click any part of a verse from the Bibles window, and select Verse List from the
      context menu.

   2. You may add or delete a verse from the Verse List.

                TIP: Hover your mouse over the Verse List drop
                down menu to see the name of the Verse List.
                This way, you can be certain you are adding a
                verse to the right verse list!




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 93
CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES

Creating a Verse List from a Search
When searching the Bible, you may want to save a Bible search result. See Chapter 3 for
information on searching the Bible.

   1. Click Bible from the main menu and choose Search.

   2. Perform a search. In the following example, we searched the KJV Bible for the word
      "Elijah".




   3. Click the Convert Search to Verse List icon (highlighted in red above).

   4. Check or uncheck verse boxes as necessary to select the verses you want to save.

   5. Specify a name for the list in the Create field or select the Add to option to choose
      from an already saved list.

   6. Click OK to save and close the Convert Search to Verse List window.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 94
CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES

Updating a Verse List
Select the Verse List you want to update (see “Roman’s Road” in the above screenshot).

Adding a Verse from a Verse List
To add a verse to the selected Verse List, click the green "+" icon and enter the new
verse.

Deleting a Verse from a Verse List
To delete a verse from the selected Verse List, click the red “-” icon and confirm the
delete.

Sorting Verses in a Verse List
To move a verse up or down in the Verse List, select a verse. Use the blue “Up” and “Down”
icons to move the verse

To view your list in Canonical order, click the Reorder all Verses by Canonical Order         icon.

        Warning: There is not an “undo” for the Reorder all Verses by Canonical Order!



Deleting Verse Lists
You can delete an entire Verse List. This differs from deleting verses in a Verse List—this
feature deletes the whole Verse List.

   1. Select the Verse List you want to
      delete from the Verse List window. Our
      example below uses “Song of Jacob”:

   2. Click the Delete button and confirm the
      delete, as shown above.

        Warning: There is not an “undo” for
        the delete Verse List command!




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 95
Chapter 6: Printing in e-Sword
You can print almost everything in e-Sword, including Bible chapters, Notes, Commentaries,
Dictionaries, Prayer Requests, Reference Library Books, and even Devotions.

        TIP: To print just a portion of a document, select the text to print before clicking the Print
        Preview       icon. After you click Print Preview, notice only your text selection will print
        rather than the full document.



What’s in this Chapter?
     The Print Preview Window ................................................................................................97
     Printing Bible Chapters .....................................................................................................98
     Printing Selected Verses and Chapters ............................................................................98
     Printing from the Editors Window ......................................................................................99
     Printing from the Commentaries .......................................................................................99
     Printing from the Dictionaries Window ..............................................................................99
     Printing from the Reference Library Window .....................................................................99
     Printing Bible Reading ....................................................................................................100
     Printing Daily Devotions ..................................................................................................100
     Printing Prayer Lists........................................................................................................100
     Printing with the STEP Reader .......................................................................................100




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                            P a g e 96
CHAPTER 6: PRINTING IN E-SWORD

The Print Preview Window

The Print Preview icon      is the first icon in each window's toolbar. Click the Print Preview
icon to open the Print Preview window.

When the Print Preview window opens, click the Print         icon to print the current document.

After the Print Previous screen opens, click the Page Options       icon to adjust your paper
size, margins, and print source.

Use the navigational icons to view any page in your document. The last three buttons display
the document at 100%, page width and whole page, respectively.

Click the Actual Size (100%) icon to change the page on the screen to a 100% display.

Click the Page Width icon to fit the width of your screen.

Click the Whole Page icon to display the entire page on the screen.

To exit the Print Preview window, click the "X" in the top right corner.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 97
CHAPTER 6: PRINTING IN E-SWORD

Printing Bible Chapters
If want print an entire Bible chapter, find the Bible chapter text you want to print. Your chapter
should be displayed in the Bibles window. Click the Print Preview         icon. The Print Preview
window displays the chapter to be printed.



Printing Selected Verses and Chapters

Select the Print Verses   icon from the Bibles window (or click Bible/Print Verses from the
main menu). The popup window allows you to select the book, chapters and verses for printing.

Notice the Format options, numbered 1 – 8, each showing a different style of verse formatting.




If you only need to print a few verses from the Bibles window, highlight the text with your mouse
and click the Print Preview        icon.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 98
CHAPTER 6: PRINTING IN E-SWORD

Printing from the Editors Window
To print Topic Notes or Journal Notes, place your cursor in the document you want to print
and press the Print Preview      icon in the Editors window. Then press the Print      icon in
the Print Preview window to print the selected document.

When printing Study Notes, you may want to print several study notes on the same page. In
fact, you might need to print all study notes on a particular chapter, or book of the Bible.

Click the Study Notes tab in the Editors window. Then, click the Print Preview icon      and
select your printing range.




Make your selection, and press OK. e-Sword will display the Print Preview window so you can
view your document before printing.


Printing from the Commentaries

Click the Print Preview      icon from the Commentaries window to print the text in the window.
Press the Print     icon to print, or close the Print Preview window to exit.



Printing from the Dictionaries Window

Click the Print Preview      icon from the Dictionaries window to print the text in the window.
Press the Print     icon to print, or close the Print Preview window to exit.


Printing from the Reference Library Window
Select Tools from the main menu and then select Reference Library. Click the Print Preview
    icon from the Reference Library window to print the text in the window. Press the Print
icon to print, or close the Print Preview window to exit.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 99
CHAPTER 6: PRINTING IN E-SWORD

Printing Bible Reading
Assuming you already saved a Bible reading plan, you can print any day's Scripture.

Select Tools from the main menu and then select Bible Reading. When the popup window
appears, select the reading plan from the drop down menu at the bottom of the window.

Use the directional arrows in the Bible Reading toolbar to select text for printing. Click the Print
Preview       icon to setup and print the document.


Printing Daily Devotions
To print any day's devotion, select Tools from the main menu and then select Daily Devotions.
Select the desired day from the drop down menu at the bottom of the window. Once you select
the correct day, click the Print Preview         icon to setup and print the document.



Printing Prayer Lists
If you saved prayer requests in e-Sword, you can view each day's requests. Click Tools from
the main menu and then select Prayer Requests. Click the Print Prayer Requests icon to
open the Print Preview window.



Printing with the STEP Reader
To print a document in the STEP Reader, select Tools from the main menu and select STEP
Reader. Open the STEP file to print, and press the Print Preview           icon on the STEP Reader
toolbar. Click the Print icon to setup and print the document.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 100
Chapter 7: The Commentaries Window

Commentaries show an author’s book, chapter, or verse-by-verse comments on the Bible.
Commentaries are immensely popular because they allow you to see someone else’s
interpretation of the Bible. The dictionaries window integrates with commentaries, so word and
Strong’s definitions are just a click away.




What’s in this Chapter?
     Using Commentaries ......................................................................................................102
     When to Synchronize/Unsynchronize a Commentary .....................................................102
     Selecting Between Verse, Book, and Chapter Comments ..............................................104
     Viewing “Next Comment” and “Previous Comment” ........................................................104
     Viewing Commentary Information ...................................................................................104
     Viewing All Commentary Entries – Birds Eye View .........................................................105
     Searching a Commentary ...............................................................................................106
     Searching More Than One Commentary Simultaneously................................................106




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                       P a g e 101
CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW

Using Commentaries
This chapter explains the Commentaries window features. The Commentaries Window
shows the installed commentaries in commentary resource tabs.

When you select a Bible verse in the Bibles window, the Commentaries window displays the
comments for that verse. By default, the Synchronize icon   is selected, which automatically
updates the commentary text for any verse you choose.

        TIP: If your Commentary window stops displaying new information when you
        change Bible verses, make sure the Link icon     is “pressed”. Also note that
        some commentaries may not have a comment for every verse or passage.

More than one commentary may have a comment for your verse. In the screen below, the blue
(i) Information icon shows comments for all commentaries (except for BNTC) for Genesis 1:1:




When to Synchronize/Unsynchronize a Commentary
Commentaries frequently reference a passage of scripture while explaining a Bible
interpretation. Some commentaries show cross references, such as the TSK commentary
below.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 102
CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW




You may want to quickly read a verse without leaving your current reading position in the
commentary window. You may hover the mouse pointer over a scripture reference to see a
ToolTip popup of that verse.

To see the verse in context using the Bibles window, without losing your current reading
position in the commentary, disable Synchronization. Click the Synchronize            icon so the
icon is “raised”. This configuration allows you to view other Bible verses without changing your
reading position in the commentary window.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 103
CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW

Selecting Between Verse, Book, and Chapter Comments
Commentaries may have three types of comments: Verse, Book, and Chapter. By default, e-
Sword shows verse comments because they are the most common.

To view Book, Chapter, or Verse comments for the current passage of scripture, click the Book
    icon, Chapter   icon, or Verse    icon in the
Commentaries toolbar. Some commentaries may not have Bible
or Chapter comments. Also, some commentaries may not have a
comment on every verse.

You may also right click in the Commentaries window to quickly
access the Verse, Chapter, and Book view options.


Viewing “Next Comment” and “Previous Comment”
Thoughts expressed in verses don’t always end when the verse ends. Sometimes a thought is
continued to the next verse. Similarly, a commentary may continue its thought on the current
verse into the comment for the next verse.

To quickly view the next or previous comment in a commentary, use the Next Comment and
Previous Comment icons in Commentaries Window (highlighted in red below):




Viewing Commentary Information
Hover your mouse pointer over any commentary tab to view each commentary's full name.
After selecting a commentary, you may find additional information by clicking Commentary from
the main menu and then choosing Information. An information window will display with more
information on the commentary.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 104
CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW

Viewing All Commentary Entries – Birds Eye View
To view all books, chapters, and verse comments in a commentary:

   1. Click the Search Commentary               icon on the Commentaries toolbar.

   2. Enter the dollar sign character “$”, as shown below.

   3. Select “Regular expressions (REGEX)”, as shown below.

   4. Click the Search          icon.

   5. The Commentary Search window shows which verses contain commentary
      information.




   6. Click any verse in the left summary pane, and then click the OK button to accept the
      search result. The Bibles and Commentaries windows change to that passage.

   7. You may press the Cancel button to leave the screen without changing the Bibles or
      Commentaries windows.

        WARNING: This is intended for smaller commentaries when you’re not sure which
        verses have comments. Performing this search on a large commentary may take some
        time to complete because the search will load every verse into the summary pane
        above.



e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 105
CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW



Searching a Commentary
Searching a commentary is nearly the same as searching Bibles and the Reference Library.
Click the Search Commentaries icon      or click Commentaries from the main menu and
choose Search.

When the Search window opens, type the word you want to search and select your search
criteria. Click the Search icon to search the active commentary.

For more information on using the dictionary search features, see the search instructions in
Chapter 3 and Chapter 13. Also, see Chapter 22 for an explanation of Regular Expression
Searching.



Searching More Than One Commentary Simultaneously
To search through multiple commentaries simultaneously, select Commentaries from the main
menu and choose Extended Search. When the Extended Search window opens, you can
select which commentaries you want to search.




For more information on using the commentary search features, see the extended search
instructions in Chapter 3 and Chapter 13. Also, see Chapter 22 for an explanation of Regular
Expression Searching.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 106
Chapter 8: Introduction to the Editors
The Editors Window is for your personal note taking. e-Sword offers three types of editors,
including Journal Notes, Study Notes, and Topical Notes. Journal Notes store your date-
based comments. Study Notes store your verse-based comments. And Topic Notes store
your topical comments. The next three chapters explain each of the Editors in detail.

        TIP: In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes Editor window displayed third
        party Topic Notes (Topic Notes you downloaded). Now, this material is viewed through
        the Reference Library instead of the Topic Notes Editor.

This chapter focuses on the Editors’ shared functionality and word processing features.



What’s in this Chapter?
     New Editor Features in e-Sword 10 ................................................................................108
     Editor Hotkeys ................................................................................................................108
     Using the Editor – Word Processing ...............................................................................110
     Understanding Where the Editors Read Notes Files. ......................................................125
     How to Backup Your Notes - Advanced ..........................................................................125




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                            P a g e 107
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

New Editor Features in e-Sword 10
e-Sword 10’s editor seems less like an editor and more like a word processor. The new editor is
more robust and supports an array of new features. Now your Journal, Study, and Topic
Notes will benefit from:

     •   Hyperlinks
     •   Bookmarks
     •   Images/Pictures
     •   Tables
     •   Borders
     •   Columns
     •   Headers/Footers
     •   Page Layout View

The next few pages explain how to use the Editor’s word processing features. Later in this
chapter, advanced users will benefit from instructions on backing up the Editor’s notes files.


Editor Hotkeys
The Editor supports convenient hotkey shortcuts. When more than one key is shown, press
both keys simultaneously.

         Hotkey                        Description
F4                        Copy ToolTip

F7                        Spell Check

F11                       Toggle Paste As Formatted

CTRL-A                    Select All

CTRL-B                    Bold

CTRL-C                    Copy

CTRL-D                    Font

CTRL-E                    Center

CTRL-F                    Find

CTRL-G                    Goto Bookmark

CTRL-I                    Italic

CTRL-J                    Format Scripture ToolTip


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 108
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS


       Hotkey                         Description
CTRL-R                    Replace

CTRL-U                    Underline

CTRL-V                    Paste

CTRL-X                    Cut

CTRL-Y                    Redo

CTRL-Z                    Undo

CTRL-ENTER                Insert Page Break

CTRL-(Backspace)          Delete Previous Word

SHIFT-F7                  Thesaurus

SHIFT-ENTER               Insert Line Feed

CTRL-SHIFT-V              Paste Formatted Bible Text

CTRL-SHIFT-
                          Insert Non-breaking Space
(Spacebar)

CTRL-TAB                  Indent Paragraph

SHIFT-TAB                 Outdent Paragraph




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 109
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Using the Editor – Word Processing
The Topic Notes, Study Notes, and Journal Notes Editors contain new word processor
features you can use to format your Notes.




You may recognize most icons on the Editor toolbar from
your experience with other word processing software. You
may hover your mouse pointer over each icon for the name
of the feature.

Right click an Editor window to show the context menu,
shown to the right.

Over the next pages, we discuss the toolbar icons and context menu options in the order the
icons are shown on the toolbar.


Find (Ctrl-F), Replace (Ctrl-R), Go To (Ctrl-G)
The Find feature is useful for basic searching while you’re writing Notes.

The find feature is not intended as a replacement for the Locate Notes icon, which is a more
robust search.

The Find and the Find/Replace
commands function like any other
word processor. These commands
work only in the current Editor
window. Find and Find/Replace will
not search across Journal, Study,
or Topic Notes.

The Go To tab of this window takes
you directly to a bookmark in your
text. Instructions for defining and
linking to bookmarks are presented later in this chapter.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 110
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS


Spell Check (F7)
Even when words “look” right, they
may not be spelled right. Now you
can know for sure.

When Spell Check finds an
unrecognized word, you will see
a Spelling Check window.

Spell Check uses a custom
dictionary, as shown at the bottom
of the window. By default, this
custom dictionary is stored in the
e-Sword install folder, usually
“c:program filese-sword”.

The custom dictionary includes many commonly used religious terms and authors to
prevent false reports of misspelled words. If Spell Check identifies a properly spelled word as
misspelled, you can add the word (see Add button above) to the custom dictionary to prevent
future false reports.

Spell Check Options: From the main menu, click Options > Editor Options > Spell Check
Options. You can reset the Ignore All list and change which word patterns are ignored.


Thesaurus (Shift-F7)
Can’t think of exactly the right word?

Highlight a word and click the
Thesaurus icon. e-Sword will show
you synonyms for the word you
chose, if available.

If you find a replacement you like,
click the new word and press the
Replace button.


Cut (Ctrl-X), Copy (Ctrl-C), Paste (Ctrl-V)
Select (or highlight text) by left-clicking and dragging with the mouse. Remove highlighted text
with the Cut icon, copy text with the Copy icon, and paste text with the Paste icon.


Pasting Formatted Text (F11 Toggle)
The F11 toggles the availability of pasting text as formatted. If enabled, the text formatting will
paste with the text (including bold, italics, tables, line spacing, etc.). If disabled, your text will be
stripped of formatting and will paste as plain text.


Undo (Ctrl-Z) and Redo (Ctrl-Y)
To undo or redo your last edit, click the Undo and Redo icons.

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                  P a g e 111
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Insert Bookmark
A bookmark is an invisible marker,
representing the destination for a
hyperlink.

The bookmark feature is not accessible
from the icon menu. You must right-click
in the Editor and choose Bookmarks from
the context menu.

The name of the bookmark itself is not
shown to the reader and serves only as an internal identifier. The bookmark name must be
unique—two bookmarks cannot have the same name. You will use the bookmark name later
when you insert a hyperlink to the bookmark.


Insert Hyperlink
A hyperlink connects text to a
destination. As shown to the
right, the destination may be a
Web page, an email address, a
file, or a bookmark.

You can highlight the word(s)
you want to make into a
hyperlink and then click the
Insert Hyperlink icon.

You can also click the icon first
and define the hyperlink
word(s) in the window shown to
the right.

        Web Page: Links to the
        web page you specify.

        Email: Links to an email address, but the e-Sword user’s computer will define if/how this
        works. The e-Sword user’s computer must have an email client installed. The “Send to”
        field of the email will pre-populate with the email address from this link.

        File: Links to a local file on the e-Sword user’s computer. If you send your e-Sword
        module to someone else, they too must have the file in exactly the same location on
        their computer.

        Bookmark: Links to a bookmark (see above for instructions on creating a bookmark).
        The drop down menu contains bookmarks you defined. You must have created the
        bookmark by the time you reach this window.

        A bookmark must be used in the same note where it’s defined. For example, you
        cannot define a bookmark in one study note and hyperlink to the bookmark from a
        different study note. The same restrictions apply to journal and topic notes.


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 112
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS


Insert Table
Tables, like the one shown lower-right, quickly illustrate information in ways sentences
cannot. Tables can be used in a variety of ways to align information, illustrate concepts, and
compare textual relationships.

Creating a New Table
After clicking the Insert Table icon, you may begin
configuring the table. Specify the number of rows
and columns. The example table has three rows
and three columns.

        Fit to page: Expand to the width of the page.

         Fixed column width: How wide each
        column should be.

Dragging Table Boundaries
To change the size of the table
or of any cell in the table:

   1. Position the mouse
      pointer over the table or
      cell boundary.

   2. The pointer turns from an
      arrow pointer into an
      adjustment pointer (see
      example table to the
      right).

   3. Drag the pointer in the direction necessary to change the table or cell size.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 113
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Table Properties (Table Settings)
To edit a table’s settings:

   1. Select the whole table or part of the table. Or place the mouse pointer in a table cell.
      Your edits to the table’s settings only apply to the cells you selected.

   2. Right-click and choose Table from the context menu.

   3. Click Table Properties (explained below)


Frame and Color Tab

Frame: Controls the border around the
selected cells. If you selected the whole
table, the frame applies to the entire
table.

You may chose from one of the default
frames (None, Box, All, or Grid). Or,
you may click the illustration of the
cells/table to manually set which sides
have a border (see mouse pointer to
the right).

Line Width: Controls the thickness of
the frame border.

Background Color: Controls the table
and/or cell’s background color. The
Other button allows for custom colors.

Cell Margins: Controls the cell buffer (if
any). Tables usually read easier and
look better if the table text/image isn’t
“up against” the cell borders.


Size and Formatting Tab

Cell Height: Controls the height of the
cell. You can let the word processor
distribute the cell height equally
according to the text/images in the cell.
Or you can maintain a minimum cell
height.

Formatting: Controls whether the
text/image is aligned at the top,
middle, or bottom of the cell.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 114
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Row Options:

        Allow row to break across pages – When not enough space exists on the page to show
        the row, do you want the row to split across two pages or display in its entirety on the
        next page? This setting applies to the row you selected when loading the Table
        Properties window.

        Repeat as header row at the top of each page – The row you selected when loading the
        Table Properties window will be the header row at the top of each page that the table
        spans.


Adjusting Rows and Columns
You may add or delete columns and rows as necessary:

   To Insert Rows/Columns

   1. Right click the table and select the Table option from the context menu.

   2. Choose Insert.

   3. Choose where to insert rows or columns, as shown below.




   To Delete Rows/Columns

   1. Right click the table and select the Table option from the context menu.

   2. Choose Delete.

   3. Select either Row or Column in order to delete the row or column of the cell(s) you
      selected when loading the Table Properties window.


Insert Picture
You may insert a picture in two ways:

   1. Click the Insert Picture icon and select a picture to insert.

   2. Copy (Ctrl-C) an image elsewhere and paste (Ctrl-V) the image into the e-Sword editor.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 115
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Image Attributes
Double-click an image to adjust the image’s settings.

Layout and Position Tab

Wrapping Style: Controls how text
wraps around the image. The
“Wrapping Style” diagrams (see
screenshot to the right) illustrate how
the text will relate to the image. The In-
Line option will cause the image to
move with the text.

Move object with text: If the “Top and
Bottom” or “Square” wrapping style is
selected, this option will cause the
image to move with the text.

Fixed Position on Page: If the “Top
and Bottom” or “Square” wrapping
style is selected, this option will keep
the image in place on the page you
specify. The image will not move
unless you move it.

Horizontal Alignment: If the “Top and Bottom” or “Square” wrapping style is selected, this
option controls the image’s horizontal position.

        Absolute Position: If “Other Position” is chosen, you can control how many inches (or
        fractions of an inch) the image stays to the left of the paragraph.

Vertical Alignment: If the “Top and Bottom” or “Square” wrapping style is selected, this option
controls the image’s vertical position.

        Absolute Position: If the “Top and Bottom” or “Square” wrapping style is selected, you
        can control how many inches (or fractions of an inch) the image stays below the
        paragraph.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 116
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Size and Distance Tab

Size: Controls the height and width of the picture, in inches. This setting updates based on
values entered for the Scale setting.

Scale: Controls the height and width
of the image as a percent of its
original size. This setting updates
based on values entered for the Size
setting.

        TIP: This is a huge factor in
        the image’s size. In the
        example to the right, the 10
        inch wide image should be
        downsized by 50% to avoid an
        unnecessarily large image.
        Large images create large
        resources which consume
        more memory, increase e-
        Sword startup time, and may
        cause e-Sword to run slower.

Distance from text: Controls how
much of a margin exists between side
of the image and the text.

Options: Controls whether you can move and resize the image with the mouse to prevent
accidental movement.


Saving Options Tab

The settings in this tab are not used
by e-Sword. Making changes to these
settings will not impact how images are
stored.

All images are in JPG/JPEG format at
96dpi with 50% compression,
regardless of the settings.

All images are embedded in the module
regardless of the settings.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 117
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Header and Footer
The Header and Footer icon inserts/removes a header and footer. The header and footer
supports paragraph and font formatting found elsewhere in the Editor.

Inserting the Header/Footer

To insert the Header/Footer:

   1. Click the Header/Footer           icon and notice the icon changes to a “pressed” position.

                WARNING: Clicking the Header/Footer        icon overwrites any existing
                Header/Footer. If the Header/Footer icon already has a “pressed” appearance, a
                Header/Footer already exists in your document. Click the Page Layout     icon
                to view the Header/Footer.

   2. After clicking the icon above, your view of the Journal, Study, or Topic Note changes to
      Page Layout. This is a representation of how the document will look when printed.

   3. A default header appears in the Header/Footer and varies depending on which Editor
      you use (Journal, Study, or Topic Note).

   4. Click inside the dotted rectangle to edit the Header/Footer.

   5. After making changes, double click outside the dotted rectangle to save the
      Header/Footer.

   TIP: The Header and Footer are only visible when the Page Layout             icon is “pressed”.




        TIP: If you accidentally delete the page number special character, you must remove and
        re-insert the header and footer by toggling the Header/Footer     icon.

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 118
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Removing the Header/Footer

To remove the Header/Footer:

   1. Click the Header/Footer        icon and notice the icon changes from a “pressed”
      position to an “raised” position (assuming you have an existing Header/Footer).

   2. If you are not in Page Layout mode, press the Page Layout          icon to confirm the
      Header and Footer is not visible and has been removed.

   TIP: The Header/Footer is only visible when the Page Layout           icon is “pressed” even
   when a Header/Footer exists.


Page Layout
The Page Layout icon controls the view of your document. When clicked, the icon changes to
a “pressed” position, showing a Page View of your document. This representation shows the
edges of the document, margins, header/footer, and a general view of how the document will
appear when printed. To return to the Normal View, click the Page Layout icon again and the
icon returns to a “raised” position.


Show/Hide Formatting Symbols
The Show/Hide icon controls whether you see hidden formatting symbols, such as
paragraph symbols and space “dots” between words.




Font Selection and Size
You can choose a font style and font size for the
text you type. You may also highlight text and
change the font or font size. Both font controls
shown to the right are found on the Editor
toolbar.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 119
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS


Bold (Ctrl-B), Italic (Ctrl-I), Underline (Ctrl-U)
Bold, Italic, or Underline changes the text
accordingly.

Font Color
The Font Color icon has two parts:

   •    Clicking the “A” icon will change the
        color of the selected text to the color
        shown in the icon (green in the icon
        above).

   •    Clicking the “down-arrow” icon displays a
        color selection window. Once chosen,
        that color is available from the “A” icon
        shown above for quicker reference.

More Font Options (Ctrl-D)
You can also right-click and choose Font from
the context menu (shown to the right). In
addition to the font options described above, you
can also format text as Bold Italic, and
Strikeout.


Highlight
The Highlight icon has two parts:

   •    Clicking the “ab” icon will change the color of the selected text to the color shown in
        the icon (yellow in the example above).

   •    Clicking the “down-arrow’ icon displays a color selection window. Once chosen, that
        color is available from the “ab” icon for quicker reference.

For more information on Highlighting, see Chapter 4.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 120
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Format Scripture Tooltip (Ctrl-J)
e-Sword supports “scripture tooltips”. When verses are in the correct format, e-Sword will show
a “popup” of the verse text as you hover your mouse pointer over the scripture reference.

   •    Clicking the Tooltip icon without a verse reference selected shows a Verse Reference
        window. Enter a valid verse reference and e-Sword will insert the properly formatted
        verse into your text.

   •    Clicking the Tooltip icon with a verse reference selected will automatically format the
        verse in your text.

Notice the examples below of ToolTipped verse references on the top row, followed by the
original text on the bottom row.




Align Left, Align Center (Ctrl-E), Align Right, Justify

        Align Left: Aligns the text with the left side of the page.

        Center: Centers the text horizontally.

        Align Right: Aligns the text with the right side of the page.

        Justify: Adds small spaces between letters and words so the left and right edges of the
        text meet perfectly with the left and right sides of the page.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 121
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS


Numbering and Bullets
You can use the Numbering and Bullets icons in two ways:

   •    Select one or more lines of text and click the Numbering or Bullet icon to convert
        the lines to numbers or bullets.

   •    Do not select any lines of text before clicking the Numbering or Bullet icon. A
        numbered or bullet list will begin in your text and each time you press enter, a new
        line number or bullet appears.

To stop the insertion of numbers or bullets , press the Backspace key to erase the final line
with the unwanted number or bullet.

Bullets and Numbering Format
To change the formatting of a numbered
or bullet list, right-click the list.

        Style: Selects between arabic
        numerals, roman numerals, and
        letters of the alphabet.

        Start at: Controls the number that
        the list starts with. For alphabetical
        lists, each letter is represented by a
        number.

        Format: Controls the formatting of the list, such as “1.”, “1)”, “1”, etc.

        Level: Controls the number of indents.

        Restart Numbering: Adds a new line starting over with number “1”, the letter “A”, etc.


Indent Paragraph (CTRL-TAB) and Outdent Paragraph (SHIFT-TAB)
Indent Paragraph or Outdent Paragraph moves the paragraph text to the right one tab stop or
to the left one tab stop. Indent is a useful formatting feature when showing a hierarchy of
information.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 122
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS


Format Paragraph
The settings in this window apply to the whole paragraph, not just to text you have selected.
The Preview window shows a live example of the changes you make.

        Align Left: Aligns the text to the left
        side of the page.

        Center: Centers the text horizontally.

        Align Right: Aligns the text with the
        right side of the page.

        Justify: Adds small spaces between
        letters and words so the left and right
        edges of the text meet perfectly with the
        left and right sides of the page.

        Indentation Left/Right: Controls the
        indent for the left and right sides of
        paragraph.

        Special … By: Selects between a First
        Line indent and a Hanging Indent. The
        hanging line is not indented but
        subsequent lines are intended. The By
        field controls the amount of the indent.

        Spacing Before/After: Controls the amount of space before and after a paragraph to
        avoid entering blank lines with the Enter key.

        Line Spacing: Selects the distance between lines.


Border
The Border icon inserts a border into the text. The different
border styles are shown to the right.

You can use the Border icon in two ways:

   •    Click the “border layout” icon to insert the border style shown in the icon.

   •    Click the “border down-arrow’ icon to display a Border Selection window. Once
        chosen, that border is available from the “border layout” icon for quicker reference.

If you select text before clicking the Border icon, the border will enclose the text you selected.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 123
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS


Columns
You may select how many columns the text will be divided into. This is for display and
printing purposes only. Your column preferences will not be saved after restarting e-Sword. If
you save a Topics Note file as a Reference Library book (refx), the column setting will also not
be saved into that format.

The different column layouts are shown to the right.

You can use the Columns icon in two ways:

   •    Clicking the “column layout” icon will change the
        number of columns.

   •    Clicking the “column down-arrow” icon displays a
        Column Selection window. Once chosen, that column
        layout is available from the “column layout” icon for quicker reference.


Page Break
Often used in word processing software, Page Break forces all the text after the “break” to the
next page. The Page Layout icon must be “pressed” to view the actual Page Break. Otherwise,
a dotted line shows where the page break will occur.

Save Notes
It’s always a good idea to click the Save icon before using other features in e-Sword.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 124
CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS

Understanding Where the Editors Read Notes Files.
When you first installed e-Sword, three default Notes files were installed including:
JOURNAL.JNLX (Journal Notes), STUDY.NOTX (Study Notes), and TOPIC.TOPX (Topic
Notes). These files store the information you enter into the Editors Window. By default, all three
file types are located in your e-Sword user directory (typically "My Documentse-sword").



How to Backup Your Notes - Advanced
Advanced users may want to backup their Notes or move their Notes to another computer.
This section assumes a basic level of proficiency with Windows, folder navigation, and file
copying.

By default, e-Sword stores Notes files in your e-sword user folder (typically "My
Documentse-sword"). If you changed your storage location, you must use that location in the
steps below.

   1. Use Windows Explorer to navigate to the “My Documentse-sword” folder.

   2. Copy the Journal, Study, and/or Topic Note file(s) to your backup location. By default,
      the Editors store notes in: JOURNAL.JNLX (Journal Notes), STUDY.NOTX (Study
      Notes), and TOPIC.TOPX (Topic Notes). If you created additional Notes files, copy
      them also.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 125
Chapter 9: Journal Notes
The Journal Notes feature allows you to keep a journal about spiritual growth, issues you
struggle with, events in your life, answers to prayer, or anything you choose. Journal Notes are
organized by date, similar to a diary. Many Christians find journaling is a key to explosive
personal and spiritual growth.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Viewing Journal Notes ....................................................................................................127
     Creating a Journal Note ..................................................................................................128
     Editing a Journal Note ....................................................................................................128
     Deleting a Journal Note ..................................................................................................129
     Viewing All Journal Notes – Birds Eye View....................................................................130
     Searching Journal Notes.................................................................................................131
     Additional Search Options Wheel ...................................................................................131
     Copying from the Bible to Your Journal Notes ................................................................132
     Copying from Other Windows to Journal Notes ..............................................................133
     Importing and Exporting Journal Notes ...........................................................................134
     Managing More than One Journal Notes File - Advanced ...............................................135
     Changing Where e-Sword Reads Journal Notes - Advanced ..........................................136




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                         P a g e 126
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Viewing Journal Notes
   •    To view all Journal Notes, click the Locate Notes icon, shown below in red.




   •    To view a specific Journal Note, click the date drop-down menu on the toolbar and
        click a date, as shown below:




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 127
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Creating a Journal Note
To create a Journal Note:

   1. Notice the date selected in the date field. By default, today’s date appears but you can
      change the date, as shown below.

   2. Type your Journal Notes. Click the Save     icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to
      save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword.




                TIP: You can create popup Scripture "ToolTips" in your own Notes! Just select
                an existing verse reference, like John 3:16, and click the Format Scripture
                ToolTip      icon (or press Ctrl-J).



Editing a Journal Note
You can edit any Journal Note you previously wrote:

   1. Navigate to the date where you made the Journal Note (see calendar above).

   2. Click the date of the Journal Note to edit.

   3. Edit your Journal Note and click the Save   icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to
      save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 128
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Deleting a Journal Note
You can delete any Journal Note you previously wrote:

   1. Navigate to the date where you made the Journal Note (see calendar below).

   2. Click the date of the Journal Note to delete.

   3. Select all the text in the window with the mouse or by pressing the Ctrl-A key
      combination.

   4. Press the Delete key to delete the Journal Note. You can undelete the text by pressing
      Ctrl-Z key combination or clicking the Undo      icon.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 129
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Viewing All Journal Notes – Birds Eye View
If you want to view all of your Journal Notes:

   1. Click the Locate Journal Notes icon:




   2. The Locate Journal Notes window shows which dates contain Journal Notes.

   3. Click any date in the left summary pane to display your Journal Notes in the right window
      pane. The example below shows the Journal Notes for November 5, 2011.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 130
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Searching Journal Notes

To search your Journal Notes;

1. Click the Locate Notes icon           in the Journal Notes Editor.




2. Searching Journal notes is nearly identical to searching Study Notes, except Study
   Notes are verse-based and Journal Notes are date-based. See Chapter 10 for more
   information.



Additional Search Options Wheel

Searching Journal notes is nearly identical to searching Study Notes, except Study
Notes are verse-based and Journal Notes are date-based. Please see Chapter 10 for
more information on the Additional Search Options Wheel.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 131
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Copying from the Bible to Your Journal Notes
In addition to copying with this method, you can also apply formatting to copied verses with
the Copy Verses command documented in the Chapter 3, “The Bible Windows In-Depth”.

To copy Psalms 33:6 into your Journal Notes:

   1. Navigate to the date of the Journal Note. Left-click the mouse where you want to paste
      the verse.

   2. Navigate to Psalms 33:6 in the Bible window.

   3. Right click the verse in the Bible window and select Paste Into Journal Notes. (To
      paste more than one verse, select the verses you want to paste before right-clicking and
      choosing Paste Into Journal Notes.)




   4. The verse appears in your Journal notes.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 132
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Copying from Other Windows to Journal Notes
When copying from the other windows, such as the Commentaries, Dictionaries, Reference
Library, etc. to the Journal Notes editor, you have two options:

1. Copy the entire text to the Journal Notes window, or

2. Copy an excerpt of the text to the Journal Notes window.


Copying the Entire Text

1. Place your cursor in the Journal Notes window where you want the copied text to
   appear.

2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy.

3. Click the Select All  icon or right click anywhere in the text and choose Select All
   from the menu. The complete text appearing in the window will be highlighted.

4. With the text still selected, right click and select Paste into Journal Notes. The
   selected text will be copied into your Journal Notes at the location where you last
   placed your cursor.

Copying an Excerpt

1. Place your cursor in the Journal Notes window where you want the copied
   text to appear.

2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy.

3. Select the part of the text you want to copy to Journal Notes by highlighting (left
   click the mouse and drag to select) the text.

4. Right click and select Paste into Journal Notes. Only the selected text will paste.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 133
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Importing and Exporting Journal Notes
e-Sword lets you import data (text, images, tables, etc.) into Journal Notes. You can also
export your Journal Notes to other file formats.

The import option includes (or imports) text into your Journal Notes from other files. You can
import the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), and txt (plain
text).

To import a file:

   1. Select the date of the Journal Note in the Journal Notes Editor. The text you import will
        appear in this Journal Note.

   2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Import button.

   3. Navigate to the folder containing the file to import, select the file, and click Open.

   4. The text from your document will appear in the date of he Journal Note you selected in
        Step 1 above.


The export option creates an external file (separate from e-Sword) containing your Journal
Note. You can export the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text
Format), txt (plain text), and pdf.

To export a Journal note:

   1. Select the Journal Note you want to export by navigating to that date in the Journal
      Notes Editor.

   2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Export button.

   3. Navigate to the folder that will contain your exported file, provide a name for your file,
      and click save. You may need to adjust the “Save as type” setting to specify the file
      format e-Sword uses to export your data.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 134
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Managing More than One Journal Notes File - Advanced
Advanced users may want to create and edit more than one Journal Notes file.

The default name for the Journal Notes file is “journal.jnlx” and it’s typically stored in “My
Documentse-sword”, or the location of your e-Sword user folder. This configuration meets the
needs of the majority of e-Sword users. If you do not need additional files or do not feel
comfortable with the instructions that follow, you may not need this functionality.

Creating a New Journal Notes File

To create a new Journal Notes file:

   1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Journal Notes Window.

   2. Click the New button.

   3. Specify a filename and click the Save button.

   4. You now have a new, blank Journal Notes file.


Opening a Journal Notes File

To open a new Journal Note file:

   1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Journal Notes Window.

   2. Click the Open option.

   3. Choose a filename and click the Open button.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 135
CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES

Changing Where e-Sword Reads Journal Notes - Advanced
Most users do not need to change where e-Sword reads Journal Notes files. Advanced
users may want to read from a different location. And some users who upgrade from a previous
version may have changed where e-Sword reads Journal Notes files.

Each Note Editor uses its own folder setting. By default, all three Editors read from the e-
Sword user folder, typically “My Documentse-sword”. However, each Editor Type can read from
a different location.

        WARNING: Changing the folder the Journal Notes Editor reads may result in you not
        being able to find your other Journal Notes files. For example, if you have multiple
        Journal Notes files in one folder, but you change where e-Sword reads Journal Notes
        files, you will not be able to view your other Journal Notes files. In that situation, you
        must either change the folder where the Journal Notes reads or move your Journal
        Notes to the new folder.

To change the folder where the e-Sword reads Journal Notes:

   1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Journal
      Notes window.

   2. Click the Open option.

   3. Navigate to the folder where e-Sword should read Journal Notes.

   4. Choose a filename and click the Open button.

   5. e-Sword will now read Journal Notes from this folder.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 136
Chapter 10: The Study Notes
The Study Notes feature allows you to write notes about individual verses, similar to making
notes in the margin of a printed Bible. Here, you can record your personal discoveries,
conclusions, and commentary about specific verses. Study Notes are verse-based—the note
itself is matched with a verse of the Bible.

e-Sword synchronizes your Study Notes with the Bible verse you’re currently reading. When you
view a Bible verse containing a study note, the Study Note tab will show the notes you wrote for
the verse.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Viewing Study Notes.......................................................................................................138
     Creating a Study Note ....................................................................................................138
     Editing a Study Note .......................................................................................................140
     Deleting a Study Note .....................................................................................................140
     Viewing All Study Notes – Birds Eye View ......................................................................141
     Searching Study Notes ...................................................................................................142
     Additional Search Options Wheel ...................................................................................143
     Copying from the Bible to Your Study Notes ...................................................................145
     Copying from Other Windows to Study Notes .................................................................146
     Importing and Exporting Study Notes..............................................................................147
     Managing More than One Study Notes File - Advanced .................................................148
     Changing Where e-Sword Reads Study Notes - Advanced ............................................149




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                          P a g e 137
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Viewing Study Notes
   •    To view all Study Notes, click the Locate Notes icon, shown below in red.




   •    To view a specific Study Note, click the verse drop-down menu on the toolbar and
        choose the verse, as shown below. If the Link icon    is “pressed”, the current Study
        Note synchronizes with the active passage in the Bible window.




Creating a Study Note
To create a study note on Genesis 2:1:

   1. Navigate to Genesis 2:1 in the Bible window or from the Editors Window.

   2. Click the Study Notes tab in the Editors window (lower right window, by default in e-
      Sword). Notice that the Book, Chapter and Verse (in the Editors window) automatically
      changes to the Bible verse you navigate to.

                TIP: The Link       icon synchronizes the verse in the Study Notes Editor with the
                verse you open in the Bibles window. If you want the Study Note window to
                display the Study Note for the Bible verse you've chosen, make sure the Link
                icon      is “pressed”.

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 138
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES


   3. Type your notes for Genesis 2:1. Click the Save     icon to save your notes. It's a good
      idea to save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword.




                TIP: You can create popup Scripture "ToolTips" in your own Notes! Just select
                an existing verse reference, like John 3:16, and click the Format Scripture
                ToolTip      icon (or press Ctrl-J).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 139
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Editing a Study Note
You can edit any Study Note you previously wrote:

   1. Navigate to the verse in the Editors Window (see red box below):




   2. Edit your study note and click the Save  icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to
      save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword.


Deleting a Study Note
You can delete any Study Note you previously wrote:

   1. Navigate to the verse with the Study Note you want to delete.

   2. Select all the text in the window with the mouse or by pressing Ctrl-A key combination.

   3. Press the Delete key to delete the Study Note. You can undelete the text by pressing
      Ctrl-Z key combination or clicking the Undo     icon.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 140
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Viewing All Study Notes – Birds Eye View
If you want to view all of your Study Notes:

   1. Click the Locate Notes icon:




   2. The Locate Study Notes window shows which verses contain Study Notes.

   3. Click any verse in the left summary pane to display your study notes in the right window
      pane. The example below shows the study notes for Genesis 2:1.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 141
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Searching Study Notes

To search your Study Notes:

1. Click the Locate Notes icon           in the Study Notes Editor.




2. The Locate Study Notes window appears, as shown below. Type the search
   word(s) in the first field. Not sure how to spell your search terms? Take your best
   guess and then click the spell check icon         .




3. In the screenshot above, we typed, "all things" in the search box.

4. We selected Search for all of the words from the drop down menu to find only
   Study Notes with all words from our search phrase.

5. Click the Search icon      in the upper, right corner of this window. The search
   results are categorized by section on the left, as shown above.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 142
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

6. After reviewing the search results, press the OK button. This closes the search
   window and displays the full text of the Study Note you chose.

        TIP: If we selected, Search for any of the words, e-Sword would have displayed
        search results with both words from our search phrase (“all” and “things”). Study Notes
        would have been shown if they contained the word “all” and “things” as separate words
        anywhere in the Study Note. Be careful how you refine your search.


Additional Search Options Wheel
For an even more specific search, click the search wheel, (shown in red below). You may use
this more specific search with or without Regular Expressions, discussed in Chapter 22.




Case Sensitive: When checked, this option will make your search case sensitive to find “god”
with a lower-case “g” (see above).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 143
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Partial Search: Below, we searched for "child". Notice the results for variations of our search
phrase, including “child”, “children”, “childless”, etc. (see below).




Synonyms: You can search for your search phrase and synonyms of your search phrase. In
the example below, the synonyms found include, “redemption” and several others off-screen.
The synonym box will be grayed-out (unavailable) unless Search for any of the words is
chosen (see below).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 144
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Copying from the Bible to Your Study Notes
In addition to copying with this method, you can also apply formatting to copied verses with
the Copy Verses command documented in the Chapter 3, “The Bible Windows In-Depth”.

To copy Psalms 33:6 into the Study Notes for Genesis 2:1:

   1. Navigate to Genesis 2:1 in the Study Notes Editor window. Left-click the mouse
      where you want to paste the verse.

   2. Deselect the Link icon    in the Study Notes Editor window and navigate to Psalms
      33:6 in the Bible window.

   3. Right click the verse in the Bible window and select Paste Into Study Notes. (To
      paste more than one verse, select the verses you want to paste before right-clicking and
      choosing Paste Into Study Notes.)




   4. The verse appears in your Study notes.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 145
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Copying from Other Windows to Study Notes
When copying from the other windows, such as the Commentaries, Dictionaries, Reference
Library, etc. to the Study Notes editor, you have two options:

1. Copy the entire text to the Study Notes window.

2. Copy an excerpt of the text to the Study Notes window.


Copying the Entire Text

1. Place your cursor in the Study Notes window where you want the copied text to
   appear.

2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy.

3. Click the Select All  icon or right click anywhere in the text and choose Select All
   from the menu. The complete text appearing in the window will be highlighted.

4. With the text still selected, right-click and select Paste into Study Notes (be sure
   your Study Notes are open to the correct verse). The selected text will be copied into
   your Study Notes at the location where you last placed your cursor.

Copying an Excerpt

1. Place your cursor in the Study Note window where you want the copied text
   to appear.

2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy.

3. Select the part of the text you want to copy to Study Notes by highlighting (left click
   the mouse and drag to select) the text.

4. Right-click and select Paste into Study Notes. Only the selected text will paste.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 146
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Importing and Exporting Study Notes
e-Sword lets you import data (text, images, tables, etc.) into Study Notes. You can also export
your Study Notes to other file formats.

The import option includes (or imports) text into your Study Notes from other files. You can
import the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), and txt (plain
text).

To import a file:

   1. Select a verse from the Study Notes Editor. The text you import will appear in this
        Study Note.

   2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Import button.

   3. Navigate to the folder containing the file to import, select the file, and click Open.

   4. The text from your document will appear in the verse you selected in Step 1 above.


The export option creates an external file (separate from e-Sword) containing your Study Note.
You can export the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), txt
(plain text), and pdf.

To export a Study note:

   1. Select the Study Note you want to export by navigating to that verse in the Study Notes
      Editor.

   2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Export button.

   3. Navigate to the folder that will contain your exported file, provide a name for your file,
      and click save. You may need to adjust the “Save as type” setting to specify the file
      format e-Sword uses to export your data.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 147
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Managing More than One Study Notes File - Advanced
Advanced users may want to create and edit more than one Study Notes file.

The default name for the Study Notes file is “study.notx” and it’s typically stored in “My
Documentse-sword”, or the location of your e-Sword user folder. This configuration meets the
needs of the majority of e-Sword users. If you do not need additional files or do not feel
comfortable with the instructions that follow, you may not need this functionality.

At the bottom of the screen below, you can see the popup menu, outlined in red. The default
Study Note file, study.notx, is the currently selected file. To view a different file, select the
Study Note from the menu.




Creating a New Study Notes File
To create a new Study Notes file:

   1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Study Notes Window.

   2. Click the New button.

   3. Specify a filename and click the Save button.

   4. The Study Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above will change to the
      filename you chose in step 3. You now have a new, blank Study Notes file.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 148
CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES

Opening a Study Notes File
To open a new Study Note file:

        WARNING: If you open a file from a different folder location, the Study Notes Editor
        shows only the Study Note files from that folder in the popup menu at the bottom of the
        Editor window. That means the popup menu will show only the filenames in the folder
        where you opened the file.




   1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Study Notes Window.

   2. Click the Open option from the menu.

   3. Choose a filename and click the Open button.

   4. The Study Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the
      filename you selected in step 3.


Changing Where e-Sword Reads Study Notes - Advanced
Most users do not need to change where e-Sword reads Study Notes files. Advanced
users may want to read from a different location. And some users who upgrade from a previous
version may have changed where e-Sword reads Study Notes files.

Each Note Editor uses its own folder setting. By default, all three Editors read from the e-
Sword user folder, typically “My Documentse-sword”. However, each Editor Type can read from
a different location.

        WARNING: Changing the folder the Study Notes Editor reads may result in you not
        being able to find your other Study Notes files. For example, if you have multiple study
        notes files in one folder, but you change where e-Sword reads Study Notes files, you will
        not be able to view your other Study Notes files. In that situation, you must either change
        the folder where the Study Notes reads or move your study notes to the new folder.

To change the folder where e-Sword reads Study Notes:

   1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Study Notes
      window.

   2. Click the Open option.

   3. Navigate to the folder where e-Sword should read Study Notes.

   4. Choose a filename and click the Open button.

   5. The Study Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the
      filename you selected in step 4. And the popup menu at the bottom of the Editors
      window now shows only the files from the new folder you selected in step 4.


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 149
Chapter 11: Topic Notes
The Topic Notes feature allows you to write topical notes about subjects that interest you,
similar to notes some people make on blank pages at the end of their printed Bible. Here, you
can record your personal discoveries and conclusions about different subjects in the Bible.
Topic Notes are subject-based.

My default, e-Sword creates the file “topic.topx” in your e-Sword user folder, usually “My
Documentse-Sword”, to store your topic entries.




What’s in this Chapter?
     Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library? .................................................151
     e-Sword 9 Users: Can’t Find your Topic Notes? .............................................................152
     Viewing Your Topic Notes...............................................................................................152
     Creating a Topic Note .....................................................................................................153
     Editing a Topic Note .......................................................................................................154
     Optimizing Topic Notes Files with Images ......................................................................155
     Deleting a Topic Note .....................................................................................................155
     Searching Topic Notes ...................................................................................................156
     Additional Search Options Wheel ...................................................................................157
     Copying from the Bible to Your Topic Notes ...................................................................159
     Copying from Other Windows to Topic Notes .................................................................160
     Importing and Exporting Topic Notes ..............................................................................161
     Managing More than One Topic Notes File - Advanced ..................................................162
     Changing Where e-Sword Reads Topic Notes - Advanced .............................................164
     Reference Library (.REFX) Files .....................................................................................165
     When to Use Reference Book Files ................................................................................165
     How to Convert Topic Notes to Reference Book Format .................................................165




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                          P a g e 150
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library?
In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes Editor displayed third party Topic Notes
(Topic Notes you downloaded). Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library
instead of the Topic Notes Editor.

By comparison, the Topic Notes Editor is now for your personal topical notes (topical notes
you wrote), just like the Journal Notes are for your personal journal notes and the Study Notes
are for your personal study notes.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 151
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

e-Sword 9 Users: Can’t Find your Topic Notes?
If you upgraded from e-Sword 9 and cannot find your Topic Notes, you most likely stored
your Topic Notes in the “program filese-sword” folder. You can view those Topic Notes from the
Reference Library, see Chapter 13. You can control where the Reference Library looks for
resources by reading the Changing Your e-Sword Resource Location section.

Topic Notes you need to edit: move these files to your e-Sword user folder, usually “My
Documentse-Sword”. If necessary, follow the instructions in “Changing Where e-Sword Reads
Topic Notes” so e-Sword reads the proper folder to display your Topic Note files.

Topic Notes you only need to view: move these files to your e-Sword install folder, usually
“Program Filese-Sword”. Then view them from the Reference Library (see Chapter 13).


Viewing Your Topic Notes
   •    To view all of your Topic Notes, click the Topic Menu, shown below.

   •    To view a specific topic, left-click the topic with the mouse.




   •    If you have multiple Topic files, you can view a different Topic file by clicking the
        popup menu at the bottom of the Editor window.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 152
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Creating a Topic Note
To create a topic note:

   1. Click the New Topic           icon in the Editors window.




   2. Enter the title of the topic you want to create.




   3. Notice the new entry topic title appears in the Editor toolbar.

   4. Type your notes for this topic. Click the Save  icon to save your notes. It's a good idea
      to save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword.

                TIP: You can create popup Scripture "ToolTips" in your own Notes! Just select
                an existing verse reference, like John 3:16, and click the Format Scripture
                ToolTip      icon (or press Ctrl-J).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 153
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Editing a Topic Note
You can edit any Topic Note you previously wrote:

   1. Navigate to the topic in the Editors window (see larger red box below):




   2. Edit your topic note and click the Save  icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to
      save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword.

   3. Click the Edit Topic Title icon (smaller red box above).

   4. A window will appear allowing you to change the name of the topic title. Click the OK
      button to save changes or CANCEL to cancel changes.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 154
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Optimizing Topic Notes Files with Images
Chapter 8, “Introduction to the Editors”, explains how to use and embed images in the Notes
Editor.

How Image Bloat Happens
If you insert and then remove images from a Topic Note, the size of the file may become
unnecessarily large. e-Sword uses the SQLite database format to store Topic Note data. When
you insert an image, the size of the database expands to accommodate the image data.

When you delete the image from a Topic Note, the database does not automatically contract.
Even though the image is deleted, the database is still the same size! This wastes system
resources and if you distribute the module to others, the module requires more downloading
time and bandwidth.

Removing Image Bloat
e-Sword compacts the Topic Notes database when you delete a topic note.

To make sure your Topic Notes module is the smallest size possible:

   1. Click the New Topic           icon.

   2. Enter the title of the topic you want to create.

   3. Click the Delete Topic          icon to delete the topic you just created.

You should not worry about this issue if you occasionally use images in your personal Topic
Notes. However, if you make modules for downloading by other people, you might consider
making this a standard practice to produce the smallest files possible.



Deleting a Topic Note
Make sure that the specific topic you want to delete appears in the text box of the drop down
list. Click the Delete Topic   icon.

The following dialog box appears:




If you are sure you want to delete the topic, click OK. Otherwise, click No. You cannot undelete
or undo this action!




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 155
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Searching Topic Notes

To search your Topic Notes:

1. Click the Locate Notes icon           in the Topic Notes Editor.




2. The Locate Topic Notes window will appear. Type the search word(s) in the first
   field. Not sure how to spell your search terms? Take your best guess and then click
   the spell check icon     .




3. In the screenshot above, we typed, "body of Christ" in the search box.

4. We selected Search for all of the words from the drop down menu to find only
   Topic Notes with all words from our search phrase.

5. Click the Search icon      in the upper, right corner of this window. The search
   results are categorized by topic on the left, as shown above.



e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 156
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES




6. After reviewing the search results, press the OK button. This closes the search
   window and displays the full text of the Topic Note you chose.

        TIP: If we selected, Search for any of the words, e-Sword would have displayed
        search results with all words from our search phrase (“body” and “of” and “Christ”). Topic
        Notes would have been shown if they contained all the words as separate words
        anywhere in the Topic Note. Be careful how you refine your search.


Additional Search Options Wheel
For an even more specific search, click the search wheel, (shown in red below). You may use
this more specific search with or without Regular Expressions, discussed in Chapter 22.




Case Sensitive: When checked, this option makes your search case sensitive to find “Word”
with an upper-case “W” (see above).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 157
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Partial Search: Below, we searched for "bapti". Notice the results for variations of our search
phrase, including “baptized”, “baptism”, “baptizing”, etc. (see below).




Synonyms: You can search for your search phrase and synonyms of your search phrase. In
the example below, the synonyms for atonement include, “redemption”, “atone”, etc. The
synonym box will be grayed-out (unavailable) unless Search for any of the words is chosen
(see below).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 158
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Copying from the Bible to Your Topic Notes
In addition to copying with this method, you can also apply formatting to copied verses with
the Copy Verses command documented in the Chapter 3, “The Bible Windows In-Depth”.

To copy Psalms 33:6 into your Topic Notes:

   1. Navigate to Psalms 33:6 in the Topic Notes Editor window. Left-click the mouse
      where you want to paste the verse.

   2. Right-click the verse in the Bible window and select Paste Into Topic Notes. (To paste
      more than one verse, select the verses you want to paste before right-clicking and
      choosing Paste Into Topic Notes.)




   3. The verse appears in your Topic Notes.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 159
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Copying from Other Windows to Topic Notes
When copying from the other windows, such as the Commentaries, Dictionaries, Reference
Library, etc. to the Topic Notes editor, you have two options:

1. Copy the entire text to the Topic Notes window.

2. Copy an excerpt of the text to the Topic Notes window.


Copying the Entire Text

   1. Place your cursor in the Topic Notes window where you want the copied text to
      appear.

   2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy.

   3. Click the Select All   icon or right click anywhere in the text and choose Select
      All from the menu. The complete text appearing in the window will be
      highlighted.

   4. With the text still selected, right-click and select Paste into Topic Notes (be
      sure your Topic Notes are open to the correct verse). The selected text will be
      copied into your Topic Notes at the location where you last placed your cursor.

Copying an Excerpt

   1. Place your cursor in the Topic Note window where the copied text should
      appear.

   2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy.

   3. Select the part of the text you want to copy to Topic Notes by highlighting (left
      click the mouse and drag to select) the text.

   4. Right click and select Paste into Topic Notes. Only the selected text will paste.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 160
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Importing and Exporting Topic Notes
e-Sword lets you import data (text, images, tables, etc.) into Topic Notes. You can also export
your Topic Notes to other file formats.

The import option includes (or imports) text into your Topic Notes from other files. You can
import the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), and txt (plain
text).

To import a file:

   1. Select a verse from the Topic Notes Editor. The text you import will appear in this
      Topic Note.

   2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Import button.

   3. Navigate to the folder containing the file to import, select the file, and click Open.

   4. The text from your document will appear in the verse you selected in Step 1 above.


The export option creates an external file (separate from e-Sword) containing your Topic Note.
You can export the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), txt
(plain text), and pdf.

To export a Topic note:

   1. Select the Topic Note you want to export by navigating to that verse in the Topic Notes
      Editor.

   2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Export button.

   3. Navigate to the folder that will contain your exported file, provide a name for your file,
      and click save. You may need to adjust the “Save as type” setting to specify the file
      format e-Sword uses to export your data.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 161
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Managing More than One Topic Notes File - Advanced
Advanced users may want to create and edit more than one Topic Notes file.

The default name for the Topic Notes file is “topic.topx” and is typically stored in “My
Documentse-sword”, or the location of your e-Sword user folder. This configuration meets the
needs of the majority of e-Sword users. If you do not need additional files or do not feel
comfortable with the instructions that follow, you may not need this functionality.

At the bottom of the screen below, the popup menu is outlined in red. The default Topic Note
file, topic.topx, is the currently selected file. To view a different file, select the Topic Note from
the menu.




Creating a New Topic Notes File
To create a new Topic Notes file:

   1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse
      in the Topic Notes Window.

   2. Click the New button.

   3. Specify a filename and click the Save button.

   4. The Topic Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the
      filename you chose in step 3. You now have a new, blank Topic Notes file.

   5. See the “Creating a Topic Note” section for instructions on adding a Topic Note to the
      Topic File.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                 P a g e 162
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Opening a Topic Notes File
To open a Topic Note file:

        WARNING: If you open a file from a different folder location, the Topic Notes Editor
        shows only the Topic Note files from that folder in the popup menu at the bottom of the
        Editor window. That means the popup menu will show only the filenames in the folder
        where you opened the file.




        1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Topic Notes Window.

        2. Click the Open option.

        3. Choose a filename and click the Open button.

        4. The Topic Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the
           filename you selected in step 3.

   e-Sword 9 Users: Can’t Find your Topic Notes?
   If you upgraded from e-Sword 9 and cannot find your Topic Notes, you most likely stored
   your Topic Notes in your “program filese-sword” folder. You can view those Topic Notes
   from the Reference Library (see Chapter 13). You can control where the Reference Library
   looks for resources by reading the Changing Your e-Sword Resource Location section.

   In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes Editor displayed third party Topic Notes
   (Topic Notes you downloaded). Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library
   instead of the Topic Notes Editor.

   By comparison, the Topic Notes Editor is now for your personal topical notes (topical notes
   you wrote), just like the Journal Notes are for your personal journal notes and the Study
   Notes are for your personal study notes.

   Topic Notes you need to edit: move these files to your e-Sword user folder, usually “My
   Documentse-Sword”. If necessary, follow the instructions in “Changing Where e-Sword
   Reads Topic Notes” so e-Sword reads the proper folder to display your Topic Note files.

   Topic Notes you only need to view: move these files to your e-Sword install folder, usually
   “Program Filese-Sword”. Then view them from the Reference Library (see Chapter 13).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 163
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Changing Where e-Sword Reads Topic Notes - Advanced
Most users do not need to change where e-Sword reads Topic Notes files. Advanced
users may want to read from a different location. And some users who upgrade from a previous
version may have changed where e-Sword reads Topic Notes files.

Each Note Editor uses its own folder setting. By default, all three Editors read from the e-
Sword user folder, typically “My Documentse-sword”. However, each Editor Type can read from
a different location.

        WARNING: Changing the folder the Topic Notes Editor reads may result in you not
        being able to find your other Topic Notes files. For example, if you have multiple Topic
        Notes files in one folder but you change where e-Sword reads Topic Notes files, you will
        not be able to view your other Topic Notes files. In that situation, you must either change
        the folder where the Topic Notes Editor reads or move your Topic Notes to the new
        folder.

To change the folder where the e-Sword reads Topic Notes:

   1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Topic Notes
      Window.

   2. Click the Open option.

   3. Navigate to the folder where e-Sword should read Topic Notes.

   4. Choose a filename and click the Open button.

   5. The Topic Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the
      filename you selected in step 4. And the popup menu at the bottom of the Editors
      window now shows only the files from the new folder you selected in step 4.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 164
CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES

Reference Library (.REFX) Files
e-Sword supports a new file format for the Reference Library.

Reference Book files are identical to Topic files except Reference Book files are compressed to
save disk space. If you distribute REFX files to other e-Sword users, Reference Book files
cannot be edited or changed. One of the criticisms about Topics files has been that anyone can
change the content of a Topic file, effectively “putting words in the mouth” of its author. The
Reference Book format prevents such casual tampering.

When to Use Reference Book Files
You can convert your Topic Notes files (.topx) to Reference Book (.refx) format.

You are not required to convert your Topic Notes files to Reference Book format. The
Reference Library will read Topic Notes files and Reference Book files.

If you simply want to view your Topic Notes in the Reference Library, copy the Topic Note files
to your e-Sword resource folder, usually “c:program filese-sword”. You can control where the
Reference Library looks for resources by reading the Changing Your e-Sword Resource
Location section.

Why Convert to Reference Book Files Then?
Most of the time, users will not need to create Reference Book files. Reference Book files
should be used in three situations:

   1. You do not want your content changed. Or if your content is copyrighted and you
      do not wanted the material easily distributed beyond e-Sword.

   2. You used e-Sword’s new image/picture functionality and the resource is large because
      of the added pictures. The REFX format compresses the data. In one of our tests, a
      4mb file compressed to 600kb, a reduction of about 7 times! Smaller files require less
      hard drive space, less computer memory, and generally help e-Sword run faster.

   3. You lack the technical skills to copy your Topic files to the e-Sword resource folder,
      usually “c:program filese-sword”. During the conversion to Reference Book format , the
      converted REFX files are moved to your e-Sword install folder.

How to Convert Topic Notes to Reference Book Format
To convert Topic Notes to Reference Book format:

   1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the
      Topic Notes window.

   2. Click the Convert to Reference Book option.

   3. A confirmation box will tell you to restart e-
      Sword to see the Reference Library book in
      the Reference Library.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 165
Chapter 12: The Dictionaries Window
e-Sword provides a Dictionaries window so you can learn the definition of words and Strong’s
numbers while using e-Sword.

e-Sword extends dictionary functionality beyond the traditional term/definition format. For
example, the "Nave's Topical Bible" (Nave) and "Torrey's New Topical Textbook" (Torrey) are
specialty dictionary modules. These excellent resources contain many cross references, perfect
for conducting in-depth studies on specific Biblical topics.




What’s in this Chapter?
     Using Dictionaries ...........................................................................................................167
     Quick Lookup Inside the Dictionary .................................................................................168
     Viewing Your Dictionary Search History..........................................................................169
     Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window ......................................170
     Searching a Dictionary ....................................................................................................171
     Searching More Than One Dictionary Simultaneously ....................................................171




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                            P a g e 166
CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW

Using Dictionaries
When you click a word in any tab or window, all dictionaries containing information about the
selected word will display the blue (i) Information Icon. The word you click does not have to be
a hyperlink or tooltip link. The word can simply be normal text.




        TIP: If the Dictionary window stops displaying new information when you click
        new words, make sure the Link icon        is pressed. Also remember that a
        dictionary may not necessarily have a definition for every word.

Topics List and Performance
If your dictionary view does not contain a list of entries (see the list above beginning with
“Abiding”), click the Dictionary Topics      icon. By default, the Dictionary Topics icon is
already pressed.

        PERFORMANCE: If a dictionary reacts or performs slowly, disable the display of
        Dictionary Topics. If enabled, the Dictionary Topics display must load before you can
        use the dictionary. This can make switching between resource tabs slow for large
        dictionaries.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 167
CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW

Quick Lookup Inside the Dictionary
While using a dictionary, you may want to lookup a word appearing in the text of the dictionary
itself.

   1. Right-click the word to display the following menu options:




   2. Click Lookup and the definition displays in your current dictionary (if available) and the
      blue (i) Information Icon appears for other dictionaries with matching entries.

        TIP: You can bypass the context menu shown above. While pressing the Ctrl key, click
        a word in the dictionary to view it’s definition.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 168
CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW

Viewing Your Dictionary Search History
e-Sword “remembers” which dictionary entries you viewed this session. To cycle back through
previous entries, click the blue back arrow   at the beginning of the Dictionaries toolbar.

If you viewed entries from more than one dictionary, the dictionary tab view will not
automatically change. The blue (i) Information Icon appears in the dictionary tabs with
matching entries to your previous queries.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 169
CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW

Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window
The study of Hebrew and Greek text, without first learning Hebrew or Greek, is one of e-
Sword's most powerful features. This is accomplished through the Strong's number system.
James Strong assigned every unique Hebrew and Greek word in the Bible a number. Thanks to
Strong’s numbers, we are able to easily search the Scriptures to locate Hebrew and Greek
words.

Strong’s Number Basics
The Old Testament was written in Hebrew, and the New Testament was written in Greek. The
Strong’s numbering system formats the Old Testament in Hebrew with an “H” in front of the
number and the New Testament Greek with a “G” in front of the number. For example, the
reference, “H430,” refers to Old Testament. “G430” represents a word in the New Testament
and has no correlation to the Hebrew “H430” word.

When you find a Strong's number elsewhere in e-Sword, you can view the definition in the
Dictionary window:

   1. Confirm the link          icon is “pressed”.

   2. Click the Strong’s number.

   3. The blue (i) information icons appear on the resource tabs of the Dictionaries window
      (be sure the link icon      is selected).



        TIP: Strong’s numbers can be viewed without leaving your current window, if you
        only need a quick definition. Strong's definitions can be displayed as "ToolTips". Place
        the mouse pointer over a Strong's number to display the definition in a ToolTip popup.

        MEGA TIP: Press the F4 button to copy the Strong’s definition to the Windows
        clipboard. You can paste (Ctrl-V) the definition into the Notes Editor or your own word
        processor!




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 170
CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW




Searching a Dictionary
The Dictionaries search is nearly identical to the Bible and Reference Library search.

Click the Search Dictionaries         icon, or click Dictionaries from the main menu and choose
Search.

When the Search window opens, type the word you want to search and select your search
criteria. Click the Search icon and a search will be done in the active dictionary.

For more information on using the dictionary search features, see the search instructions in
Chapter 3 and Chapter 13. Also see Chapter 22 for an explanation of Regular Expression
Searching.



Searching More Than One Dictionary Simultaneously
To search multiple dictionaries at once, select Dictionary from the main menu and choose
Extended Search.

When the Extended Search window opens, you can select which dictionaries to search. Click
the Dictionaries icon highlighted in red below.

For more information on using the dictionary search features, see the extended search
instructions in Chapter 3 and Chapter 13. Also see Chapter 22 for an explanation of Regular
Expression Searching.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 171
CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 172
Chapter 13: Reference Library
The Reference Library is now the central place to view your downloaded Topic files and a new
type of file called Reference Modules (.refx). Material available from the Reference Library
includes books, essays, and papers written by other authors. Some may be as short as a few
pages, and other resources may contain thousands of pages. For example, BibleSupport.com
hosts a number of William Evans’ and F.B. Meyer’s books in Reference Book format. You can
also download official Reference Modules through the e-Sword Module Downloader.

With the Reference Library you can:

   •     Select resources to read with the drop down menu near the top of the screen.

   •     Filter your resources by title, which is helpful for narrowing large libraries.

   •     Search all of your Topic Notes and Reference Library Books at once!

The Reference Library displays .refx modules and .topx modules.



What’s in this Chapter?
       Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library? .................................................174
       Why Can’t I View Topic Notes Files in the Reference Library?........................................174
       Opening the Reference Library .......................................................................................174
       Reference Library: Background, Foreground, Resizing ...................................................175
       Viewing Resources in the Reference Library ..................................................................176
       Filtering Resources in the Reference Library ..................................................................176
       Searching the Reference Library - Basic.........................................................................177
       Additional Search Options Wheel ...................................................................................179
       Searching the Reference Library - Advanced..................................................................181
       Extended Search - Multiple Reference Books .................................................................182
       Paste Into Topic Notes ...................................................................................................183
       Highlighting Text .............................................................................................................183




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                              P a g e 173
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library?
In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes Editor displayed third party Topic Notes
(Topic Notes you downloaded). Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library
instead of the Topic Notes tab (of the Editors window). The Reference Library is view-only, like
Bibles, Commentaries, and Dictionaries. You cannot edit topic notes through the Reference
Library.

By comparison, the Topic Notes tab (of the Editors Window) is now for your personal topical
notes (topical notes you wrote), just like the Journal Notes are for your personal journal notes
and the Study Notes are for your personal study notes.


Why Can’t I View Topic Notes Files in the Reference Library?
By default, e-Sword 10 expects your third party Topic Notes to be in your e-Sword resource
folder, usually “c:program filese-sword”. You can control where e-Sword looks for resources
by reviewing the “Changing Your e-Sword Resource Location” section.

If your downloaded Topic Notes are in the My Documentse-sword folder, or another folder,
you must move them to your e-Sword resource folder for the Reference Library to find them.

Remember, this only applies to your downloaded, or third party, Topic Notes. Your personal
topic notes—the topical notes you wrote—should remain in the “My Documentse-sword”
folder so you can continue editing them in the Topic Notes Editor.


Opening the Reference Library
The Reference Library is represented on the main e-Sword screen with a small icon, highlighted
in red below:




                                                                           Reference
You can also open the Reference Library by clicking Tools from the            Library
main menu and then choosing Reference Library.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 174
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

Reference Library: Background, Foreground, Resizing
The Reference Library window “floats” on top of e-Sword’s main window. You can access the
e-Sword main window without closing the Reference Library window. For example, if you need
to reference the Bible, lookup a definition, view commentary text, or create a Study Note, click
the e-Sword main window in the background.

You may also move the e-Sword main window and the Reference Library window so they are
offset or in any orientation that suits your monitor.

Lastly, you may resize the Reference Library window larger or smaller (see Chapter 2,
“Customizing e-Sword”).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 175
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

Viewing Resources in the Reference Library
With the Reference Library, you can select resources to read with the drop down menu near
the top of the screen. Each resource’s sections, or chapters, appear on the left side of the
screen. The section or chapter text is shown on the right side of the screen.

In the example below, you can see the other resources available in the Reference Library.




Filtering Resources in the Reference Library
If you have numerous resources, you can filter your resources by title. In the example below,
the only resources showing contain the word “evans”. After typing your keyword filter, click the
Filter Title icons (shown in red below).




.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 176
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

Searching the Reference Library - Basic

1. To search the Reference Library, make sure the Reference Library is open and the
   active resource is the one you want to search.

2. Click the search icon   in the Reference Library window. Or, click Library from
   the Reference Library menu and then select Search.

3. A search window appears. At the top of the search window, you will see the name of
   the resource you were viewing when you opened the search window. Your search is
   limited to this resource. To search a different resource, select a new resource from
   the drop down menu.




4. Type your search word(s) in the first field. Not sure how to spell your search terms?
   Take your best guess and then click the Spell Check icon        .

5. In the screenshot above, we typed, "new testament" in the search box.

6. We selected Search for all of the words from the drop down menu to find only
   resources with all the words from our search phrase.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 177
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

7. Click the search icon      in the upper, right corner of this window. The search
   results are categorized by section on the left.




8. After reviewing the search results, press the OK button. This closes the search
   window and displays the full text of the section or chapter you chose.

        TIP: If we selected, Search for any of the words, e-Sword would have displayed
        search results for any chapter with both words from our search phrase (“new” and
        “testament”). These results would not necessarily have been discussing the New
        Testament. Be careful how you refine your search.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 178
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

Additional Search Options Wheel
For an even more specific search, click the search wheel, (shown in red below). You may use
this more specific search with or without Regular Expressions, discussed in Chapter 22.




Case Sensitive: When checked, this option will make your search case sensitive to find “god”
with a lower-case “g” (see above).

Partial Search: Below, we searched for "scriptur". Notice the results for variations of our search
phrase, including “Scripture”, “Scriptures”, and “Scriptural” (see below).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 179
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

Synonyms: You can search for your search phrase and synonyms of your search phrase. In
the example below, the synonyms found include, “The word”, “Scripture”, “New Testament” and
“Old Testament”. The synonym box will be grayed-out (unavailable) unless Search for any of
the words is chosen (see below).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                       P a g e 180
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

Searching the Reference Library - Advanced
Regular Expressions, also referred to as REGEX or REGEXP, use special codes to match
patterns of text in powerful ways. In e-Sword, regular expressions allow you to search the Bible
beyond the search methods you previously used.

This section is a very brief introduction to searching with Regular Expressions using e-Sword.
Chapter 22 covers this functionality in much greater detail.

If we select Regular expressions from the drop down list, we can perform a much broader
"wild card" search. For example, in the window below, we searched for words starting with “s”
and ending in “e” by typing b (the symbol for word boundary) followed by l...e and closed with
the word boundary symbol b.




For more information on searching with Regular Expressions and it’s exceptional power, see
Chapter 22.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 181
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

Extended Search - Multiple Reference Books
To search for words or phrases across multiple resources, click Library on the Reference
Library menu, and then select Extended Search.

        TIP: The more resources you search at once and the longer the resources are in
        length, the more time e-Sword will need to complete the search. Searching thousands
        of resources may require a long time. The progress bar shows the current status of the
        search.


        You may press the Escape key to abort a search, while showing the results already
        found.

This window is almost identical to the basic Reference Library Search function, but it allows
you to select multiple resources.




Reference Books icon: This icon, shown in the red box above, displays the Resource Window
(also shown above). The Resource Window lets you choose which resources to include in
your search.

Search Summary
In left column of the window above, the first box shows the name of the chapter (or section)
with matching text.

The second box shows the name of the resource where the match was found.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 182
CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY

Paste Into Topic Notes
As with most windows in e-Sword, the Reference Library lets you paste selected text into your
Journal, Study, or Topic Notes.

   1. Click the main e-Sword window behind the Reference Library.

   2. Select either the Journal Notes, Study Notes, or Topic Notes tab from the Editors
      Window.

   3. In the Reference Library window, select the text you want to copy.

   4. Click the Paste Into Topic Notes icon            .




        TIP: After selecting text to copy, you can also right-click the
        mouse and choose Paste Into Notes from the context menu.


Highlighting Text
e-Sword supports highlighting text in the Reference Library window.

Select the text you want to highlight and press the Highlight icon        . For more information
on Highlighting text, see Chapter 4.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 183
Chapter 14: The Bible Reading Plan
The Bible Reading Plan will organize and structure your Bible reading. Bible Reading plans
help you stay on track, often with a specific goal such as reading the entire Bible in a year,
reading the Old Testament in six months, or reading the Psalms. Since you can make your own
Bible Reading Plans, you control when and how often you read.

You can configure the Bible Reading Plan window to automatically launch when you start e-
Sword for the first time each day.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Opening Bible Reading Plans .........................................................................................185
     Using Bible Reading Plans .............................................................................................186
     Creating a Bible Reading Plan ........................................................................................187
     Show at Startup ..............................................................................................................187




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                            P a g e 184
CHAPTER 14: THE BIBLE READING PLAN

Opening Bible Reading Plans
To open Bible Reading Plans, select Tools from the main menu and then choose Bible
Reading.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 185
CHAPTER 14: THE BIBLE READING PLAN

Using Bible Reading Plans
The Reading Plan Progress meter displays your progress toward accomplishing the plan’s
goal. Bible Reading Plans can be organized in different ways but our example below allows for
365 days (see large red box).




Previous Reading and Next Reading
The Next Reading icon shows you the next passage in the reading plan. You can also click the
Previous Reading icon.


Incrementing the Reading Plan Progress Bar
As you read each passage, click the Completed Reading             icon. The icon turns from red to
green to remind you the passage has been read.


View Chapter as Paragraph
This toggle icon switches between the verse view shown on the previous page and a
paragraph view that displays each chapter as a paragraph.


Changing Bible Reading Plans
From the drop down menu at the bottom of the Bible Reading window, select the reading plan:




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 186
CHAPTER 14: THE BIBLE READING PLAN

Creating a Bible Reading Plan
To create a Bible Reading Plan:

   1. Click the New Bible Reading Plan               icon.

   2. Click the plus signs to expand the Books of the Bible lists, starting with “Bible”.

   3. Select as little as one book or as much as the entire Bible.




   4. Click the Next button.

   5. Select the days of the week you will use the Bible Reading Plan.

   6. Select the time needed to complete the reading. e-Sword compares the number of
      books you selected with your chosen timeframe to calculate the time necessary to
      complete the plan.

   7. Save your reading plan by entering a filename and clicking the Finish button.


Show at Startup
This handy feature reminds you about your Bible Reading Plan when you start e-Sword for
the first time that day. The Bible Reading window will not show for subsequent starts during the
same day.

Tick the box marked, "Show at Startup" at the bottom of the Bible Reading window.



e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 187
Chapter 15: Daily Devotions
e-Sword includes a Daily Devotions section containing devotions by Spurgeon. You can also
download other official e-Sword devotions, such as Hoekstra, Morrison, Meyer and Ryle. To
download new devotions, select Download from the main menu and then select Devotions.
You may also visit BibleSupport.com for additional, user-created devotionals.

You can configure the Daily Devotions window to automatically launch when you start e-Sword
for the first time each day.




What’s in this Chapter?
     Opening the Daily Devotions ..........................................................................................189
     Using the Daily Devotions ...............................................................................................189
     Show Devotions at Startup .............................................................................................190




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                       P a g e 188
CHAPTER 15: DAILY DEVOTIONS

Opening the Daily Devotions
To open the Daily Devotions, select Tools from the main menu and choose Daily Devotions.




Your installed devotions are shown in the tabs at the top of the window.


Using the Daily Devotions
Select the day you want to read using the Date Display Box at the
bottom of the window.

The current day's devotion appears automatically, but you may
select any other day's devotion. Click the date bar and the
following popup window appears:

Use the forward and back arrows to select the desired month.
Then click the day you want to read.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                      P a g e 189
CHAPTER 15: DAILY DEVOTIONS

Show Devotions at Startup
This handy feature allows e-Sword to remind you about Devotions when you start e-Sword for
the first time that day. The Devotions window will not show for subsequent starts during the
same day.

Tick the box marked, "Show at Startup" at the top of the Daily Devotions window.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 190
Chapter 16: Prayer Requests
We should never forget the power of prayer. With this feature, e-Sword reminds us to pray and
helps us remember what to pray about.

You can configure the Prayer Requests window to automatically launch when you start e-Sword
for the first time each day.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Opening Prayer Requests...............................................................................................192
     Viewing Prayer Requests................................................................................................192
     Adding Prayer Requests .................................................................................................192
     Editing or Deleting a Prayer Request ..............................................................................193
     Managing Prayer Request Files ......................................................................................195
     Show Prayer Requests at Startup ...................................................................................196




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                      P a g e 191
CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS

Opening Prayer Requests
The prayer request feature adds organization and remembrance to your prayer life. To open the
window, select Tools from the main menu, and choose Prayer Requests.




Each prayer request is labeled with these abbreviations:

A - Adoration
C - Confession
T - Thanksgiving
S – Supplication


Viewing Prayer Requests
You can view your prayer requests by clicking the title of the prayer request from the Today’s
Prayer Requests tab.

Adding Prayer Requests
Add a new request using the Request Maintenance tab:




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 192
CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS




   1. Click the Add button to add a new Prayer Request.

   2. Enter the following information:

        Prayer Request Type: Select the Prayer Request category.

        Prayer Request Start Date: The prayer request will not appear in the Today’s Prayer
        Requests tab until your selected start date.

        Prayer Request Frequency: Select between Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or
        Answered. If you select “weekly”, the prayer request appears in the Today’s Prayer
        Requests tab on the same day of the week as your start date. If you select “monthly”,
        the prayer request appears in the Today’s Prayer Requests tab on the same day of the
        month as your start date.

        Prayer Description: Enter what you need to pray for in the bottom half of the window.

   3. Click Update to add the request or Cancel to exit without saving.


Editing or Deleting a Prayer Request
To edit a Prayer Request:

   1. Click the Request Maintenance tab.

e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 193
CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS



   2. Click the prayer request title you want to edit.

   3. Click Edit.

   4. Edit any of the following information:

        •   Prayer Request Title
        •   Prayer Request Type
        •   Prayer Request Start Date
        •   The Prayer Request Frequency, and
        •   The Prayer Request Details

   5. After you finish editing the prayer request, click the Update button.


To delete a prayer request:

   1. Click the prayer request title you want to delete.

   2. Click the Delete button

   3. Confirm your request by clicking Yes. Cancel the delete by clicking No.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                      P a g e 194
CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS

Managing Prayer Request Files
If more than one person uses e-Sword on the same computer or if you want to categorize your
prayer requests in different files, you can create a new prayer request file.

By default, e-Sword stores prayer requests in the prayer.prlx file in your e-Sword user folder,
usually “My Documentse-Sword”.

Creating Prayer Request Files

To create a Prayer Request file:

   1. Click the Request Maintenance tab.

   2. Click the New Prayer Requests File button.




   3. Specify a new filename and click the Save button.


Loading Prayer Request Files
After creating at least one other Prayer Request file, e-Sword displays your Prayer Request files
in a drop down menu at the bottom of the window. Click another Prayer Request file to show
requests from that file:




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 195
CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS

Show Prayer Requests at Startup
This handy feature reminds you about Prayer Requests when you start e-Sword for the first
time that day. The Prayer Requests window will not show for subsequent starts during the same
day.

Tick the box marked, "Show at Startup" at the top of the Prayer Requests window.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 196
Chapter 17: Scripture Memory
“I have stored up your word in my heart, that I might not sin against you,” — Psalms 119:11.

The Scripture Memory tool organizes your scripture memorization goals and makes memorizing
verses entertaining. This feature includes several puzzle-style word games that children (and
adults) enjoy playing.

You can configure the Scripture Memory window to automatically launch when you start e-
Sword for the first time each day.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Opening Scripture Memory .............................................................................................198
     Viewing Verses to Memorize ..........................................................................................198
     Adding Scripture Memory ...............................................................................................199
     Editing or Deleting a Memory Verse ...............................................................................200
     Testing Memory Verses ..................................................................................................201
     Managing Memory Verse Files .......................................................................................203
     Show Memory Verses at Startup ....................................................................................204




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                      P a g e 197
CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY

Opening Scripture Memory
The Scripture Memory feature organizes your scripture memorization goals.

To open the Scripture Memory window, select Tools from the main menu and choose Scripture
Memory.




Viewing Verses to Memorize
You can view your memorization verses by clicking the verse in the Today’s Memory Verses
tab.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                      P a g e 198
CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY

Adding Scripture Memory
Add a new Memory Verse using the Verse Maintenance tab:




   1. Click the Add button to add a new verse.

   2. Enter the following information:

        Memory Verse: Enter the verse you want to memorize.

        Translation: Select the translation used to display the verse.

        Verse Memory Category: Select a category for the verse.

        Hint / General Idea: Displayed as a hint by the Test Memory Verses feature.

        Start Date: The verse will not appear in the Today’s Memory Verses tab until your
        selected start date.

        Verse Frequency: Select between Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Randomly, or
        Memorized. If you select “weekly”, the verse appears in the Today’s Memory Verses
        tab on the same day of the week as your start date. If you select “monthly”, the verse
        appears in the Today’s Memory Verses tab on the same day of the month as your start
        date.

   3. Click the Update button to add the verse or Cancel to exit without saving.


e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 199
CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY

Editing or Deleting a Memory Verse
To edit a Memory Verse:

   1. Click the Verse Maintenance tab.

   2. Click the verse you want to edit.

   3. Click Edit.

   4. Edit any of the following information:

        Memory Verse: Enter the verse you want to memorize.

        Translation: Select the translation used to display the verse.

        Verse Memory Category: Select a category for the verse.

        Hint / General Idea: Displayed as a hint by the Test Memory Verses feature.

        Start Date: The verse will not appear in the Today’s Memory Verses tab until your
        selected start date.

        Verse Frequency: Select between Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Randomly, or
        Memorized. If you select “weekly”, the verse appears in the Today’s Memory Verses
        tab on the same day of the week as your start date. If you select “monthly”, the verse
        appears in the Today’s Memory Verses tab on the same day of the month as your start
        date.

   5. After you finish editing the verse, click the Update button.


To delete a Memory Verse:

   1. Click the verse you want to delete.

   2. Click the Delete button

   3. Confirm your request by clicking Yes. Cancel the delete by clicking No.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 200
CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY

Testing Memory Verses
The multiple choice “tests” and creative word games help you memorize your Memory Verses.
The test tabs are shown at the top of the window. The Hint button at the bottom the window
displays the “Hint / General Idea” field (see “Editing or Deleting a Memory Verse” above).

Each test also includes a color coded error chart. The window background turns a
progressively darker shade of red with each error. When the answer is correct, the window
background turns a soothing shade of green.




Associate Reference Test
This is a “multiple choice” style test, requiring you to match the text of the verse with multiple
verse references at the bottom of the window (see screenshot above).




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 201
CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY

Fill In The Blanks
Select from the words at the
bottom of the screen to fill in the
blanks.

Start with the first blank word and
work your way through the verse. If
you make an error, you must try
again.


Word Position
Beginning with the first blank
word, you must double click
the correct word from the list
of words (in the right window
pane). Work you way
through the blank words until
complete.

If you make an error, you
must try again.


First Letter
Beginning with the first blank
word, enter the first letter of
the word. Work you way through
the blank words until complete.

If you make an error, you must try
again.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                      P a g e 202
CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY

Managing Memory Verse Files
If more than one person uses e-Sword on the same computer or if you want to categorize your
Memory Verses in different files, you can create a new memory verse file.

By default, e-Sword stores memory verses in memory.memx in your e-Sword user folder,
usually “My Documentse-Sword”.

Creating Memory Verse Files

To create a Memory Verse file:

   1. Click the Verse Maintenance tab.

   2. Click the New Scripture Memory File button.




   3. Specify a new filename and click the Save button.

Loading Memory Verse Files
After creating at least one other Memory Verse file, e-Sword displays your Memory Verse files
in a drop down menu at the bottom of the window. Click another Memory Verse file to show
verses from that file:




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 203
CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY

Show Memory Verses at Startup
This handy feature reminds you about Memory Verses when you start e-Sword for the first
time that day. The Scripture Memory window will not show for subsequent starts during the
same day.

Tick the box marked, "Show at Startup" at the top of the Scripture Memory window.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                       P a g e 204
Chapter 18: SermonAudio.com
e-Sword is integrated with SermonAudio.com. You can listen to sermons while you study the
Bible. This window automatically organizes sermons by verse according to the active
passage of scripture in the e-Sword Bibles window!

After this window opens, you can change the passage of scripture to listen to sermons on other
Bible verses.

        REMEMBER: An active Internet connection is required for e-Sword to connect with
        SermonAudio.com




What’s in this Chapter?
     Opening the SermonAudio.com Window ........................................................................206
     Listening to a Sermon .....................................................................................................206
     Listening to Sermons On Different Verses ......................................................................209
     Sorting Sermons By Heading ..........................................................................................209
     Adjusting the Width of Heading Columns ........................................................................209




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                         P a g e 205
CHAPTER 18: SERMONAUDIO.COM

Opening the SermonAudio.com Window
Click Tools from the main menu and choose SermonAudio.com. This window displays
sermons based on the active verse in e-Sword’s Bibles window.

The active verse in the
Bibles window is highlighted
in red.




Listening to a Sermon
To listen to a sermon, click the sermon title’s blue hyperlink.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                      P a g e 206
CHAPTER 18: SERMONAUDIO.COM

Learning More About the Speaker or Sermon
Click the SermonAudio.com logo to learn more about the speaker or sermon currently
playing. If you are not currently playing a sermon, the profile of your last played sermon will
load.

After the website loads in your browser, you can:

    •   View the speaker’s biographical information.

    •   Download the audio in mp3 format.

    •   Purchase a transcript.

    •   Find podcasts.

    •   Identify the speaker’s
        most popular
        sermons.

    •   Browse all the speaker’s
        sermons.

    •   Locate affiliated
        churches and
        broadcasters.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 207
CHAPTER 18: SERMONAUDIO.COM

Using the Sermon Player
You can control the sound with the Sermon Player in the lower, left portion of the window. If
you’re unfamiliar with Internet audio players, think of the Sermon Player as an advanced VCR.

For ease of explanation, we’ve added a few “sticky notes” to the Sermon Player. The
numbered notes are explained below:

   1. Rewind: If available, the audio will rewind while you hold this icon.

   2. Seek: By moving this icon right or left with your mouse, you can skip forward or
      backward in the audio playback.

   3. Fast Forward: The audio will play at twice the speed while you hold this icon.

   4. Play: Click the play icon to start the sermon.

   5. Stop: Click the stop icon to stop the sermon.

   6. Previous: Skip to the previous sermon, if available.

   7. Next: Skip to the next sermon, if available.

   8. Mute: Instantly decreases the volume to zero.

   9. Volume: Increases or decreases the sound level as you move this icon right or left.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 208
CHAPTER 18: SERMONAUDIO.COM

Listening to Sermons On Different Verses
Initially, the SermonAudio.com window shows sermons
based on the active verse in e-Sword’s Bibles window.

To display sermon titles on different verses:

   1. Click Bible from the SermonAudio.com window
      menu.

   2. Choose Lookup Scripture Reference.

The Lookup Scripture Reference window is undocked,
meaning the window “floats” and can be moved.

Right-click a Bible book name to quickly show
sermons from the first verse/chapter.

Right-click a chapter number to immediately view
sermons on that chapter.

Left-click or right-click a verse to show sermons on that verse.


Sorting Sermons By Heading
You may sort sermons by Reference, Title, Subtitle, Speaker, Date, and Play Count. Click the
header field you want to sort by, as shown below with the mouse pointer. By clicking the same
header field again, the sort order reverses.




Adjusting the Width of Heading Columns
You can adjust the width of the heading columns
by positioning your mouse pointer over the
divider line until the mouse pointer turns into a
multi-directional arrow. While left-clicking the
mouse, drag the divider line to change width of
that heading column




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                         P a g e 209
Chapter 19: Sermon Illustrations
Sermon Illustrations are helpful for preachers preparing a sermon. Sermon illustrations can
bring to life a sermon, illustrating concepts that might otherwise be difficult to explain.

You have the option of buying a Sermon Illustration package through e-Sword or building your
own Sermon Illustrations database.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Unlocking Sermon Illustrations .......................................................................................211
     Opening Sermon Illustrations ..........................................................................................211
     Viewing and Copying Sermon Illustrations ......................................................................212
     Filtering Sermon Illustrations ..........................................................................................212
     Adding Sermon Illustrations ............................................................................................213
     Editing or Deleting a Sermon Illustration .........................................................................214




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                       P a g e 210
CHAPTER 19: SERMON ILLUSTRATIONS

Unlocking Sermon Illustrations
The Sermon Illustrations menu option is grayed-out (non-selectable) without the Sermon
Illustrations file (illustrations.illx).

You can you purchase the fully loaded Sermon Illustrations module from e-Sword.net. The
module comes complete with over 4000 Bible illustrations, anecdotes, and poems compiled by
AMG Publishers and Pulpit Helps Magazine.

You can also download a blank illustrations.illx file from BibleSupport.com to activate the
Sermon Illustrations feature. You must add your own sermon illustrations to this blank file, which
makes the above purchase option a great deal.


Opening Sermon Illustrations
To open the Sermon Illustrations window, select Tools from the main menu and then choose
Sermon Illustrations.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                            P a g e 211
CHAPTER 19: SERMON ILLUSTRATIONS

Viewing and Copying Sermon Illustrations
   1. View a Sermon Illustration by left-clicking an illustration in the Sermon Illustrations
      tab.

   2. Click the Copy Sermon Illustration button to copy the text.

   3. Paste the text into your Topic Notes, Study Notes, or any word processor.




Filtering Sermon Illustrations
The Illustration Filter is in the Sermon Illustrations tab.

The Illustration Filter limits your view of sermon illustrations
to help narrow your search.

Sermon Illustrations are organized by Scripture and
Category. You may also search by keyword.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 212
CHAPTER 19: SERMON ILLUSTRATIONS

Adding Sermon Illustrations
Add a new sermon illustration under the Illustration Maintenance tab:




   1. Click the Add button to add a Sermon Illustration.

   2. Enter the following information:

        Illustration Title: Title of your illustration.

        Illustration Category: Choose an existing category or type a new category.

        Scripture Reference: Enter any verses this illustration applies to.

        Sermon Illustration Text: Enter the text into the bottom half of the window.

   3. Click the Update button to add the illustration or Cancel to exit without saving.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 213
CHAPTER 19: SERMON ILLUSTRATIONS

Editing or Deleting a Sermon Illustration
To edit a Sermon Illustration:

   1. Click the Illustration Maintenance tab.

   2. Click the sermon illustration title you want to edit.

   3. Click Edit.

   4. Edit any of the following information:

        Illustration Title: Title of your illustration.

        Illustration Category: Choose an existing category or type a new category.

        Scripture Reference: Enter any verses this illustration applies to.

        Sermon Illustration Text: Enter the text into the bottom half of the window.

   5. After you finish editing the sermon illustration, click the Update button.


To delete a sermon illustration:

   1. Click the sermon illustration title you want to delete.

   2. Click the Delete button

   3. Confirm your request by clicking Yes. Cancel the delete by clicking No.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 214
Chapter 20: The Graphics Viewer
e-Sword contains a built in Graphics Viewer. Your Bible study will come to life as you explore
the maps that coincide with your reading. You can view maps, illustrations and paintings used in
your Bible studies or sermons. e-Sword resources will sometimes direct you to a graphic in the
Graphics Viewer.



What’s in this Chapter?
     Opening the Graphics Viewer .........................................................................................216
     Viewing Graphics ............................................................................................................217
     Copying Graphics ...........................................................................................................218




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                           P a g e 215
CHAPTER 20: THE GRAPHICS VIEWER

Opening the Graphics Viewer
The graphics viewer can be accessed by clicking the Graphics Viewer      icon on the e-Sword
main toolbar. Or, click Tools from the main menu and select Graphics Viewer.

        TIP: The Graphics Viewer will be inactive if you do not have any installed graphical
        resources. To use the Graphics Viewer, make sure at least one graphical resource is
        installed. Download graphics resources by clicking Download from the main menu and
        choosing Graphics. You may also download graphics files from BibleSupport.com.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                        P a g e 216
CHAPTER 20: THE GRAPHICS VIEWER

Viewing Graphics
Choose from your graphic files by clicking a resource tab above the Map Display window.




Selecting Graphics within the Graphic File
Many graphics files have more than one graphic. The first graphic in the file is shown after you
select a resource tab. Other available graphics are shown in the drop down menu (see below).




Panning Graphics
Notice how your mouse pointer changes to a hand    when you move your mouse inside the
Map Display window. Click anywhere in the Map Display window and drag the graphic by
holding down the left mouse button.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                          P a g e 217
CHAPTER 20: THE GRAPHICS VIEWER

Resizing Graphics
The Graphics Viewer toolbar contains several icons for resizing graphics:

You can resize graphics by clicking the Zoom In and Zoom Out icons             . These icons can
be clicked repeatedly to adjust the zoom.

The Fit All      icon resizes the graphic to fit in your viewable window.

The Fit Height      icon resizes the height of the graphic to fit the viewable window, although the
width is allowed to extend beyond the viewable window.

The Fit Width     icon resizes the width of the graphic to fit the viewable
window, although the height is allowed to extend beyond the viewable
window.

        TIP: You can resize the Graphics Viewer window to create a larger
        viewable window. Then you can see more of a large graphic without
        panning or resizing the graphic. See Chapter 2, “Customizing e-
        Sword” for more information on resizing floating windows.

Many of these options are also available by clicking View on the Graphics
Viewer menu.


Copying Graphics
You can copy any graphic to your Journal, Study, or Topic Notes in the Editors window or
elsewhere on your computer.

   1. Display the graphic you want to copy.

   2. Click Edit from the Graphics Viewer menu and choose Copy. You may also use the
      Ctrl-C shortcut to copy.

   3. Press Ctrl-V to paste the graphic elsewhere on your computer.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 218
Chapter 21: The STEP Reader
 STEP is an abbreviation for “Standard Template for Electronic Publishing”. This file format was
designed for the storage of electronic Bible reference books. STEP is used by QuickVerse,
Bible Companion, and other Bible software products. If you already own any of these software
titles, the inclusion of the STEP Reader means you can use these resources within e-Sword!

If you do not have any STEP files, you may download a sampler step book pack at e-Sword.net
under "Extras". You may also download free and purchased Step books at:
www.lightbydesign.net



What’s in this Chapter?
     Opening The STEP Reader ............................................................................................220
     Viewing STEP Books ......................................................................................................221
     Pasting Into Notes .........................................................................................................221
     Searching STEP Books ..................................................................................................222




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                          P a g e 219
CHAPTER 21: THE STEP READER

Opening The STEP Reader
To open the STEP Reader, click the Tools from the main menu and choose STEP Reader.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                    P a g e 220
CHAPTER 21: THE STEP READER

Viewing STEP Books
To view STEP books, click File from the STEP Reader menu and choose Open.

The STEP Reader divides the screen into two panes: The topical (or scriptural) navigation
pane on the left and the text on the right.




Pasting Into Notes
The STEP Reader supports pasting selected text into your
Journal, Study, or Topic Notes. Select the text you want to
paste, and click the Paste Into Notes icon.

You can also right-click the mouse and choose Paste Into Notes from the context menu.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                       P a g e 221
CHAPTER 21: THE STEP READER

Searching STEP Books
To search a STEP Book:

   1. Click the Search tab on the left window pane

   2. Select your search criteria and click Search.

   3. Your search results appear in the right window pane, with
      keyword matches shown in yellow.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                    P a g e 222
Chapter 22: Searching e-Sword Using Regular Expressions
This section is intended for an advanced audience with a technical aptitude.
In depth use of this feature requires analytical and complex problem solving skills and
knowledge of a search syntax known as Regular Expressions.

        NOTE: Regular Expressions have been selectively implemented in e-Sword. Not all
        examples of Regular Expressions found elsewhere will work in e-Sword. If you are
        running a version earlier than 9.9.1 or newer than 10.0.5, the examples may not work
        properly because of changes to this feature.

Extra contributors to this section include: The tips shown at eStudySource.com and
LayHands.com (LayHands.com contains errors in syntax and definition that have been
corrected in this manual.).



What’s in this Chapter?
     Regular Expressions.......................................................................................................224
     Conventions Used in this Chapter...................................................................................224
     Lesson 1: Case sensitive; Characters found anywhere ...................................................225
     Lesson 2: Literal vs. Special Meaning Characters...........................................................225
     Lesson 3: Word Boundaries ............................................................................................226
     Lesson 4: Dot Character .................................................................................................227
     Lesson 5: Brackets “[]” ....................................................................................................228
     Lesson 6: Range of characters “-”...................................................................................228
     Lesson 7: Caret “^” .........................................................................................................229
     Lesson 8: Word Characters “w” .....................................................................................230
     Lesson 9: Non-Word Characters “W” .............................................................................231
     Lesson 10: Pipe Character “|” and Parenthesis “()” ........................................................232
     Lesson 11: Digit “d”........................................................................................................233
     Lesson 12: Quantifiers "*", "+", and "?" ...........................................................................234
     Lesson 13: Curly brackets “{}” .........................................................................................236
     Lesson 14: Beginning Verse Anchor “^” ..........................................................................236
     Lesson 15: Ending Verse Anchor “$” ..............................................................................237
     Lesson 16: Putting It All Together with Useful Examples ................................................238




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                                           P a g e 223
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Regular Expressions
Regular Expressions, also referred to as REGEX or REGEXP, use special codes to match
patterns of text in very powerful (but complicated) ways. In e-Sword, regular expressions allow
you to search the Bible beyond the search methods you previously used.

Understand that regular expressions see each verse in the Bible as separate characters
(letters, numbers, spaces, punctuation, etc.). Humans assemble characters into words as we
read, but regular expressions (by default) do not understand words, spaces between words, or
punctuation. Regular expressions only see characters.



Conventions Used in this Chapter
The search pattern examples used in this section may have quotation marks around them.
These quotation marks set the text apart from surrounding text for your convenience only. The
quotation marks are not apart of the search expression and will cause the expression to fail. Do
not include the quotation marks around a search pattern.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                           P a g e 224
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 1: Case sensitive; Characters found anywhere
If we search for “tax”, e-Sword returns verses with “tax” anywhere in the word. This includes
words like taxed, taxes, taxing, and Artaxerxes. The search is also case sensitive, meaning the
search will not find “Tax” or “TAX”.




Lesson 2: Literal vs. Special Meaning Characters
Each character in a search pattern means something to the search. A search for “Jesus Christ”
only shows results for “Jesus Christ”, not “Jesus”, “Christ”, or “Christ Jesus”. These search
terms are literal characters. e-Sword literally finds these exact characters.

Special meaning characters are symbolic. They tell e-Sword how to conduct the search. For
example, placing “b” before a search term (like this: “btax) tells e-Sword to only find words
beginning with tax.

You cannot use special meaning characters to find literal characters. For example, if you
want to find every question in the bible, you might search for the “?”. This will not work because
the “?” is a special meaning character. e-Sword will attempt to use it’s special meaning, not it’s
literal meaning.

The following characters have special meaning: ^ . ? * () {} [] | 

To make a question mark literal, so we can search for it, you must “escape” the question mark
by placing a backslash in front, like this: “?”




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 225
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 3: Word Boundaries
        Word boundaries tell e-Sword to match your search using words, not just characters.

        Search for:            btax

        Explanation:           “b” marks the beginning of a word boundary. This tells
                               e-Sword to only find our search letters if they begin a word.

        Words found: taxed, taxes, taxing, etc.

        Words not found:       Artaxerxes, poll-tax, etc.



        Search for:            taxb

        Explanation:           “b” marks the ending of a word boundary. This tells e-Sword to only
                               find our search letters at the end of a word.

        Words found:           tax, poll-tax etc.

        Words not found:       Artaxerxes, taxes, taxing, taxed



        Search for:            btaxb

        Explanation:           “b” marks the beginning and ending of a word boundary. This tells
                               e-Sword to only find our search letters if “tax” marks the beginning
                               and ending of a word.

        Words found:           tax

        Words not found:       Artaxerxes, taxes, taxing, taxed, poll-tax, etc.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 226
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 4: Dot Character
        The dot represents any one character.

        Search for:            bl.e

        Explanation:           The dot represents any one character. So, the search will
                               return “lie”, “lies”, “lye”, etc. But not “like” or “life” because
                               those words would require more than one character and we
                               only have one dot, allowing for one character.

        Words found: lie, lies, lye, etc.

        Words not found:       like, life, etc.




        Search for:            bl..e

        Explanation:           The dot represents any one character and we have two dots.
                               So, the search will match “like”, “life”, etc. But not “lie”, “lies”,
                               “lye”, etc.

        Words found: like, life, etc.

        Words not found:       lie, lies, lye etc.




        Search for:            b.ord

        Explanation:           The dot represents any one character, whether uppercase or
                               lowercase.

        Words found: lord, Lord, cord, word, etc.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                     P a g e 227
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 5: Brackets “[]”
        Square brackets mean any single character within the square brackets.

        Search for:            [Ll]ord

        Explanation:           Searching for "[Ll]ord" will return all verses containing "Lord" or
                               "lord".

        Verses found:          Verses with Lord or lord.




        Search for:            gr[ae]y

        Explanation:           Searching for gr[ae]y will return all verses containing “gray” or “grey”

        Verses found:          Verses with gray or grey. This is useful when you are not sure how
                               a translation spells a word, gray/grey, color/colour, etc.


Lesson 6: Range of characters “-”
        A range of characters can be specified with [ - ] syntax. Several ranges can be given in
        one expression.

        Search for:            H307[0-4]

        Explanation:           Locate all verses containing "H3070", "H3071", "H3072", "H3073",
                               or "H3074".

        Verses found:          Verses with "H3070", "H3071", "H3072", "H3073", or "H3074".

        Verses not found:      Verses with “H3075”, “H3076”, etc.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                 P a g e 228
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 7: Caret “^”
        If a character class starts with “^”, then specified characters will not be selected.

        Search for:            H307[^5-9]

        Explanation:           Locate all verses containing "H3070", "H3071", "H3072", "H3073",
                               or "H3074", but it will also match "H307".

        Verses found:          Verses with "H3070", "H3071", "H3072", "H3073", "H3074",
                               “H3080”, etc.

        Verses not found:      Verses with “H3075”, “H3076”, “H3077”, “H3078”, “H3079”.




        Search for:            man[^k]

        Explanation:           Locate all verses containing the characters “man” as long as the
                               characters are not “mankind” or any other word with “man” + “k”.

        Verses found:          Verses with “man” and any other variation of “man” except
                               “mankind” and any other word with “man” + “k”.

        Verses not found:      Verses with “mankind”.

                               A cleaner way to accomplish the above search is to use a negative
                               lookahead assertion: man(?!kind)




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 229
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 8: Word Characters “w”
        This code matches a word character. Word characters include the letters from A - Z
        (upper-case and lower-case), plus the digits from 0 - 9, plus the underscore _ character.
        All other characters (spaces, punctuation, etc.) are non-word characters.

        Building on the brackets in Lesson 5, understand that “w” is an abbreviation for: “[A-Za-
        z0-9_]”.


        Search for:            selw

        Explanation:           Finds all words which contain "sel" followed immediately by a word
                               character.

        Words found:           "self”, “selves”, “Methuselah, “himself”, “themselves”, etc.




        Search for:            selwb

        Explanation:           Finds all words which contain "sel" followed immediately by a word
                               character and the end of the word.

        Words found:           "self”, “sell”, “closely, “himself”, “myself”, etc.

        Words not found:       " Methuselah”, “themselves”, “selves”, etc.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 230
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 9: Non-Word Characters “W”
        This code matches a non-word character. Word characters include the letters from A - Z
        (upper-case and lower-case), plus the digits from 0 - 9, plus the underline character. All
        other characters (spaces, punctuation, etc.) are "non-word characters".

        Building on the brackets in Lesson 5, understand that “W” is an abbreviation for: "[^A-
        Za-z0-9_]”.

        Search for:            Wself

        Explanation:           Finds all words which begin with " self". More specifically, this finds
                               a string of characters containing a non-word character (such as a
                               space) followed immediately by "self".

        Words found:           " self", " selfish", " self-control", etc.

        Words not found:       "itself", "herself", "yourself", etc.




        Search for:            "WselfW"

        Explanation:           Finds all occurrences of the word "self" as a stand-alone word. More
                               specifically, this finds a string of characters containing a non-word
                               character (such as a space) followed immediately by "self", followed
                               immediately by a non-word character (such as a space or
                               punctuation).

        Words found:           "self".
                               Since a hyphen is a non-word character, this search will also find
                               words such as "self-control", "self-indulgence", and so on. In a
                               moment we'll see how to exclude hyphenated words.

        Words not found:       "selfish", "yourself", etc.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                 P a g e 231
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 10: Pipe Character “|” and Parenthesis “()”
        The pipe | sign means “or”.

        Search for:            Jesus|God

        Explanation:           Finds all verses with “Jesus” or “God”. The search will return a verse
                               with either term.

        Verses found:          Verses with “Jesus” or “God”

        Verses not found:      Verses not having “Jesus” and not having “God”




        Parenthesis allow for grouping or to apply a quantifier to all characters in parenthesis
        (see Lesson 12 for Quantifiers).

        Search for:            lov(e|ed|er|es)

        Explanation:           Alternating text can be enclosed in parentheses "()" and alternatives
                               separated with "|". Searching for "lov(e|ed|er|es|ing)" will locate all
                               verses containing:

                               "love", "loved", "lover", "loved", or "loving".

        Verses found:          Verses "love", "loved", "lover", "loved".

        Verses not found:      Verses containing: “loving”.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 232
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 11: Digit “d”
        "d" matches any digit. “d” is equivalent to "[0-9]" (see Lesson 5 for Brackets). "D"
        matches any non-numeric character. This is equivalent to "[^0-9]". The examples below
        are based on a search of the KJV+ Bible.

        Search for:            Hdddb

        Explanation:           Locate all verses containing the a 3 digit Strong’s number H100-
                               H999. The b boundary prevents the search from finding a 3 digit
                               number within a 4 digit number.

        Verses found:          Any 3 digit Strong’s number, such as H100-H999.

        Verses not found:      All other Strong’s numbers.




        Search for:            Ddddb

        Explanation:           Locate all verses containing a non-numeric character, followed by 3
                               digits.

        Verses found:          Any 3 digit Strong’s number, such as H100-H999 and G100-G999.

        Verses not found:      All other Strong’s numbers.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                             P a g e 233
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 12: Quantifiers "*", "+", and "?"
        Quantifiers specify how many times a character can occur. The asterisk “*” character
        finds previous character zero or more times. The plus “+” character finds find the
        previous character one or more times. The question mark “?” character finds the
        previous character zero or one times.

        It’s difficult to find practical Bible examples that only use quantifiers (without using other
        commands in conjunction with quantifiers). So let’s take two hypothetical examples, just
        to gain an understanding of the concepts. Some of the examples that follow will make
        practical use of quantifiers.

        Search for:            abc*

        Explanation:           Finds the letter "c" zero or more times.

        Words found:           “ab", "abc", "abcc", "abccc", etc.


        Search for:            ro*t

        Explanation:           Finds the letter "o" zero or more times.

        Words found:           “rot", "brother", "root", "rooted", "birth", words containing “rt”, etc.




        Search for:            abc+

        Explanation:           Finds the letter "c" one or more times.

        Words found:           “abc", "abcc", "abccc", etc.

        Words not found:       “ab”




        Search for:            ro+t

        Explanation:           Finds the letter "o" one or more times.

        Words found:           rot", "brother", "root", "rooted", etc. If a word had three “o’s”, it would
                               be found.

        Words not found:       words containing “rt”, like birth, because the “o” must be found at
                               least once.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                     P a g e 234
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

        Search for:            abc?

        Explanation:           Finds the letter "c" zero or one times only. This differs from the +
                               and * characters because they could find the character one or more
                               times. The question mark is limited to a maximum of one.

        Words found:           “ab”, “abc”

        Words not found:       “abcc”, “abccc”, etc.




        Search for:            ro?t

        Explanation:           Finds the letter "o" zero or one times only. This differs from the +
                               and * characters because they could find the character one or more
                               times. The question mark is limited to a maximum of one.

        Words found:           rot", "brother", "root", "rooted", "birth", words containing “rt”, etc.

        Words not found:       If a word had three “o’s”, it would not be found.


        Searching for "Saviou?r", “Saviou*r”, or Saviou+r”, will each locate 29 verses in the KJV
        containing "Savior" or "Saviour”. This illustrates that sometimes there isn’t a difference
        which quantifier you use. But in our later examples, you will see a quantifier choice can
        be critical.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                    P a g e 235
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 13: Curly brackets “{}”
        Curly brackets "{}" enable precise specification of character repetitions:

            •   “(abc){2}” matches the “abc” characters two times.

            •   “(abc){2,4}” matches “abc” a minimum of two times and a maximum of four
                times,

            •   “(abc){2,}” matches abc a minimum of two times, and “{,4}” matches “abc”
                maximally four times.

        Quantifiers "*", "+", and "?" (Lesson 12) are really special cases of the bracket notation.
        "*" is equivalent to “{0,}” and "+" is equivalent to “{1,}” and "?" is equivalent to “{0,1}”.

        In Lesson 6, we searched for “Hdddb” in the KJV+ Bible to locate all verses containing
        a three digit Strong’s number, such as H100-H999.

        Using what we just learned, we can search for “Hd{3}b” to return the same result as
        Lesson 6. Since “d” stands for any digit and “{3}” limits our digits to three, only H100-
        H999 will match.


Lesson 14: Beginning Verse Anchor “^”
        The “^” anchor tells e-Sword to find our search term at the beginning of a verse.

        Search for:            ^ God

        Explanation:           Locates all verses starting with the characters “God”.

        Verses found:          All verses starting with the characters “God”.

        Verses not found:      Verses with “God” anywhere else in the verse.

        Because each e-Sword verse begins with a space, we have a space in “^ God”.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 236
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 15: Ending Verse Anchor “$”
        The “$” anchor tells e-Sword to find our search term at the end of a verse.

        Search for:            man $

        Explanation:           Locates all verses ending with the characters “man”.

        Verses found:          All verses ending with the characters “man”.

        Verses not found:      Verses with “man” anywhere else in the verse. Will NOT find verses
                               ending in “man.”, “man?”, “man;” etc.




        Search for:            manW? $

        Explanation:           Locate all verses ending with the characters “man”, including
                               between zero and one non-word character. “W” specifies the non-
                               word character. “?” quantifies the non-word character to say zero or
                               one non-word characters. Non word characters are all characters
                               other than a-z, A-Z, 0-9, and the underscore _ sign.

        Verses found:          All verses ending with the characters “man” plus a non-word
                               character. This search locates “man”, “man.”, “man?”, etc.

        Verses not found:      Verses with “man” anywhere else in the verse.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 237
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Lesson 16: Putting It All Together with Useful Examples
        Many people may skip to this section and hope to use these examples to solve their
        search goals. The in-depth examples and discussions of these commands were
        methodically given in the previous examples. If you’re confused by these examples,
        please read the previous section(s) the command(s) where the commands were
        presented.

Example 1: Verses Starting/Ending with a Specific Characters
        Let’s search for verses where the word “God” starts the verse.

        Search for:            ^ God

        Explanation:           The caret “^” command anchors our search to the beginning of the
                               verse. All e-Sword verses begin with a space, resulting in our space
                               above between “^” and “God”.

        Verses found:          All verses starting with “God”.

        Verses not found:      All verses beginning with text other than “God”.


        Let’s search for verses where the word “God” ends the verse.

        Search for:            God(W)* $

        Explanation:           The “$” command will anchor our search to the end of a verse. But
                               since verses can end with non-word characters, like punctuation, we
                               must account for that or those instances of “God” will be excluded.
                               Non-word characters are represented by “W”. We must also include
                               a space between our last character and our “$” anchor.

        Verses found:          All verses ending with “God”, “God,”, “God;”, etc.

        Verses not found:      All verses not ending with the above.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 238
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Example 2: Finding Words Beginning/Ending with Specific Characters
        Let’s search for all names starting with “P” and ending with “r”. Since both first names
        and place are capitalized in the Bible, this search will find both.

        Search for:            bP(w)+rb

        Explanation:           The “b” commands define our word boundary. “P” represents the
                               first letter. “r” represents the last letter. “w” means all word
                               characters and the parenthesis forces the “+” to apply only to the
                               “w”. The “+” matches one or more word characters in between the
                               “P” and “r”.

        Verses found:          All verses containing: Peter, Potiphar, etc.

        Verses not found:      All verses are excluded unless they contain a word starting with “P”
                               and ending with “r”.

        TIP: The above search has word boundaries. So if a verse ends with “Peter.” or “Peter;”
        our search will not find those verses!

        For our search to include punctuation (or non-word characters), we must modify our
        search to include zero or more non-word characters. Non-word characters are
        represented by “W” and we can find zero or more instances of the previous character
        with “*”: bP(w)+rb(W)*




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                              P a g e 239
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Example 3: Finding Verses Only If They Contain Two+ Specific Words.
        Let’s search for “Jesus” and “Peter” and only find verses containing both words. You can
        easily find a third, fourth, fifth, etc. word by adding additional pipe | symbol.

        Search for:            (Jesus).+Peter|(Peter).+Jesus

        Explanation:           We should ideally use “b” word boundaries around our search
                               words, “Jesus” and “Peter” but for ease of presentation, we are not.

                               The search finds “Jesus” and then skips one or more characters in
                               search of “Peter”. The dot “.” represents any character. The “+” sign
                               quantifies the dot wildcard character to unlimited. The pipe “|” sign
                               says “or”. The flip side of this pattern searches for “Peter” then
                               “Jesus”. The first side of our pattern would only find “Jesus” then
                               “Peter”.

        Verses found:          All verses containing both “Jesus” and “Peter”, including “Simon
                               Peter”.

        Verses not found:      All verses not containing the text “Jesus” and “Peter”.


                LIMITATION: Using e-Sword’s implementation of Regular Expressions,
                I’m unaware of a way to ignore “Simon Peter” but still find “Jesus” and
                “Peter”. This should be possible through several methods, including a
                negative assertion, but this appears unsupported. If can show otherwise,
                contact Josh Bond on BibleSupport.com

        We can achieve the same results with a look-ahead assertion. A look-ahead
        assertion requires one string to the right of another to return a match. So, our
        search expression is: Jesus(?=.*Peter)|Peter(?=.*Jesus)

        These expressions aren’t completely identical, there are slight differences
        depending on whether the expression is greedy or lazy. Please refer to
        Regular-Expressions.info for more information.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 240
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Example 4: Finding “Wildcard” Verses References.
        You may use a Regular Expression to find verse references in a commentary or
        dictionary. Let’s search for any Bible verse.

        Search for:            w+.d{1,3}:d{1,3}

        Explanation:           “w” finds any word character, “+” repeats the search as long as the
                               search finds more word characters, the “.” finds any character (like a
                               space or a _ in a verse reference), “d” represents any digit, “{1,3}”
                               matches the digit at least once and up to three times, the “:” is a
                               literal character to find the “:” in the verse, and the final “{1,3}”
                               behaves the same as the first.

        Verses found:          When running this search in a commentary, dictionary, or topic, the
                               search matches all entries containing ANY Bible verse reference,
                               including Genesis 1:1 and Gen_1:1.

        What if you only want to find e-Sword verse references (tool tipped verses)? The
        difference between an e-Sword verse reference and a traditional verse reference
        is that e-Sword uses a three character book abbreviation and underscore _ sign
        between the book abbreviation and the chapter, like “Gen_1:1”. Our search
        expression is: w{3}_d{1,3}:d{1,3}


        What if you want to find specific verse references, such as all references to a
        specific bible book?

        Search for:            Gen_d{1,3}:d{1,3}

        Explanation:           “Gen_” is literal text—the book of the Bible we want to find. The
                               remaining search expression is the same as our example above.

        Verses found:          When running this search in a commentary, dictionary, or topic, the
                               search matches all entries containing all e-Sword verse references
                               from Genesis.

        We can further refine our search to the first chapter of Genesis with this search:
        Gen_1:d{1,3}




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                                P a g e 241
CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

Example 5: Finding a Verse with Words in Proximity to other Words.
        You may use a Regular Expression to find verses with specific words in proximity other
        words. This example is a more complex version of a previous example, Example 3. In
        our example below, let’s search for “Jesus” followed by “Christ” with no more than six
        words between them.

        Search for:     bJesusW+(?:w+W+){1,6}Christb

        Explanation:           “b” sets a word boundary, “Jesus” is our first word to find. “W+”
                               finds one or more non-word characters (like a space for example).
                               The parenthesis sets the precedence and scope of the look-ahead
                               assertion. “w+” finds one or more word characters, “W+” finds one
                               or more non-word characters. “{1,6}” skips a minimum of one word
                               and a maximum of six words. “Christ” is the second word to find.

        Verses found:          This search only finds verses with Jesus followed by Christ, with at
                               least one word in between and no more than six words in between.

        What if we want to find the opposite—“Christ” followed by “Jesus” with at least one word
        in between and no more than six words in between? A few translations will show
        additional results.

        We must insert, a pipe | symbol and reverse the order of our words. Our expression is
        now:

        bJesusW+(?:w+W+){1,6}Christb|bChristW+(?:w+W+){1,6}Jesusb


        We can achieve the same results with a look-ahead assertion. A look-ahead
        assertion requires one string to the right of another to return a match. So, our
        search expression is: Jesus(?=.*Peter)|Peter(?=.*Jesus)


Reference Information on Regular Expressions.
        Regular Expressions have been selectively implemented in e-Sword. This means many
        examples of Regular Expressions you find elsewhere will not work in e-Sword.

        A great Regular Expression command summary is available:
        http://www.autohotkey.com/docs/misc/RegEx-QuickRef.htm.

        A wealth of reference material for Regular Expressions may be found here,
        although much of this material is either not applicable to searching the Bible in e-
        Sword or not supported by e-Sword: http://www.regular-expressions.info.




e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com                               P a g e 242

More Related Content

PPT
Body image
PPTX
Stress management
PPTX
8 Benefits of Eating Healthy
PPT
Nutrition
PPTX
The dove and the sword why culture matters una 8 27 14 corrrect
PPT
Vintage weapons sword_1.31.16
PPTX
Legend Of The Sword
PPT
Ancient Greek Gods Presentation
Body image
Stress management
8 Benefits of Eating Healthy
Nutrition
The dove and the sword why culture matters una 8 27 14 corrrect
Vintage weapons sword_1.31.16
Legend Of The Sword
Ancient Greek Gods Presentation

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
2018-HIPAA-Renewal-Training for executives
PDF
Improvisation in detection of pomegranate leaf disease using transfer learni...
PDF
Taming the Chaos: How to Turn Unstructured Data into Decisions
PDF
How IoT Sensor Integration in 2025 is Transforming Industries Worldwide
PDF
Developing a website for English-speaking practice to English as a foreign la...
PDF
Architecture types and enterprise applications.pdf
PPTX
Final SEM Unit 1 for mit wpu at pune .pptx
PPTX
The various Industrial Revolutions .pptx
PPTX
Custom Battery Pack Design Considerations for Performance and Safety
PDF
“A New Era of 3D Sensing: Transforming Industries and Creating Opportunities,...
PDF
Comparative analysis of machine learning models for fake news detection in so...
PDF
A proposed approach for plagiarism detection in Myanmar Unicode text
PDF
Hybrid horned lizard optimization algorithm-aquila optimizer for DC motor
PDF
Zenith AI: Advanced Artificial Intelligence
PDF
UiPath Agentic Automation session 1: RPA to Agents
PDF
sbt 2.0: go big (Scala Days 2025 edition)
PPTX
Benefits of Physical activity for teenagers.pptx
PPT
What is a Computer? Input Devices /output devices
PDF
Getting started with AI Agents and Multi-Agent Systems
PPTX
GROUP4NURSINGINFORMATICSREPORT-2 PRESENTATION
2018-HIPAA-Renewal-Training for executives
Improvisation in detection of pomegranate leaf disease using transfer learni...
Taming the Chaos: How to Turn Unstructured Data into Decisions
How IoT Sensor Integration in 2025 is Transforming Industries Worldwide
Developing a website for English-speaking practice to English as a foreign la...
Architecture types and enterprise applications.pdf
Final SEM Unit 1 for mit wpu at pune .pptx
The various Industrial Revolutions .pptx
Custom Battery Pack Design Considerations for Performance and Safety
“A New Era of 3D Sensing: Transforming Industries and Creating Opportunities,...
Comparative analysis of machine learning models for fake news detection in so...
A proposed approach for plagiarism detection in Myanmar Unicode text
Hybrid horned lizard optimization algorithm-aquila optimizer for DC motor
Zenith AI: Advanced Artificial Intelligence
UiPath Agentic Automation session 1: RPA to Agents
sbt 2.0: go big (Scala Days 2025 edition)
Benefits of Physical activity for teenagers.pptx
What is a Computer? Input Devices /output devices
Getting started with AI Agents and Multi-Agent Systems
GROUP4NURSINGINFORMATICSREPORT-2 PRESENTATION
Ad
Ad

E sword guide-1006

  • 1. e-Sword User’s Guide Revision: 1/20/2012 By: BibleSupport.com e-Sword 10.0.6 By: Rick Meyers
  • 2. Table of Contents About this User’s Guide .........................................................................................................13 About e-Sword ......................................................................................................................13 Goal of this Documentation ...................................................................................................13 Documentation Authors .........................................................................................................13 Copyright and Distribution .....................................................................................................13 What’s New in e-Sword 10?....................................................................................................14 Reference Library..................................................................................................................14 Search All Topics At Once ................................................................................................14 REFX File Format .............................................................................................................14 Support For Pictures .........................................................................................................14 New Editor with True Word Processing Power ......................................................................15 SermonAudio.com Integration ...............................................................................................15 STEP Reader Still Included ...................................................................................................15 Chapter 1: Getting to Know e-Sword .....................................................................................16 e-Sword Interface Overview ..................................................................................................16 e-Sword Quick References: Tooltips .................................................................................17 Common Tasks Menu .......................................................................................................18 e-Sword Hotkey Reference Sheet.....................................................................................18 The Main Toolbar and Main Menu .........................................................................................21 Main Toolbar Icon Summary .............................................................................................21 Maximizing Window Views ....................................................................................................23 Bible Books Navigation Tree .................................................................................................23 Introduction to the Bibles Window .........................................................................................24 The Compare Tab.............................................................................................................26 The Parallel Tab ...............................................................................................................27 Introduction to the Commentaries Window ............................................................................28 Introduction to the Editors Window ........................................................................................29 Introduction to the Dictionaries Window ................................................................................30 Introduction to the Reference Library ....................................................................................31 Chapter 2: Customizing e-Sword ...........................................................................................32 Adjusting the Layout of e-Sword’s Main Screen ....................................................................33 Maximizing / Minimizing Window Panes With Push Pins...................................................33 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com Page 2
  • 3. TABLE OF CONTENTS Maximizing Window Panes With the Window Menu ..........................................................34 Making Window Panes Larger or Smaller .........................................................................35 Window Docking Introduction ...........................................................................................36 Docking Windows – Getting Started .................................................................................37 Docking Windows: Overlapping ........................................................................................39 Floating Window Customization ............................................................................................42 Zoom Feature: A Gift for Old Eyes ........................................................................................43 The Zoom Icon ................................................................................................................43 Zooming with the Mouse Wheel ........................................................................................43 Changing Fonts and Sizes ....................................................................................................44 Changing Text and Background Colors .................................................................................45 e-Sword Multilingual Settings ................................................................................................45 Changing the e-Sword Application Language ...................................................................45 Tooltip and Bookmark Options ..............................................................................................46 Search Options .....................................................................................................................47 Reset e-Sword Settings.........................................................................................................47 Hiding and Uninstalling Resources ........................................................................................48 Hiding Resources .............................................................................................................48 Permanently Delete Resources ........................................................................................49 Deleting Editor Notes ........................................................................................................49 Configuring Resource Tabs ...................................................................................................50 Display Tabs on a Single Row or Multiple Rows ...............................................................50 Resource Tab Sorting - Advanced ....................................................................................50 Renaming Resource Tabs ................................................................................................51 Resource Tab Conflicts ....................................................................................................51 Changing the e-Sword Resource Location ............................................................................52 Downloading Additional Resources .......................................................................................53 Unofficial Resources .........................................................................................................53 Official Resources.............................................................................................................53 Installing Unofficial Resources ..............................................................................................55 Self Installing Resources ..................................................................................................55 Compressed Zip File.........................................................................................................55 Raw e-Sword Resources ..................................................................................................55 Support for Unofficial e-Sword Resources ........................................................................55 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com Page 3
  • 4. TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 3: The Bibles Window in Detail ................................................................................56 Navigating the Bible in the Bibles Window.............................................................................57 Using the Bible Books Window .........................................................................................58 Using the Lookup Scripture Reference Popup ..................................................................58 Viewing Your Previous Bible Search Results ....................................................................59 Viewing Your Verse History ..............................................................................................59 Searching the Bible - Basic ...................................................................................................60 Quick Searching – Context Menu ..........................................................................................62 Additional Search Options Wheel ..........................................................................................63 Searching Only the OT, NT, and Apocrypha .........................................................................64 Apocrypha ........................................................................................................................64 Extended Bible Search - Multiple Translations ......................................................................65 Search Results .................................................................................................................65 Searching the Bible - Advanced ............................................................................................66 Copying and Printing Bible Searches ....................................................................................67 Printing .............................................................................................................................68 Quick Copying ..................................................................................................................68 Copying/Printing Entire Bible Passages ................................................................................69 Copying and Printing from Parallel Mode ..............................................................................70 Working with Strong's Hebrew and Greek Numbers ..............................................................71 Strong’s Number Basics ...................................................................................................71 e-Sword Modules with Strong’s Numbers .........................................................................71 Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions Without Leaving the Bible Window .........................71 Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window ........................................72 Searching by Strong's Numbers ............................................................................................73 The Compare Tab .................................................................................................................75 The Parallel Tab ....................................................................................................................76 Split Bible View .....................................................................................................................77 Analyzing Verses – Passage Theme and Word Distribution ..................................................78 Using the Gospel Harmony ...................................................................................................80 Displaying Information about a Bible Translation ...................................................................81 Chapter 4: Highlighting, Marking, and Bookmarking Resources ........................................82 Highlighting Text ...................................................................................................................83 Marking Text .........................................................................................................................85 Working with Bookmarks .......................................................................................................86 Setting Bookmarks............................................................................................................86 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com Page 4
  • 5. TABLE OF CONTENTS Accessing Bookmarks ......................................................................................................86 Bookmark Hotkeys/Shortcuts ............................................................................................87 Bible Markup File ..................................................................................................................88 Chapter 5: The Verse List Feature – Saving Verses .............................................................89 Navigating Verse Lists...........................................................................................................90 Changing Verse Lists ............................................................................................................90 Creating a Verse List and Adding Verses ..............................................................................91 Adding a Verse from a Verse List .....................................................................................91 Deleting a Verse from a Verse List ...................................................................................91 Sorting Verses in a Verse List ...........................................................................................91 Viewing Verse Lists ...............................................................................................................92 Quickly Adding a Verse to a Verse List .................................................................................93 Creating a Verse List from a Search......................................................................................94 Updating a Verse List ............................................................................................................95 Adding a Verse from a Verse List .....................................................................................95 Deleting a Verse from a Verse List ...................................................................................95 Sorting Verses in a Verse List ...........................................................................................95 Deleting Verse Lists ..............................................................................................................95 Chapter 6: Printing in e-Sword...............................................................................................96 The Print Preview Window ....................................................................................................97 Printing Bible Chapters..........................................................................................................98 Printing Selected Verses and Chapters .................................................................................98 Printing from the Editors Window ..........................................................................................99 Printing from the Commentaries ............................................................................................99 Printing from the Dictionaries Window ...................................................................................99 Printing from the Reference Library Window .........................................................................99 Printing Bible Reading .........................................................................................................100 Printing Daily Devotions ......................................................................................................100 Printing Prayer Lists ............................................................................................................100 Printing with the STEP Reader ............................................................................................100 Chapter 7: The Commentaries Window ...............................................................................101 Using Commentaries ...........................................................................................................102 When to Synchronize/Unsynchronize a Commentary ..........................................................102 Selecting Between Verse, Book, and Chapter Comments ...................................................104 Viewing “Next Comment” and “Previous Comment” ............................................................104 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com Page 5
  • 6. TABLE OF CONTENTS Viewing Commentary Information .......................................................................................104 Viewing All Commentary Entries – Birds Eye View..............................................................105 Searching a Commentary....................................................................................................106 Searching More Than One Commentary Simultaneously ....................................................106 Chapter 8: Introduction to the Editors .................................................................................107 New Editor Features in e-Sword 10 .....................................................................................108 Editor Hotkeys .....................................................................................................................108 Using the Editor – Word Processing ....................................................................................110 Find (Ctrl-F), Replace (Ctrl-R), Go To (Ctrl-G) ................................................................110 Spell Check (F7) .............................................................................................................111 Thesaurus (Shift-F7) .......................................................................................................111 Cut (Ctrl-X), Copy (Ctrl-C), Paste (Ctrl-V) .......................................................................111 Pasting Formatted Text (F11 Toggle) ............................................................................111 Undo (Ctrl-Z) and Redo (Ctrl-Y) .....................................................................................111 Insert Bookmark .............................................................................................................112 Insert Hyperlink ..............................................................................................................112 Insert Table.....................................................................................................................113 Dragging Table Boundaries ............................................................................................113 Table Properties (Table Settings) ...................................................................................114 Adjusting Rows and Columns .........................................................................................115 Insert Picture ..................................................................................................................115 Image Attributes .............................................................................................................116 Header and Footer..........................................................................................................118 Page Layout ...................................................................................................................119 Show/Hide Formatting Symbols ......................................................................................119 Font Selection and Size ..................................................................................................119 Bold (Ctrl-B), Italic (Ctrl-I), Underline (Ctrl-U) ..................................................................120 Font Color .......................................................................................................................120 Highlight .........................................................................................................................120 Format Scripture Tooltip (Ctrl-J)......................................................................................121 Align Left, Align Center (Ctrl-E), Align Right, Justify ........................................................121 Numbering and Bullets ...................................................................................................122 Bullets and Numbering Format .......................................................................................122 Indent Paragraph (CTRL-TAB) and Outdent Paragraph (SHIFT-TAB) ............................122 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com Page 6
  • 7. TABLE OF CONTENTS Format Paragraph...........................................................................................................123 Border.............................................................................................................................123 Columns .........................................................................................................................124 Page Break .....................................................................................................................124 Save Notes .....................................................................................................................124 Understanding Where the Editors Read Notes Files. ..........................................................125 How to Backup Your Notes - Advanced ..............................................................................125 Chapter 9: Journal Notes......................................................................................................126 Viewing Journal Notes.........................................................................................................127 Creating a Journal Note ......................................................................................................128 Editing a Journal Note .........................................................................................................128 Deleting a Journal Note .......................................................................................................129 Viewing All Journal Notes – Birds Eye View ........................................................................130 Searching Journal Notes .....................................................................................................131 Additional Search Options Wheel ........................................................................................131 Copying from the Bible to Your Journal Notes .....................................................................132 Copying from Other Windows to Journal Notes ...................................................................133 Copying the Entire Text ..................................................................................................133 Copying an Excerpt ........................................................................................................133 Importing and Exporting Journal Notes ...............................................................................134 To import a file: ...............................................................................................................134 To export a Journal note: ................................................................................................134 Managing More than One Journal Notes File - Advanced ...................................................135 Creating a New Journal Notes File .................................................................................135 Opening a Journal Notes File .........................................................................................135 Changing Where e-Sword Reads Journal Notes - Advanced ..............................................136 Chapter 10: The Study Notes ...............................................................................................137 Viewing Study Notes ...........................................................................................................138 Creating a Study Note .........................................................................................................138 Editing a Study Note ...........................................................................................................140 Deleting a Study Note .........................................................................................................140 Viewing All Study Notes – Birds Eye View...........................................................................141 Searching Study Notes........................................................................................................142 Additional Search Options Wheel ........................................................................................143 Copying from the Bible to Your Study Notes .......................................................................145 Copying from Other Windows to Study Notes .....................................................................146 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com Page 7
  • 8. TABLE OF CONTENTS Copying the Entire Text ..................................................................................................146 Copying an Excerpt ........................................................................................................146 Importing and Exporting Study Notes ..................................................................................147 To import a file: ...............................................................................................................147 To export a Study note: ..................................................................................................147 Managing More than One Study Notes File - Advanced ......................................................148 Creating a New Study Notes File ....................................................................................148 Opening a Study Notes File ............................................................................................149 Changing Where e-Sword Reads Study Notes - Advanced .................................................149 Chapter 11: Topic Notes .......................................................................................................150 Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library?......................................................151 e-Sword 9 Users: Can’t Find your Topic Notes? ..................................................................152 Viewing Your Topic Notes ...................................................................................................152 Creating a Topic Note .........................................................................................................153 Editing a Topic Note ............................................................................................................154 Optimizing Topic Notes Files with Images ...........................................................................155 How Image Bloat Happens .............................................................................................155 Removing Image Bloat ...................................................................................................155 Deleting a Topic Note ..........................................................................................................155 Searching Topic Notes ........................................................................................................156 Additional Search Options Wheel ........................................................................................157 Copying from the Bible to Your Topic Notes ........................................................................159 Copying from Other Windows to Topic Notes ......................................................................160 Copying the Entire Text ..................................................................................................160 Copying an Excerpt ........................................................................................................160 Importing and Exporting Topic Notes ..................................................................................161 To import a file: ...............................................................................................................161 To export a Topic note: ...................................................................................................161 Managing More than One Topic Notes File - Advanced ......................................................162 Creating a New Topic Notes File ....................................................................................162 Opening a Topic Notes File ............................................................................................163 Changing Where e-Sword Reads Topic Notes - Advanced .................................................164 Reference Library (.REFX) Files .........................................................................................165 When to Use Reference Book Files.....................................................................................165 Why Convert to Reference Book Files Then? .................................................................165 How to Convert Topic Notes to Reference Book Format .....................................................165 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com Page 8
  • 9. TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 12: The Dictionaries Window .................................................................................166 Using Dictionaries ...............................................................................................................167 Topics List and Performance ..........................................................................................167 Quick Lookup Inside the Dictionary .....................................................................................168 Viewing Your Dictionary Search History ..............................................................................169 Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window...........................................170 Strong’s Number Basics .................................................................................................170 Searching a Dictionary ........................................................................................................171 Searching More Than One Dictionary Simultaneously.........................................................171 Chapter 13: Reference Library .............................................................................................173 Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library?......................................................174 Why Can’t I View Topic Notes Files in the Reference Library? ............................................174 Opening the Reference Library ...........................................................................................174 Viewing Resources in the Reference Library .......................................................................176 Filtering Resources in the Reference Library.......................................................................176 Searching the Reference Library - Basic .............................................................................177 Additional Search Options Wheel ........................................................................................179 Searching the Reference Library - Advanced ......................................................................181 Extended Search - Multiple Reference Books .....................................................................182 Search Summary ............................................................................................................182 Paste Into Topic Notes ........................................................................................................183 Highlighting Text .................................................................................................................183 Chapter 14: The Bible Reading Plan ....................................................................................184 Opening Bible Reading Plans..............................................................................................185 Using Bible Reading Plans ..................................................................................................186 Previous Reading and Next Reading ............................................................................186 Incrementing the Reading Plan Progress Bar .................................................................186 View Chapter as Paragraph ...........................................................................................186 Changing Bible Reading Plans .......................................................................................186 Creating a Bible Reading Plan ............................................................................................187 Show at Startup...................................................................................................................187 Chapter 15: Daily Devotions.................................................................................................188 Opening the Daily Devotions ...............................................................................................189 Using the Daily Devotions ...................................................................................................189 Show Devotions at Startup ..................................................................................................190 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com Page 9
  • 10. TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 16: Prayer Requests ...............................................................................................191 Opening Prayer Requests ...................................................................................................192 Viewing Prayer Requests ....................................................................................................192 Adding Prayer Requests .....................................................................................................192 Editing or Deleting a Prayer Request ..................................................................................193 Managing Prayer Request Files ..........................................................................................195 Creating Prayer Request Files ........................................................................................195 Loading Prayer Request Files .........................................................................................195 Show Prayer Requests at Startup .......................................................................................196 Chapter 17: Scripture Memory .............................................................................................197 Opening Scripture Memory .................................................................................................198 Viewing Verses to Memorize ...............................................................................................198 Adding Scripture Memory ....................................................................................................199 Editing or Deleting a Memory Verse ....................................................................................200 Testing Memory Verses ......................................................................................................201 Associate Reference Test ...............................................................................................201 Fill In The Blanks ............................................................................................................202 Word Position .................................................................................................................202 First Letter ......................................................................................................................202 Managing Memory Verse Files ............................................................................................203 Creating Memory Verse Files .........................................................................................203 Loading Memory Verse Files ..........................................................................................203 Show Memory Verses at Startup .........................................................................................204 Chapter 18: SermonAudio.com ............................................................................................205 Opening the SermonAudio.com Window .............................................................................206 Listening to a Sermon .........................................................................................................206 Learning More About the Speaker or Sermon .................................................................207 Using the Sermon Player ................................................................................................208 Listening to Sermons On Different Verses...........................................................................209 Sorting Sermons By Heading ..............................................................................................209 Adjusting the Width of Heading Columns ............................................................................209 Chapter 19: Sermon Illustrations .........................................................................................210 Unlocking Sermon Illustrations ............................................................................................211 Opening Sermon Illustrations ..............................................................................................211 Viewing and Copying Sermon Illustrations ..........................................................................212 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 10
  • 11. TABLE OF CONTENTS Filtering Sermon Illustrations ...............................................................................................212 Adding Sermon Illustrations ................................................................................................213 Editing or Deleting a Sermon Illustration .............................................................................214 Chapter 20: The Graphics Viewer ........................................................................................215 Opening the Graphics Viewer..............................................................................................216 Viewing Graphics ................................................................................................................217 Selecting Graphics within the Graphic File ......................................................................217 Panning Graphics ...........................................................................................................217 Resizing Graphics...........................................................................................................218 Copying Graphics................................................................................................................218 Chapter 21: The STEP Reader ..............................................................................................219 Opening The STEP Reader ................................................................................................220 Viewing STEP Books ..........................................................................................................221 Pasting Into Notes ..............................................................................................................221 Searching STEP Books .......................................................................................................222 Chapter 22: Searching e-Sword Using Regular Expressions ............................................223 Regular Expressions ...........................................................................................................224 Conventions Used in this Chapter .......................................................................................224 Lesson 1: Case sensitive; Characters found anywhere .......................................................225 Lesson 2: Literal vs. Special Meaning Characters ...............................................................225 Lesson 3: Word Boundaries ................................................................................................226 Lesson 4: Dot Character .....................................................................................................227 Lesson 5: Brackets “[]” ........................................................................................................228 Lesson 6: Range of characters “-” .......................................................................................228 Lesson 7: Caret “^” ..............................................................................................................229 Lesson 8: Word Characters “w” ..........................................................................................230 Lesson 9: Non-Word Characters “W” .................................................................................231 Lesson 10: Pipe Character “|” and Parenthesis “()” ............................................................232 Lesson 11: Digit “d” ............................................................................................................233 Lesson 12: Quantifiers "*", "+", and "?"................................................................................234 Lesson 13: Curly brackets “{}” .............................................................................................236 Lesson 14: Beginning Verse Anchor “^” ..............................................................................236 Lesson 15: Ending Verse Anchor “$” ...................................................................................237 Lesson 16: Putting It All Together with Useful Examples .....................................................238 Example 1: Verses Starting/Ending with a Specific Characters .......................................238 Example 2: Finding Words Beginning/Ending with Specific Characters ..........................239 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 11
  • 12. Example 3: Finding Verses Only If They Contain Two+ Specific Words. .........................240 Example 4: Finding “Wildcard” Verses References. ........................................................241 Example 5: Finding a Verse with Words in Proximity to other Words. .............................242 Reference Information on Regular Expressions. .............................................................242 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 12
  • 13. ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE About this User’s Guide About e-Sword Rick Meyers, the creator of e-Sword, has given us a wonderful tool to study the Word of God. Learning the many features available through e-Sword Bible study software will bring new life to your study of the Living Word. This documentation is for: e-Sword 10.0.5. If you are not running the latest version of e-Sword, please visit the http://www.e-sword.net to download the latest version. e-Sword® is a registered trademark of Rick Meyers. All rights reserved. BibleSupport.com is run independently of e-Sword by a community of volunteers. Goal of this Documentation The goal of this documentation is to explain every e-Sword feature for both the casual and advanced user. This documentation is the product of hundreds of hours of work. If you have questions about a feature, we hope you can easily find the answers you are seeking by referring to the hyperlinked Table of Contents. If you’re viewing this document in a PDF browser, the Table of Contents is available in the Bookmarks window. The Table of Contents is invaluable for using this documentation. This documentation uses informal, conversational English, keeping with our goal of real-world use by Christians wanting to learn more about e-Sword. The best way to accomplish our goal is to use conversational English. Documentation Authors A concept of this manual was first written in 2003 by Barrie Gordon and Johan Struwig. Sarah Valente completely rewrote the manual in June 2011. Other than the organizational structure, the documentation Sarah produced bears little resemblance to the 2003 version. Josh Bond rewrote and reorganized the manual, split in two revisions: July 2011 and November 2011. This documentation is produced by BibleSupport.com. Copyright and Distribution This text is copyrighted only to prevent the documentation from being used for commercial profit. You may freely copy and distribute this documentation as long as you do not make any changes or use the documentation commercially, including charging, in any way, for it’s use, reading or distribution. If you have any questions on this policy, contact Josh Bond at BibleSupport.com. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 13
  • 14. What’s New in e-Sword 10? e-Sword 10 brings powerful new features to make your Bible study more productive. Rick Meyers listened to users’ feedback and delivered on some of the most asked for functionality. All properly constructed e-Sword 9 modules are compatible with e-Sword 10. Reference Library The Reference Library is now the central place to view your downloaded Topic files and a new type of file called Reference Books (.refx). In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes window displayed downloaded, third party Topic Notes. Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library instead of the Topics Editor. Search All Topics At Once The Reference Library lets you filter your resources by title and search all of your Topic Notes at once! These two features are so powerful, they alone could have been the upgrade! REFX File Format Also new with the Reference Library is the ability to convert a Topics Note file to Reference Book format (.refx). This file is compressed and prevents others from modifying your data! You can convert your Topic Note files into Reference Book format. Here’s a comparison between .refx and .topx formats: Reference Library Book (.refx) Topic Note (.topx) Cannot be edited. Can be edited. Can be viewed in either the Reference Library or the Topic Editor. (But third Can only be viewed in the Reference party Topic Notes should be viewed Library. with the Reference Library unless you need to edit them). Compatible with e-Sword 9.x-10+, but images, headers/footers, hyperlinks, Only compatible with e-Sword 10+ and bookmarks will not display properly. Support For Pictures The new Reference Library Book format supports pictures. And that’s not all. Topic Notes also support pictures! e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 14
  • 15. WHAT’S NEW IN E-SWORD 10? New Editor with True Word Processing Power e-Sword 10’s editor seems less like an editor and more like a word processor. The new editor is more robust and supports an array of new features. Now your Journal, Study, and Topic Notes will benefit from: • Hyperlinks • Bookmarks • Images/Pictures • Tables • Borders • Columns • Headers/Footers • Page Layout View SermonAudio.com Integration e-Sword is integrated with SermonAudio.com. You can listen to sermons while you study the Bible. This window automatically organizes sermons by verse according to the active passage of scripture in the e-Sword Bibles window! STEP Reader Still Included Don’t worry— the STEP Reader is still included with e-Sword 10! But the icon has been removed from the e-Sword main window. You can still access the STEP Reader by clicking Tools from the main menu and choosing STEP Reader. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 15
  • 16. Chapter 1: Getting to Know e-Sword This chapter is intended for Christians who have not used e-Sword previously. The pages that follow explain how scripture appears in e-Sword, the main e-Sword screen, the content windows, the toolbars, and other helpful hints and tips to get you started. What’s in this Chapter? e-Sword Interface Overview..............................................................................................17 The Main Toolbar and Main Menu ....................................................................................21 Maximizing Window Views ................................................................................................23 Bible Books Navigation Tree .............................................................................................23 Introduction to the Bibles Window .....................................................................................24 Introduction to the Commentaries Window .......................................................................28 Introduction to the Editors Window ...................................................................................29 Introduction to the Dictionaries Window ............................................................................30 Introduction to the Reference Library ................................................................................31 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 16
  • 17. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD e-Sword Interface Overview When you launch e-Sword, you will see a screen similar to: This is the e-Sword interface. All e-Sword features are available from this screen. Notice the important screen areas: Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editors, and Reference Library. Also notice the Bible Books window on the left side of screen. e-Sword Quick References: Tooltips You may have noticed the green, underlined Bible verses in the Commentaries window above. e-Sword automatically recognizes Bible verses and Strong’s numbers. When you see a scripture reference or a Strong’s number, hover your mouse pointer over the reference. A “tooltip” window appears, revealing the text of the scripture or the definition of the Strong’s number. TIP: Press the F4 button to copy the reference text to the Windows clipboard. You can paste (Ctrl-V) the definition into the Notes Editor or your own word processor! e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 17
  • 18. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Common Tasks Menu A universal, time saving feature available almost everywhere in e-Sword is the “Common Tasks Menu”, or “context menu”. Right-click your mouse in nearly any display window to reveal a “popup menu” of common tasks. These shortcuts are available in the Bible, Commentary, Dictionary, Editor, Reference Library, and other windows. e-Sword Hotkey Reference Sheet The hotkey shortcuts may be used throughout e-Sword unless otherwise noted. When more than one key is shown, press both keys simultaneously. Hotkey Description F2 Lookup Reference (dialog) F3 Next Search Result F4 Copy ToolTip F5 Previous Bible Chapter F7 Spell Check Editors only F8 Next Bible Chapter F9 Previous Bible Verse F11 Toggle Paste As Formatted Editors only F12 Next Bible Verse ALT-1 Bookmark 1 ALT-2 Bookmark 2 ALT-3 Bookmark 3 ALT-4 Bookmark 4 ALT-5 Bookmark 5 ALT-6 Bookmark 6 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 18
  • 19. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Hotkey Description ALT-7 Bookmark 7 ALT-8 Bookmark 8 ALT-9 Bookmark 9 ALT-0 Bookmark 0 CTRL-A Select All CTRL-B Bold Editors only CTRL-C Copy CTRL-D Font Editors only CTRL-E Center Editors only CTRL-F Find Editors only CTRL-G Goto Bookmark Editors only CTRL-H Highlight Scripture CTRL-I Italic Editors only CTRL-J Format Scripture ToolTip Editors only CTRL-L Lookup Reference CTRL-M Mark Scripture CTRL-N Next Reference CTRL-P Previous Reference CTRL-R Replace Editors only CTRL-S Bible Search CTRL-U Underline Editors only CTRL-V Paste Editors only CTRL-X Cut Editors only e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 19
  • 20. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Hotkey Description CTRL-Y Redo Editors only CTRL-Z Undo Editors only CTRL-TAB Indent Paragraph Editors only SHIFT-TAB Outdent Paragraph Editors only CTRL-F1 Show All Windows CTRL-F2 Bible Maximized CTRL-F3 Commentary Maximized CTRL-F4 Dictionary Maximized CTRL-ENTER Insert Page Break Editors only CTRL-(Backspace) Delete Previous Word Editors only SHIFT-F3 Previous Search Result SHIFT-F7 Thesaurus Editors only SHIFT-ENTER Insert Line Feed Editors only CTRL-SHIFT-C Copy Formatted Bible Text CTRL-SHIFT-S Extended Bible Search CTRL-SHIFT-V Paste Formatted Bible Text Editors only CTRL-SHIFT- Editors only Insert Non-breaking Space (Spacebar) e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 20
  • 21. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD The Main Toolbar and Main Menu The Main Menu contains menu commands and the Main Toolbar contains icons and pull down menus. This documentation refers to the Main Toolbar and Main Menu using this terminology. TIP: Hover your mouse over the any icon on any Toolbar to view the command’s hint. Main Menu Main Toolbar Main Toolbar Icon Summary Icon Icon Name Icon Function Hotkey Lookup e-Sword will navigate to the Bible location Scripture typed in this box. Press the hotkey to quickly CTRL-L Reference activate this box. Lookup e-Sword will popup a Lookup Scripture Scripture Reference window for navigating to a Scripture F2 Reference passage. Previous Click to retrieve the previous verses in your Reference verse history (resets each e-Sword session). CTRL-P Next Click to move forward in your verse history, if Reference you moved backward with the above CTRL-N command (resets each e-Sword session). Search Use to perform a Bible search. CTRL-S Search Use to return to previous search results (resets SHIFT-F3 Previous each e-Sword session).. Search This box displays the verses from the last Results search result. Scroll down to view additional results from the same search. Search Next Use to move forward in search results. Only works if you moved back at least once. (resets F3 each e-Sword session). Verse List Click to display the Verse List window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 21
  • 22. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Icon Icon Name Icon Function Hotkey Previous Click to display the Previous Verse in the Verse Verse List. Verse List This box displays the current verse in the Display Verse List. Next Verse Click to display the Next Verse in the Verse List. Show All This icon reveals the preset e-Sword layout: Windows displaying the Bibles, Commentaries, CTRL-F1 Dictionaries and Editors. Bible Click to display the Bible Translation window CTRL-F2 Maximized only. Commentary Click to display the Commentary window only. CTRL-F3 Maximized Dictionary Click to display the Dictionary window only. CTRL-F4 Maximized Editor Click to display the Editor window only. CTRL-F5 Maximized Graphics Click to open the Graphics Viewer window. Viewer Reference Click to open the Reference Library window. Library e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 22
  • 23. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Maximizing Window Views New users sometimes accidentally click one of the Maximized icons and struggle to restore the correct view. Let's learn about the different views and how to control them. Click the Bible Maximized icon on the Main Toolbar. Notice how the Bible window is maximized to display the current Bible translation only. You may also click the Commentary Maximized , Dictionary Maximized , and Editor Maximized icons. Clicking on the Show All Windows icon restores the original e-Sword layout. Click Window from the main menu to see the same layout options, along with their shortcuts. Bible Books Navigation Tree The Bible Books window (shown to the right) contains all books of the Bible in the order of the Christian Biblical canon. You may use the Navigation Tree or the verse lookup box when looking up specific references. Above the Navigation Tree you will see an empty box: This is the Lookup Scripture Reference box. Enter the text: “john 3:16” and click the Lookup Scripture Reference icon (Scripture icon). The results will display in the Bibles window. TIP: Press the Ctrl-L key combination anywhere in e-Sword to place your cursor inside the Lookup Scripture Reference box so you can begin typing. For many uses, this is faster than using the mouse. To minimize the Navigation Tree, click the push pin icon in the upper right corner. The Bible Books Navigation Tree may be e-Sword’s most simple yet most convenient feature because of its speed and ease of use. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 23
  • 24. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Introduction to the Bibles Window The Bibles window lets you view scripture and compare Bible translations. To minimize the Bibles window, click the push pin icon in the top, right corner. The Bibles window consists of three parts: • The Bible tabs - you can switch from one translation to the another. Notice how e- Sword displays the full translation name when you hover your mouse over a tab. The KJV translation tab is selected in the screenshot above. • The Main Text window - this window displays the Bible text. • The Translation Toolbar - this toolbar contains the following icons: Icon Icon Name Icon Function Hotkey Print Preview Click to display the Print Preview window. Print Verses Click to print the current Bible chapter or selected text. Bible Search Search the active Bible translation. CTRL-S Select All Select the entire Bible chapter. Copy Copy the selected text. Copy Verses Copy verse(s) to the Copy Verses window. Paste Into Pastes to the currently selected tab in the Editors window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 24
  • 25. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Icon Icon Name Icon Function Hotkey Highlight Highlight a particular reference. CTRL-H Reference Mark Underline a reference in a variety of styles. CTRL-M Zoom Makes the Bible text bigger or smaller. Split View Click to view two translations at once. Select the translations by using the translations tabs. Chapter Navigate backward one chapter. (Compare F5 Back Verse Mode: navigate backward one verse.) Chapter Navigate forward one chapter. (Compare F8 Forward Verse Mode: navigate forward one verse.) Notice the Bibles window contains two tabs that are not Bible translations, the Compare Verses tab and Parallel tab. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 25
  • 26. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD The Compare Tab The Compare tab lets you easily compare different translations of the Bible. 1. Click a verse in the Bibles window using any translation. 2. Notice the verse reference turns red. 3. Click the Compare tab. e-Sword will list the verse you selected in every Bible translation, one after the other. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 26
  • 27. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD The Parallel Tab e-Sword lets you view up to eight Bible translations in parallel. Click the Parallel tab. At first, only one translation appears: Notice the pull down menus with Bible translations below. The first menu will show a Bible translation, such as the KJV. Click the second drop down menu, and select another Bible translation. You may view up to eight translations at once. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 27
  • 28. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Introduction to the Commentaries Window The Commentaries window is shown in the top, right window by default. To minimize the Commentaries window, click the push pin icon in the top, right corner of this window. This window contains commentaries on the passage of Scripture displayed in the Bibles window. The screenshot above shows the BBC commentary for Genesis 1:1. Each commentary is represented by a single tab. Other commentaries you install appear in additional tabs. By default, the Commentaries window displays the commentary for the current Bible verse. You can verify this by clicking a different Bible verse in the Bibles window. The Commentary window will update to show any comments for the new verse. See Chapter 7 for more information on using the Commentaries window. The icons in the Commentaries window are similar to the ones in the Bibles window: The additional icons are: Icon Icon Name Icon Function Hotkey Link Click to link the window to the Scripture in the Bibles window. Book Click to view a summary of the selected book. Chapter Click to view a summary of the selected chapter. Verse Click to view a summary of the selected verse. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 28
  • 29. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Introduction to the Editors Window The Editors window is displayed on the bottom, right in e-Sword by default. The Editors window lets you view and write Journal Notes, Study Notes, and Topic Notes. TIP: In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes window displayed downloaded, third party Topic Notes. Often, Topic Notes contain books, essays, and papers written by other people. This material is now viewed through the Reference Library. Most people use Journal Notes and Study Notes for personal note taking. The Journal Notes are date specific because they contain your thoughts written on a specific day. The Study Notes are verse specific, meaning each comment is related to a verse. Topic Notes are subject specific, meaning your thoughts on various subjects. In previous versions of e-Sword, you may have considered Topic Notes as “Books”. e-Sword now handles this functionality through the Reference Library. The Editors window is a fully functioning word processor within e-Sword. You may write and save notes in the Journal Notes, Study Notes and Topic Notes sections. TIP: The Bibles, Commentaries, and Dictionaries windows have a Paste Into icon. Clicking this icon will paste your highlighted text into the active tab of the Editors window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 29
  • 30. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Introduction to the Dictionaries Window The Dictionaries window is on the bottom, left by default. To minimize the Dictionaries window, click the push pin icon in the top, right corner. This window contains a number of Bible dictionaries as well as an Encyclopedia (the International Standard Bible Encyclopedia). To view Dictionary entries, click once on any word or Strong's number in the Bible, Commentary, or Editor windows. Make sure the Link icon is pressed to synchronize the Bibles and Dictionaries windows with the Dictionaries window. If a dictionary contains an entry for a word, a blue Information (i) icon appears on the left side of the tab (see above). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 30
  • 31. CHAPTER 1: GETTING TO KNOW E-SWORD Introduction to the Reference Library The other “Introductory” sections explained major sections of the e-Sword screen. The Reference Library is represented on the main e-Sword screen with just a small icon: Reference The Reference Library is now the central place to view your Library downloaded Topic files and a new type of file called Reference Modules (.refx). Material available from the Reference Library includes books, essays, and papers written by other authors. Some may be as short as a few pages, and other resources may contain thousands of pages. For example, BibleSupport.com hosts a number of William Evans’ and F.B. Meyer’s books in Reference Book format. You can also download official Reference Modules through the e-Sword Module Downloader. TIP: In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes window displayed downloaded, third party Topic Notes. Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library instead of the Topics Editor. With the Reference Library you can: • Select resources to read with the drop down menu near the top of the screen. • Filter your resources by title (see top, right of the screen, which says “evans”) • Search all of your Topic Notes and Reference Library Books at once! e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 31
  • 32. Chapter 2: Customizing e-Sword You can customize e-Sword to suit your needs by adjusting the layout, window sizes, text and background colors, and even font sizes. You can also choose a different application language, download additional resources, delete resources, configure your resource tab settings, and more. This chapter discusses most customizations possible with e-Sword. What’s in this Chapter? Adjusting the Layout of e-Sword’s Main Screen ................................................................33 Floating Window Customization ........................................................................................42 Zoom Feature: A Gift for Old Eyes ....................................................................................43 Changing Fonts and Sizes ................................................................................................44 Changing Text and Background Colors ............................................................................45 e-Sword Multilingual Settings ............................................................................................45 Tooltip and Bookmark Options ..........................................................................................46 Search Options .................................................................................................................47 Reset e-Sword Settings ....................................................................................................47 Hiding and Uninstalling Resources ...................................................................................48 Configuring Resource Tabs ..............................................................................................50 Changing the e-Sword Resource Location ........................................................................52 Downloading Additional Resources ..................................................................................53 Installing Unofficial Resources ..........................................................................................55 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 32
  • 33. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Adjusting the Layout of e-Sword’s Main Screen You may adjust the layout of e-Sword in several ways. Feel free to make changes knowing that if you cannot undo the changes, e-Sword can. To restore e-Sword to the default settings, click Help and then choose Reset e-Sword Settings. However, all settings are reset, not just the layout settings. Maximizing / Minimizing Window Panes With Push Pins You may minimize any portion of the screen with a push pin icon. To minimize the window, click the push pin icon and the window will minimize to the left side of the screen. Click the push pin again, and the window area will maximize. SPACE SAVING TIP: On a laptop or small screen, every pixel counts. You can minimize the Bible Books window (which shows the Books and Chapters of the Bible by default). When you need to change Bible verses, press the F2 button and a Lookup Scripture Reference window appears at the location of your mouse pointer. Use this window to change Bible verses. The window closes after you select a verse. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 33
  • 34. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Maximizing Window Panes With the Window Menu You may maximize any of the four windows panes to full screen. Click Window from the main menu, and then click one of the Maximized options shown below. In our example, we chose Bible Maximized to expand the Bibles window full screen. To show all windows again, click Window from the main menu, and click Show All Windows. If you need to switch between Show All Windows and one of the Maximized options frequently, use the hotkey combinations shown in the Window menu: e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 34
  • 35. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Making Window Panes Larger or Smaller You can make the Bible, Commentary, Dictionary, and Editor windows larger or smaller relative to each other. Notice the yellow-highlighted divider lines between the windows below. You may adjust the width and length of the windows: 1. Position your mouse pointer over the divider line, 2. Left-click and hold the divider line, and 3. Drag the line up/down or left/right as appropriate. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 35
  • 36. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Window Docking Introduction By default, e-Sword shows five windows, including the four labeled below and the Bible Books window on the far left. You can re-arrange these windows in hundreds of different combinations! REMEMBER: If you’re unhappy with your new configuration, you can restore e-Sword to the default settings by clicking Help and then choosing Reset e-Sword Settings. However, all settings are reset, not just the layout settings. The first time you experiment with window docking, be prepared to spend a few minutes gaining a feel for this feature. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 36
  • 37. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Docking Windows – Getting Started You can reposition the four window panes (shown and labeled on the previous page) by dragging window’s blue "title bar". This can result in hundreds of different views. 1. Left-click the window pane you want to move (hold this click until step 4). 2. While still holding the mouse left-click, move your mouse to another window and a Docking Image appears. Hover your pointer one of the Arrow Indicators (see red boxes below ). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 37
  • 38. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD 3. Notice a blue footprint shows you where this window will dock if you release the mouse click. 4. After releasing the mouse click, notice how your window pane is repositioned, with the Commentaries and Editors windows side-by-side instead of above/below each other. There are hundreds of possibilities, so keep experimenting until you find a combination you like. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 38
  • 39. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Docking Windows: Overlapping Two or more windows can occupy the same space—or overlap each other. For example, in the screenshot below, notice the Commentaries and Editors tabs, shown in the red box. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 39
  • 40. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD To produce the “overlapping” screen above, follow these steps: 1. Left click the Commentaries window pane(1) and drag the window to the Editors window pane(2) until a blue footprint appears: 2. Release the mouse click and the windows now overlap. The Commentaries and Editors tabs appear at the bottom, as shown in the screenshot on the previous page. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 40
  • 41. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD To return the Editor and Commentaries to their original positions, as separate windows, follow these steps: 1. Left click the Editors tab(1) at the bottom of the screen and drag the toward the Arrow Indicator(2). 2. Release the mouse click and Editors and Commentaries windows will return to separate windows, as shown in the screenshot on the previous page. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 41
  • 42. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Floating Window Customization Many of e-Swords features use Floating Windows. For example, the Reference Library window “floats” on top of e-Sword’s main window. Other examples of floating windows include the Step Reader, Prayer Requests, Bible Reading, Search/Extended Search, and many other windows. Floating Windows share properties you should be aware of: • You can access the underlying e-Sword main window without closing a floating window. For example, if you need to reference the Bible, lookup a dictionary definition, view commentary text, or create a Study Note, click the e-Sword main window in the background. • You can also move the e-Sword main window and floating windows so they are offset or in any configuration that suits your monitor (see below). • You can resize a floating window (larger or smaller) by positioning your mouse over the edge of the window until the mouse pointer turns into a double arrow (as shown to the right). Drag the window in the direction you want to resize. • Some floating windows have Minimize and Maximize buttons (left of the red X). Maximize will expand over the whole screen. The Minimize button will cause the window to disappear. To display a minimized window, click the e-Sword icon on your Windows taskbar. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 42
  • 43. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Zoom Feature: A Gift for Old Eyes e-Sword includes a very flexible Zoom Feature. Nearly every window containing study text supports zooming, including Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editors, Reference Library, and many other windows. The Zoom Icon Anytime you see the Zoom icon, you can enlarge the text in that window by clicking the icon. Click the icon again to restore your original view. As you can see from the comparison below, the text isn’t just zoomed. The text is reflowed so you do not have to use a horizontal scroll bar to view the text. The same holds true for images and tabular charts. Zooming with the Mouse Wheel The advantage of this zoom method is you can quickly zoom to a custom magnification. 1. Click anywhere in the window you want to zoom. 2. Press the Ctrl button while scrolling the mouse wheel forward to zoom in or backward to zoom out. 3. To restore the default zoom, click the Zoom icon twice. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 43
  • 44. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Changing Fonts and Sizes e-Sword allows you to change the default fonts to a style pleasing to your eye. Click Options from the main menu, and then click Fonts. Default Font and Size: Specifies the font used throughout e-Sword, including text for Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Devotions, etc. Tooltip Font Size: Specifies the font used to “popup” the text from verse references (called tooltips). Editor Font: Specifies the default font used in the Editor’s Window (Journal Notes, Study Notes, and Topic Notes). Greek, Hebrew, and Latin Font: Specifies the fonts e-Sword uses to display these commonly found languages in Bibles, Commentaries, and Dictionaries. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 44
  • 45. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Changing Text and Background Colors e-Sword allows you to change the default text colors to a configuration pleasing to your eye. Click Options from the main menu, and then choose Text Colors. You can select a Background color, along with the text colors shown in the screenshot to the right. The preview pane at the bottom of the screenshot shows your new color selections. Popup: This color choice refers to the ToolTip popup background window where scripture text and Strong’s definitions appear. This category does not appear in the preview pane. If you’re unhappy with the colors you selected, click the Cancel button. Otherwise, click the OK button to save your changes. e-Sword Multilingual Settings Changing the e-Sword Application Language If you prefer e-Sword communicates with you in a language other than English, you may select another language. Click Options from the main menu, and then select Language. Choose your preferred language. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 45
  • 46. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Tooltip and Bookmark Options e-Sword lets you toggle the display of several miscellaneous items. Click Options from the main menu to see the toggle items shown to the right. Display Scripture Tooltips: Toggles the appearance of Scripture ToolTips. Scripture ToolTips are colored verse references that “popup” the complete verse text from the verse reference. John 3:16 is an example shown to the right. Display Strong’s # ToolTips: Toggles the appearance of Strong’s Number ToolTips. Strong’s Tooltips are colored Strong’s references that “popup” the complete Strong’s text from the Hebrew or Greek Strong’s reference. See the “H6838” example. Display Bookmark Navigator: Toggles the appearance of the Bible window bookmarks, shown in the red box below. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 46
  • 47. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Search Options e-Sword lets you toggle two search options. The search options apply to searching throughout e-Sword, including Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, and everywhere . Click Options from the main menu to see the toggle items shown to the right Highlight Search Results: When you perform a search, e-Sword will highlight each word(s) that match your search term(s), if you select this option. Save Search Terms: e-Sword will “remember” your search terms if you select this option. If enabled, you can review your search terms and re-select a search term to search again. Reset e-Sword Settings You can restore e-Sword to the default settings by clicking Help and then choosing Reset e-Sword Settings. This includes all settings presented in this chapter up to this point. Reset e-Sword Settings will not delete any modules you added to e-Sword. But the reset will show all resources. If you hid resources in the Resource Options window (see next page), your selections will be discarded and all resources will be visible. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 47
  • 48. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Hiding and Uninstalling Resources As you download e-Sword resources, your screen may become cluttered and overwhelming. You may want to hide resources you don’t use often, or delete resources permanently. Hiding Resources You can hide resources without uninstalling them from your computer. 1. Click Options on the main menu, and select Resources. The Resource Options window appears, as shown above. 2. All of the installed Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Devotions, Graphics, and Reference Books will be listed. Remove the checkbox next to resources you want to hide. 3. When you are pleased with your selections, click OK. You may reactivate any installed resource by adding a checkbox beside the resource. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 48
  • 49. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Permanently Delete Resources You may also permanently delete most resources. 1. Click Options on the main menu, and select Resources. The Resource Options window appears, as shown above. 2. All of the installed Bibles, commentaries and dictionaries are listed 3. Right click any resource and a context menu appears. Select “Delete Resource Permanently” and the resource will be deleted. You cannot “undo” this operation without re-downloading the resource, so be absolutely sure first! NOTE: e-Sword will automatically reinstall the modules below even if you delete them. The modules below are essential to running e-Sword. While you can delete the modules for the current session, when you restart e-Sword, the modules will be reinstalled. However, you can hide these modules, as shown on the previous page. King James Bible kjv.bblx King James with Strong’s Numbers kjv+.bblx Treasury of Scripture Knowledge tsk.cmtx Strong’s Dictionary strong.dctx Robertson’s Harmony of the Gospels robertson.harx Deleting Editor Notes Deleting a Journal Notes file, Study Notes file, or Topic Notes file must be done outside of e- Sword. By default, e-Sword stores these files in your e-Sword user folder, usually “My Documentse-sword”. WARNING: You should only delete files from your Windows computer if you have competent computer skills. If you’re not comfortable browsing folders and deleting files, you should not attempt this. Otherwise, you risk deleting the wrong file. e-Sword, or other programs on your computer, may not work properly. 1. Make sure the Editor is not displaying the file you want to delete. If you delete a file, and exit e-Sword while the Editor is displaying the file you deleted, e-Sword will recreate a blank version of that file when you restart e-Sword. 2. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to your “My Documents” folder. Then open the “e- Sword” folder. Select the file you want to delete by clicking it once. 3. Press the Delete button and a Confirm File Delete window appears. 4. Click Yes if you want to proceed with deleting the selected file. Otherwise, click No. WARNING: If you delete a file, and exit e-Sword while the Editor is displaying the file you deleted, e-Sword will recreate a blank version of that file when you restart e-Sword. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 49
  • 50. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Configuring Resource Tabs e-Sword present Bibles, commentaries, and dictionaries as resource tabs. You can control how e-Sword presents resource tabs. Display Tabs on a Single Row or Multiple Rows In the screenshot below, the resource tabs span multiple rows. This is the default e-Sword configuration: This second screenshot shows the resource tabs on one row, with Scroll Left/Scroll Right arrows to show resources that do not fit on the screen: To display resource tabs on a single row: 1. Click Options from the main menu. 2. Choose Resources. 3. At the bottom of the Resources window, tick the Display Tabs in a Single Row box. Resource Tab Sorting - Advanced e-Sword sorts resources in reverse alphabetical order, left to right, starting with the bottom row. Confusion sometimes arises because e-Sword does not sort based on the resource tab name. e-Sword sorts based on the actual filename of the resource. If you’re an advanced user, you can change the e-Sword’s sort order by renaming the files. For example, in most configurations, renaming a resource with a letter from the end of the alphabet is likely to show the resource on the top row. The e-Sword developer does not provide support for renaming resources to achieve a specific sort order. Find support for this at BibleSupport.com. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 50
  • 51. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Renaming Resource Tabs This is a technical topic for advanced users. The e-Sword developer does not provide support for renaming resource tabs. Instead, find support for this at BibleSupport.com. You will not need to change the resource names for official e-Sword downloads. However, you may find an unofficial resource that needs a different tab name. For example, a resource may have a long tab name and you want to shorten the tab name. Occasionally, you may find two unofficial downloads with the same tab name and you need to rename the tab. Advanced users can download a free, third party database tool to edit unofficial resources. BibleSupport.com hosts a tutorial explaining how to accomplish this and we also provide support. Resource Tab Conflicts This is a technical topic for advanced users. This section does not apply to official e-Sword downloads. The e-Sword developer does not provide support for resource tab conflicts. Instead, find support for this at BibleSupport.com. Resource tab conflicts arise when two resources have the same tab name. e-Sword resolves this by showing only the first resource in the resource tabs. To display both resources, the tabs must be renamed. Another way to resolve the conflict is to delete one of the resource files from your hard drive. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 51
  • 52. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Changing the e-Sword Resource Location By default, e-Sword loads Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Devotions, Graphics, and Reference Books from your “Program Filese-Sword” folder. On most Windows configurations this folder is either: • c:program filese-sword • c:program files (x86)e-sword If you want to store your e-Sword modules in a different folder or on a USB drive, you may change the path and folder in the e-Sword resource Location field (see below). For example, some churches configure e-Sword to read from a network drive so everyone has access to the same material. To change the e-Sword resource Location field: 1. Click Options on the main menu, and select Resources. The Resource Options window appears, as shown below. 2. Click the orange folder icon (inside the red box, as shown below). 3. Navigate to your new folder in the Browse for Folder window and click the OK button to save and exit the Browse window. 4. Click the OK button to save and exit the Resource Options window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 52
  • 53. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Downloading Additional Resources You will find two types of e-Sword resources: official and unofficial. Unofficial Resources Unofficial resources may be found on many websites like www.biblesupport.com and www.doctordavet.com. If you download unofficial resources, please see the next subsection, “Installing Unofficial Resources”. Official Resources You may add official e-Sword resources by using the e-Sword Module Downloader. 1. Click Download on the main menu and select the type of resource you want to add from the drop down menu. 2. The downloader is setup to browse by resource type. Click the resource category tab that interests you. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 53
  • 54. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD 3. Click the blue hyperlink of the module you want to add. 4. The selected module appears in the bottom window. You may add additional modules. 5. When you are ready to start downloading, select Download from the Downloader menu and click Start. TIP: Before you can view the newly installed resource(s), you must re-start e-Sword. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 54
  • 55. CHAPTER 2: CUSTOMIZING E-SWORD Installing Unofficial Resources BibleSupport.com hosts thousands of e-Sword resources like the Pulpit Commentary. The list grows nearly every day as members create additional resources. Downloading unofficial resources requires you manually install the resources. Unofficial resources do not use the official Module Downloader. By default, e-Sword reads most resources from the “program filese-sword folder”, as discussed in the Changing Your e-Sword Resource Location section. Follow the steps below when downloading unofficial e-Sword resources. The instructions assume the default resource installation folder. Self Installing Resources If the resource you download is an executable file (.exe), then run the executable to install the resource automatically. Compressed Zip File If you download a resource that is compressed in a zip file (.zip), double click (or run) the zip file to open it. Then copy the e-Sword resource to your e-Sword folder (see “Raw e-Sword Resources” below). Raw e-Sword Resources Copy the following resource types to your “c:program filese-sword” folder Bible (.bblx) Commentary (.cmtx) Dictionary (.dctx) Topics File (.topx) Reference Library (.refx) Harmonies (.harx) Devotionals (.devx) *64-bit versions of Windows use a slightly different e-Sword program files folder: “c:program files (x86)e-sword”. Copy the following resource types to your “my documentse-sword” folder. Bible Reading Plan (.brpx) Memory Verse List (.memx) Verse List (.lstx) Support for Unofficial e-Sword Resources The e-Sword developer (Rick Meyers) does not support unofficial e-Sword resources. For assistance viewing, installing, or using third party resources, please post on the message boards at BibleSupport.com e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 55
  • 56. Chapter 3: The Bibles Window in Detail The Bibles window is the heart of e-Sword, as you might expect from Bible study software. You can lookup, compare, and analyze translations in a fraction of the time required by traditional Bible study methods. What’s in this Chapter? Navigating the Bible in the Bibles Window ........................................................................57 Searching the Bible - Basic ...............................................................................................60 Quick Searching – Context Menu .....................................................................................62 Additional Search Options Wheel .....................................................................................63 Searching Only the OT, NT, and Apocrypha .....................................................................64 Extended Bible Search - Multiple Translations ..................................................................65 Searching the Bible - Advanced ........................................................................................66 Copying and Printing Bible Searches ................................................................................67 Copying/Printing Entire Bible Passages ............................................................................69 Copying and Printing from Parallel Mode ..........................................................................70 Working with Strong's Hebrew and Greek Numbers .........................................................71 Searching by Strong's Numbers .......................................................................................73 The Compare Tab.............................................................................................................75 The Parallel Tab ...............................................................................................................76 Split Bible View .................................................................................................................77 Analyzing Verses – Passage Theme and Word Distribution .............................................78 Using the Gospel Harmony ...............................................................................................80 Displaying Information about a Bible Translation ..............................................................81 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 56
  • 57. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Navigating the Bible in the Bibles Window The Bibles window displays the text of your Bible translations. You can change the passage of Scripture displayed using several methods. • You may use the scroll bar to show different verses. • You may navigate from chapter to chapter buy using the Previous Chapter (F5) and Next Chapter (F8) icons (highlighted in red below). • When you click a ToolTipped verse elsewhere in e-Sword, the Bible window’s active passage changes to match the verse you clicked. • The active passage is always highlighted in red. In the example below, Genesis 1:5 is the active passage. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 57
  • 58. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Using the Bible Books Window The Bible Books window (shown to the right) contains all books of the Bible in the order of the Christian Biblical canon. You may use the Bible Books window or the Lookup Scripture Reference box when looking up verse references. The Lookup Scripture box is on the main e-Sword toolbar and by default, above the Bible Books window. In the screenshot below, “john 3:16” has been entered. After entering the verse, press the Enter key for the Bibles window to display the passage. To minimize the Bible Books window, click the push pin icon in the top, right corner. TIP: Pressing the Ctrl-L hotkey combination anywhere in e- Sword will place your cursor inside the Lookup Scripture Reference box. This may be faster than using your mouse. Using the Lookup Scripture Reference Popup Click the Lookup Scripture Reference icon or press the F2 button to display this window. This window is undocked. The window “floats” so you can move the window as necessary. Right-click a Bible book name to quickly open the first verse/chapter. e-Sword will instantly change the Bibles window to the first verse of the book you selected. Right-click a chapter number to immediately view that chapter. Left-click or right-click a verse to show that verse. TIP: If you need more screen space, hide the Bible Books window (see image above) by clicking the push pin icon (top image, far right). Then you can use the Lookup Scripture Reference popup to navigate the Bible by pressing the F2 button. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 58
  • 59. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Viewing Your Previous Bible Search Results You can access the results of your last Bible search (or extended Bible search). Hover your mouse over the drop down menu between the Search Previous and Search Next icons. This lets you see the search word(s) of the last search (so you will know what the verses in the drop down menu have in common). The drop down menu contains the verse results of your last search. Click any verse in the list to lookup and display the verse text in the Bible window. You may also cycle through each verse in the list by clicking the Search Previous or Search Next icons. TIP: Save time by using the hotkeys instead of the icons! Search Previous is Shift-F3 and Search Next is F3. Press the Shift key and the letter at the same time. Viewing Your Verse History If you find yourself rabbit-trailing through the Scriptures you can easily find your way back to the verse you started with. You an access every verse you viewed since e-Sword started by clicking the Next Reference and Previous Reference icons. To review the complete list of verses, click the black, down arrows to show the verse list window (see screenshot on the right). To lookup and display the text of each verse, one-by-one, click the blue left/right arrows. TIP: If you have not clicked the Previous Reference icon, the Next Reference icon will be grayed-out. TIP: Save time by using hotkeys instead of the icons! Previous Reference is Ctrl-P and Next Reference is Ctrl-N. Press the Shift key and the letter at the same time. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 59
  • 60. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Searching the Bible - Basic 1. To search the KJV Bible, click the Search icon in the Bibles window. Or, select Bible from the main menu and then select Search. 2. A search window appears, as shown below. If you clicked the KJV tab, you will see "Bible Search - KJV" at the top of the search window. Your search is limited to this translation. To search a different translation, select the translation from the drop down menu. The KJV translation is selected below. 3. Type your search word(s) in the first field. Not sure how to spell your search terms? Give it your best guess and then click the spell check icon. 4. In the following example, we typed, "help God righteousness" in the search field. 5. To find a verse with all of these words, we selected Search for all of the words from the drop down menu. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 60
  • 61. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL 6. Click the Search icon in the top, right corner of this window. As you can see, there is only one verse in the KJV Bible containing all three of these words. 7. Click any of the verses that match your search (one in this example, Isa. 41:10) to change your Bibles window to that verse. If we selected, Search for any of the words, e-Sword would have matched results for 4,211 different verses! If we selected, Search for the exact phrase, e-Sword would have returned 0 verses. TIP: The Apocrypha (Orthodox Anagignoskomena and Catholic Deuterocanon) are supported. When you search the Bible as a whole (as with the example above), Apocrypha results are shown if your active Bible includes those books. The Apocrypha search results appear after the results for Revelation because of the Apocrypha’s location in the e-Sword database. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 61
  • 62. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Quick Searching – Context Menu You may right-click the mouse button from any passage in the Bibles window to perform a quick search. 1. Navigate to Matthew 13:41. 2. Right-click your mouse on the word “angels”. Note the submenu: 3. The first entry in the context menu is: “Quick Search on: angels”. Move your mouse pointer over this option. The menu will expand and prompt you to search the Entire Bible or to limit your search to the Old Testament, New Testament or Matthew only. 4. Click New Testament and the current translation's search window will open with all New Testament matches for the word “angels”. 5. Click Accept to return to the Bibles window. e-Sword will display the first reference to angels in the New Testament (Matthew 4:6). 6. To view the next verse containing the word “angels”, right click any text in the Bibles window and select Search Next. This will display the next verse in the New Testament containing the word “angels” (Matthew 4:11). 7. If you want to again display the previous verse where the word angels occurred, right click any text in the Bibles window, and select Search Previous. This will display the previous verse containing the word angels. TIP: Save time by using hotkeys instead of the icons! Search Previous is Shift- F3 and Search Next is F3. Press the Shift key and the letter at the same time. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 62
  • 63. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Additional Search Options Wheel For an even more specific search, click the search wheel, (highlighted in red below). You may use this more specific search with or without Regular Expressions, discussed in Chapter 22. Note the powerful search features above. You can limit your search to certain books of the Bible or make your search case sensitive to find “god” with a lower-case “g”. In the following screen, we have performed a Partial Search for the word "child". If we exclude the word "children," e-Sword will display results for "child," "childless," and "child's". e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 63
  • 64. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Searching Only the OT, NT, and Apocrypha You can search only the Old Testament, New Testament, or Apocrypha. When selecting either of these categories, the Search Range automatically changes to include the beginning and ending book. These options are more for convenience than necessity. You can perform the same searches by adjusting the Search Range manually. Apocrypha The Apocrypha (Orthodox Anagignoskomena and Catholic Deuterocanon) are now supported. Some Bible modules, such as the Revised Standard Version and New Revised Standard Version include an additional section with these books. Click Bible from the main menu and choose Search to show the Bible search screen. Notice the Bible drop down menu. This menu lets you select which portions of the Bible to search, including the Old Testament, New Testament, and Apocrypha. TIP: The Apocrypha search results appear after the results for Revelation because of the Apocrypha’s location in the e-Sword database. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 64
  • 65. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Extended Bible Search - Multiple Translations To search for words or phrases across multiple Bible translations, click Bible on the main menu, and choose Extended Search. TIP: The more Bibles you search at once, the more time e-Sword will need to complete the search. Searching large numbers of Bibles may require a long time. The progress bar shows the current status of the search. You may press the Escape key to abort a search, while showing the results already found. This window is almost identical to the basic Bible Search function, but you can select multiple translations. Click the Bibles icon to select which Bibles to search. REMEMBER: If you do not have any Bible translations selected with the Bibles icon, e-Sword will not display any results! Search Results Each keyword match is highlighted in yellow. Also notice that the search results are grouped alphabetically by the Bible abbreviation. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 65
  • 66. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Searching the Bible - Advanced Regular Expressions, also referred to as REGEX or REGEXP, use special codes to match patterns of text in powerful ways. In e-Sword, regular expressions allow you to search the Bible beyond the search methods you previously used. This section is a very brief introduction to searching with Regular Expressions using e-Sword. Chapter 22 covers this functionality in much greater detail. If we select Regular expression from the drop down menu, we can perform a much broader "wild card" search. For example, in the window below, we searched for words starting in “l” and ending in “e” by typing b (the symbol for word boundary) followed by “l...e” and closed with the word boundary symbol b. For more information on searching with Regular Expressions and it’s exceptional power, see Chapter 22. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 66
  • 67. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Copying and Printing Bible Searches If you don't have an active search, click Bible from the main menu and choose Search. Enter your search text and click the Search icon to search the active translation. After performing your search, click the Copy/Paste Into icon. You can choose from the options below to format the search results: Abbreviate Book Names - When selecting this option, the book names of the Bible are abbreviated. For example, Genesis is copied as “Gen.” Include Translation Name - When selecting this option, the displayed text includes the name of the Bible translation. Include Character Formatting - This option is selected by default. Notice how the Bible references appear in green. If you deselect the Include Character Formatting option, the character formatting such as bold, italics, etc. is not included. Reference Delimiters - This option specifies how the references should be enclosed. The default is by using parenthesis. You may enclose the reference with quotation marks, or any other symbol by entering the character into the Reference Delimiters Starting and Ending fields. Format - e-Sword gives you the option of copying references in a variety of formats. For example, you may place the Bible reference at the beginning or ending of a verse. Click the numbers to the left of the Copy Verses window to see the different possibilities. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 67
  • 68. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Include Commentary Notes - If you have one or more commentaries installed, you can also include one of the commentary notes in the copy process. Select the commentary of your choice by clicking on the drop down box next to the Include Commentary Notes option. Once you’ve selected the formatting options, click Copy (to copy to your clipboard for pasting to any other word processor) or Paste Into (to paste directly to the Editors window in the location where you last placed your cursor). Printing To print your search result, click the Print icon. You will be able to format your results before printing just as you did before copying. Quick Copying When you right-click the mouse button on any text in the Bibles window, a submenu appears. Copy, Copy Verses, and Paste into Study Notes are available as quick copy options. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 68
  • 69. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Copying/Printing Entire Bible Passages In addition to copying, pasting, and printing e- Sword search results, e-Sword lets you copy, paste, and print entire Bible passages. 1. Click Bible on the main menu and then select Copy Verses. TIP: You may also click the Copy Verses icon from the Bibles window toolbar. 2. Then select Copy Verses to copy/paste (or select Print Verses to print). TIP: You may also use your mouse to select the verses you want to print before loading this window. Your selected verses will automatically appear in the window below. You have a variety of formatting options for your Bible passage: Abbreviate Book Names - When selecting this option, the book names of the Bible are abbreviated. For example, Genesis is copied as “Gen.” Include Translation Name - When selecting this option, the displayed text includes the name of the Bible translation. Include Character Formatting - This option is selected by default. Notice how the Bible references appear in green. If you deselect the Include Character Formatting option, the character formatting such as bold, italics, etc. is not included. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 69
  • 70. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Reference Delimiters - This option specifies how the references should be enclosed. The default is by using parenthesis. You may enclose the reference with quotation marks, or any other symbol by entering the character into the Reference Delimiters Starting and Ending fields. Format - e-Sword gives you the option of copying references in a variety of formats. For example, you may place the Bible reference at the beginning or ending of a verse. Click the numbers to the left of the Copy Verses window to see the different possibilities. Include Commentary Notes - If you have one or more commentaries installed, you can also include one of the commentary notes in the copy process. Select the commentary of your choice by clicking on the drop down box next to the Include Commentary Notes option. Copying and Printing from Parallel Mode If you want to print the parallel Bible chapter as shown in the Bibles window (after clicking the Parallel icon), select the Print Preview icon. The Print Preview window opens, and you can print the chapter. If you want to copy and paste the parallel Bible chapter, click the Select All icon in the Bibles window. This selects the entire chapter in all chosen Bible translations. Click the Copy icon to copy the chapter. The formatted text will be copied to your windows clipboard. You can paste the text into the word processor of your choice. If you decide to use the Editors window, instead of another word processor, the task is even easier. After you click the Select All icon, click the Paste Into icon. The entire parallel Bible chapter will be pasted into the Editors window at the location where you last placed the cursor. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 70
  • 71. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Working with Strong's Hebrew and Greek Numbers The study of Hebrew and Greek text, without first learning Hebrew or Greek, is one of e- Sword's most powerful features. This is accomplished through the Strong's number system. James Strong assigned every unique Hebrew and Greek word in the Bible a number. Thanks to Strong’s numbers, we are able to easily search the Scriptures to locate Hebrew and Greek words. Strong’s Number Basics The Old Testament was written in Hebrew, and the New Testament was written in Greek. The Strong’s numbering system formats the Old Testament in Hebrew with an “H” in front of the number and the New Testament Greek with a “G” in front of the number. For example, the reference, “H430,” refers to Old Testament. “G430” represents a word in the New Testament and has no correlation to the Hebrew “H430” word. e-Sword Modules with Strong’s Numbers e-Sword Bible modules include a “+” sign when the Bible includes Strong’s numbers, such as KJV+, which refers to the King James Version with Strong's numbers. Let's view a practical example. When reading the passage starting in John 21:15 (in the KJV+ version), notice the different Greek words that translate to a variation of our word "love". G25 correlates to “love” as does “G5368”. Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions Without Leaving the Bible Window Strong’s numbers can be viewed without leaving the Bible window. Strong's definitions can be displayed as "ToolTips". Place the mouse pointer over a Strong's number and the definition will display in a ToolTip popup, as shown above. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 71
  • 72. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window To view the Strong's definition in the Dictionary window, click a word in the Bibles window and look for the blue (i) information icons to appear in the Dictionaries window (be sure the link icon is selected). e-Sword notifies you that other dictionaries also have a match for this term by displaying an information (i) icon next to the resource. Click that dictionary’s resource tab to view the entry. Normally, we would compare similar words in the verse by repeating the process. In this case, Strong’s identifies the word “G5368” above so we can click the link (see above) to view that definition: e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 72
  • 73. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Searching by Strong's Numbers This feature lets you see the many ways a Hebrew or Greek word was translated into English throughout the Bible. This is very helpful when conducting word studies. Click Bible from the main menu and click Search. Choose the KJV+ version. If you click a Strong's number (while using KJV+), and then click the Search icon, you can search any portion of the Bible for uses of that Hebrew or Greek word. In our example below, we searched for “G25”: TIP: Strong’s numbers can be viewed without leaving the Bible window. Strong's definitions can be displayed as "ToolTips". Place the mouse pointer over a Strong's number and the definition will display in a ToolTip popup, as shown above. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 73
  • 74. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL From the Bible window view, you may quickly search for a Strong’s number by right clicking the Strong’s number and selecting which portion of the Bible to search. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 74
  • 75. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL The Compare Tab The Compare tab lets you easily compare different translations of the Bible. 1. First, click a verse in the active translation. 2. Notice the verse reference turns red. 3. Click the Compare tab. e-Sword will alphabetically list the verse you selected in every installed translation, one after the other. To change which translations e-Sword compares, click Options from the main Menu. Then click Compare and select or unselect Bibles to compare. TIP: When using the Compare view, the Chapter Back icon navigates backward one verse (not chapter). And the Chapter Forward icon navigates forward one verse (not chapter). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 75
  • 76. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL The Parallel Tab e-Sword lets you view up to eight Bible translations simultaneously. 1. Click the Parallel tab. At first, only one translation appears: 2. Notice the pull down menus with Bible translations (screenshot below). The first box shows a Bible translation, such as the KJV. Click the second drop down box, and select another Bible translation. You may view up to eight translations together. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 76
  • 77. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Split Bible View The Split icon is on the Bible window toolbar. The Split feature lets you display two different passages of scripture independently of each other. The Bibles window splits in two sections, both showing a different passage. You can navigate to a different passage in one section of the screen, while the other section remains anchored. This is very useful when you want to display a passage in one half of the screen for reference while you study a different passage in the other half. Another example is sometimes the New Testament will reference the Old Testament. If you want to study the passages together you can use the Split Bible feature. To split the Bibles window into two sections, click the Split icon . The currently active passage becomes "anchored" in the bottom pane of the view. You may then navigate to any other place in the Bible and the top pane will change accordingly. When finished, click the Split icon to a “raised” position to return the Bible view to a unified view. In the example below, we selected the King James Version and we split the Bibles window at John 3. We then selected the LITV Bible and Matthew 3. Notice how both sections can be scrolled independently. Even if we navigate to another part of the Bible, the bottom pane will remain anchored. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 77
  • 78. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Analyzing Verses – Passage Theme and Word Distribution Have you wanted to know the theme or emphasis of a passage at a high level? Or have you wondered how many times specific words are used in a verse, chapter, or book of the Bible? The Analyze Verses feature lets you answer these questions. 1. In our example below, we searched the verse range Genesis 1:1 – Genesis 50:26 (first chapter of Genesis). TIP: e-Sword will automatically use your current verse shown in the Bibles window. If you highlight multiple verses in the Bibles window, e-Sword uses the range of verses you selected without you having to enter the range manually! 2. To find out how many times "Word" is used in the first chapter of John, select Bibles from the main menu and choose Analyze Verses. 3. Select the book, chapter and verses to analyze and click the Analyze button. e-Sword will analyze the passage in the active translation. To select a different Bible translation, click a different Bible tab in the Bibles window. 4. From the partial list of results, we see a heavy concentration of “Jacob”, “Joseph”, and “son”. By excluding additional words and shortening our passage, we can refine our results. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 78
  • 79. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL 5. To exclude words from your search, click the Add Word to List icon at the bottom of the Common Words location box. Be sure the Exclude Common Words checkbox is ticked before running your search. 6. You may also move words to the Common Words panel by selecting words from the list and then clicking the blue directional arrow . To remove a common word from the Common Words list, press the Delete Selected Word from List icon. TIP: Words such as "the", "of" "and", "in" and "to" are numerous in the English language and you may want to exclude them from the list. "But" is also common, although “but” has important theological implications in the Epistles. Use caution when excluding “but”. Personal pronouns such as "I", "you", "we" and "us" are also common, but they may be quite important to any passage in the Epistles because they show emphasis. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 79
  • 80. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Using the Gospel Harmony Traditionally, a Gospel harmony is an attempt to merge or harmonize the four canonical gospels (Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John) into a single gospel account. e-Sword accomplishes this task by showing you the gospels together, as shown below. Click Bible from the menu and then click Harmony to display the Harmony window. From this window, you can choose which Harmony to display from the Harmony tabs. You can quickly see the content of a Harmony module by clicking the Harmony drop down menu (see below). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 80
  • 81. CHAPTER 3: THE BIBLES WINDOW IN DETAIL Displaying Information about a Bible Translation To view information on an installed Bible translation, select the Bible translation tab in the Bibles window. Then select Bible from the main menu and then click Information. The Bible Information window appears. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 81
  • 82. Chapter 4: Highlighting, Marking, and Bookmarking Resources e-Sword lets you mark, highlight and bookmark text in the Bibles window. You can also highlight text for most resource types including Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editor Notes (Journal, Study, Topical), and Reference Books. Highlighting and marking features can be with Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editor Notes (Journal, Study, Topic), and Reference Books. What’s in this Chapter? Highlighting Text ...............................................................................................................83 Marking Text .....................................................................................................................85 Working with Bookmarks ..................................................................................................86 Bible Markup File ..............................................................................................................88 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 82
  • 83. CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES Highlighting Text When we like a verse in our paper Bibles, we often highlight important text for later reference. Although the examples below use the Bible, you can highlight text for most resource types including Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editor Notes (Journal, Study, Topical), and Reference Books. You may highlight text any where you see the Highlight Reference icon. To highlight text: 1. Click to the left of the first word you want to highlight. 2. While holding the left mouse button down, drag the mouse to the last word you want to select. 3. Release the left mouse button. The text should be selected (the background will be blue and the text white). TIP: To quickly highlight text, right click your mouse and choose Highlight from the context menu or press the Ctrl-H key combination. 4. After selecting a word, phrase, or reference, the Highlight Reference icon is activated. Click the Highlight Reference “down-arrow” icon, and then choose the highlighter color. Once chosen, the new color appears under the “abs” part of the icon for quicker use (see screenshot on the next page). To remove a highlight, repeat the process above and apply the white highlighter. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 83
  • 84. CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES TIP: Highlighting text in one Bible translation does not highlight the text in any other Bible translation! WARNING: If the tab name of a Bible changes, your highlights for that resource will disappear. You can recover your highlights by editing the “markup.ovlx” file, which is a SQLite database. For help with this process, please post on the message boards at BibleSupport.com. REMEMBER: The above example uses a Bible. You may use this same process for Highlighting text in Commentaries, Dictionaries, Editor Notes (Journal, Study, Topical), and Reference Books. You can highlight text any where you see the Highlight Reference icon. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 84
  • 85. CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES Marking Text Marking text is similar to highlighting text, except Marking underlines the text instead of highlighting. You can mark text in Bibles, Commentaries, and Dictionaries by clicking the Mark Reference icon. e-Sword lets you use the highlight and mark functions both separately and together: 1. Select the text and click the Mark Reference icon to underline a reference in a variety of underline styles. 2. To remove the underlining, repeat the process and select the unmarked option instead. TIP: You can also select text, right click your mouse, and choose Mark from the context menu. TIP: The above example uses a Bible. You may use this same process for Marking text in a Commentary or Dictionary. Marking does not work in the Editors Window (Topic Notes, Journal Notes, and Study Notes) or the Reference Library. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 85
  • 86. CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES Working with Bookmarks e-Sword lets you bookmark verses just as you would in your paper Bible. e-Sword supports ten bookmarks, and you can easily change them. The Bookmarks are the numbered ribbons in the screenshot below. If you do not see the Bookmarks bar in e-Sword, activate the feature by clicking Options on the main menu and placing a checkmark next to Display Bookmark Navigator. Setting Bookmarks 1. Place your cursor on the top bookmark ribbon (the numbered ribbons on the right side of the Bibles window). 2. If you haven't saved a bookmark, the screen tip will display the default John 3:16 reference. First, select a verse in the Bibles window by clicking on the verse reference. The reference will turn red (see Proverbs 10:12 below). 3. Right click a bookmark to override the current bookmark with your selected verse. The next time you place your pointer over the selected bookmark, it will display your saved verse reference instead of the default John 3:16 reference. Accessing Bookmarks To access our example verse, Proverbs 10:2, left click the bookmark where you saved the reference. You may also quickly access your bookmarks using the hotkey shortcuts shown on the next page. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 86
  • 87. CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES Bookmark Hotkeys/Shortcuts Bookmark Hotkeys are time-saving shortcuts to quickly access your bookmarks. Hotkeys require you to press both keys at the same time. Hotkey Bookmark Alt-1 Bookmark 1 Alt-2 Bookmark 2 Alt-3 Bookmark 3 Alt-4 Bookmark 4 Alt-5 Bookmark 5 Alt-6 Bookmark 6 Alt-7 Bookmark 7 Alt-8 Bookmark 8 Alt-9 Bookmark 9 Alt-0 Bookmark 0 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 87
  • 88. CHAPTER 4: HIGHLIGHTING, MARKING, AND BOOKMARKING RESOURCES Bible Markup File When you highlight or mark text in Bibles, Commentaries, Dictionaries, or the Reference Library, e-Sword stores these “marks” to the current markup file. You can create multiple markup files in e-Sword to track your marks separately. IMPORTANT: e-Sword tracks highlights to Journal, Study, and Topic Notes inside the module itself. Creating a new markup file, or deleting your existing markup file, does not erase marks to these files. By default, markup.ovlx stores your markup information for the four resource types listed above. The default location for this file is your e-Sword user folder, usually “My Documentse- sword”. To create a new, blank markup (clean from highlights and underlining) without disturbing your existing markups: 1. Select Bible from the main menu and then select Markup File. 2. Click New. 3. Specify a filename and click Save. You may check the folder location to see where the markup file is stored. To open a markup file: 1. Select Bible from the main menu and then select Markup File. 2. Click Open and select a markup file to open. TIP: If you and your spouse both use e-Sword, you may each want to track your markings separately. You can accomplish this by creating a new markup file. TIP: When printing Bible passages in e-Sword, all marks will be printed (highlights can only be printed from a color printer). To print a clean copy, you will need to create a new markup file. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 88
  • 89. Chapter 5: The Verse List Feature – Saving Verses The Verse List feature lets you save verses in topical lists. For example, you could compile a list of verses relating to the Trinity, Salvation, or any number of theological topics. The Verse List feature also lets you save (some or all) verse references from a search you’ve performed. If you searched for all verses containing “Jesus” and “Peter”, you could save those to a Verse List. What’s in this Chapter? Navigating Verse Lists ......................................................................................................90 Changing Verse Lists........................................................................................................90 Creating a Verse List and Adding Verses .........................................................................91 Viewing Verse Lists ..........................................................................................................92 Quickly Adding a Verse to a Verse List .............................................................................93 Creating a Verse List from a Search .................................................................................94 Updating a Verse List .......................................................................................................95 Deleting Verse Lists ..........................................................................................................95 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 89
  • 90. CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES Navigating Verse Lists Each verse list you create should have a different name. That helps you recognize and give context to the verses in the list. To see the name of the currently active list, hover your mouse over the drop down menu on the main toolbar (see the “Rom 3:10” example). The Previous Verse icon and the Next Verse icon let you lookup each verse in the list with the Bibles window. You can change the active verse list by clicking the Select Verse List icon. Changing Verse Lists To change the active Verse List: 1. Click the Select Verse List icon or click Bible from the main menu and choose Verse List. 2. Select a Verse List, such as “Roman’s Road” in our example. 3. Click the OK button to save your selection. The new verse list will be visible in the screenshot in the “Navigating Verse Lists” section above. Similarly, when you add verses, the newly added verse will appear in this list. See the section, “Adding a Verse to Your Verse List”. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 90
  • 91. CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES Creating a Verse List and Adding Verses You can create a Verse List from verses you enter, such as our Roman’s Road example below. 1. Click Bible from the main menu and then click Verse List. 2. Click the Add button. The screen turns gray, and the Add button becomes the Update button. 3. Enter the title of your Verse List, such as “Roman’s Road”. 4. Click the Update button. 5. To add verses to your new verse list, click the green “+” icon at the top of the vertical icon bar. The Verse List window prompts you to enter a verse. 6. You can add, delete, and re-order verses by clicking the appropriate icon on the vertical icon bar on the right side of the screen. Adding a Verse from a Verse List To add a verse to the selected Verse List, click the green "+" icon and enter the new verse. Deleting a Verse from a Verse List To delete a verse from the selected Verse List, click the red “-” icon and confirm the delete. Sorting Verses in a Verse List To move a verse up or down in the Verse List, select a verse. Use the blue “Up” and “Down” icons to move the verse. To view your list in Canonical order, click the Reorder all Verses by Canonical Order icon. Warning: There is not an “undo” for the Reorder all Verses by Canonical Order! e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 91
  • 92. CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES Viewing Verse Lists You can view Verse Lists in two ways. First, the Toolbar method: 1. On the main toolbar, look for the Verse List icons. 2. Click the drop down menu with "Rom 3:10" in our example. Your list will have different verses. 3. Select any verse from your verse list. Scroll through verses by clicking the Next Verse and Previous Verse icons. Next, the Menu method: 1. Click Bible from the main menu and then select Verse List. The Verse List window opens, showing your Verse Lists: 2. When you select a Verse List, your selected Verse List moves to the Verse List drop down menu on the main toolbar (see top of this page). 3. Click OK to show the Verse List you selected. TIP: Note the Copy/Paste Into icon and Print icon in the Verse List window above. With these icons, you can print a Verse List and paste a Verse List into the Editors Window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 92
  • 93. CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES Quickly Adding a Verse to a Verse List You can quickly add a verse to your Verse List without leaving the Bibles Window. 1. Right click any part of a verse from the Bibles window, and select Verse List from the context menu. 2. You may add or delete a verse from the Verse List. TIP: Hover your mouse over the Verse List drop down menu to see the name of the Verse List. This way, you can be certain you are adding a verse to the right verse list! e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 93
  • 94. CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES Creating a Verse List from a Search When searching the Bible, you may want to save a Bible search result. See Chapter 3 for information on searching the Bible. 1. Click Bible from the main menu and choose Search. 2. Perform a search. In the following example, we searched the KJV Bible for the word "Elijah". 3. Click the Convert Search to Verse List icon (highlighted in red above). 4. Check or uncheck verse boxes as necessary to select the verses you want to save. 5. Specify a name for the list in the Create field or select the Add to option to choose from an already saved list. 6. Click OK to save and close the Convert Search to Verse List window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 94
  • 95. CHAPTER 5: THE VERSE LIST FEATURE – SAVING VERSES Updating a Verse List Select the Verse List you want to update (see “Roman’s Road” in the above screenshot). Adding a Verse from a Verse List To add a verse to the selected Verse List, click the green "+" icon and enter the new verse. Deleting a Verse from a Verse List To delete a verse from the selected Verse List, click the red “-” icon and confirm the delete. Sorting Verses in a Verse List To move a verse up or down in the Verse List, select a verse. Use the blue “Up” and “Down” icons to move the verse To view your list in Canonical order, click the Reorder all Verses by Canonical Order icon. Warning: There is not an “undo” for the Reorder all Verses by Canonical Order! Deleting Verse Lists You can delete an entire Verse List. This differs from deleting verses in a Verse List—this feature deletes the whole Verse List. 1. Select the Verse List you want to delete from the Verse List window. Our example below uses “Song of Jacob”: 2. Click the Delete button and confirm the delete, as shown above. Warning: There is not an “undo” for the delete Verse List command! e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 95
  • 96. Chapter 6: Printing in e-Sword You can print almost everything in e-Sword, including Bible chapters, Notes, Commentaries, Dictionaries, Prayer Requests, Reference Library Books, and even Devotions. TIP: To print just a portion of a document, select the text to print before clicking the Print Preview icon. After you click Print Preview, notice only your text selection will print rather than the full document. What’s in this Chapter? The Print Preview Window ................................................................................................97 Printing Bible Chapters .....................................................................................................98 Printing Selected Verses and Chapters ............................................................................98 Printing from the Editors Window ......................................................................................99 Printing from the Commentaries .......................................................................................99 Printing from the Dictionaries Window ..............................................................................99 Printing from the Reference Library Window .....................................................................99 Printing Bible Reading ....................................................................................................100 Printing Daily Devotions ..................................................................................................100 Printing Prayer Lists........................................................................................................100 Printing with the STEP Reader .......................................................................................100 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 96
  • 97. CHAPTER 6: PRINTING IN E-SWORD The Print Preview Window The Print Preview icon is the first icon in each window's toolbar. Click the Print Preview icon to open the Print Preview window. When the Print Preview window opens, click the Print icon to print the current document. After the Print Previous screen opens, click the Page Options icon to adjust your paper size, margins, and print source. Use the navigational icons to view any page in your document. The last three buttons display the document at 100%, page width and whole page, respectively. Click the Actual Size (100%) icon to change the page on the screen to a 100% display. Click the Page Width icon to fit the width of your screen. Click the Whole Page icon to display the entire page on the screen. To exit the Print Preview window, click the "X" in the top right corner. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 97
  • 98. CHAPTER 6: PRINTING IN E-SWORD Printing Bible Chapters If want print an entire Bible chapter, find the Bible chapter text you want to print. Your chapter should be displayed in the Bibles window. Click the Print Preview icon. The Print Preview window displays the chapter to be printed. Printing Selected Verses and Chapters Select the Print Verses icon from the Bibles window (or click Bible/Print Verses from the main menu). The popup window allows you to select the book, chapters and verses for printing. Notice the Format options, numbered 1 – 8, each showing a different style of verse formatting. If you only need to print a few verses from the Bibles window, highlight the text with your mouse and click the Print Preview icon. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 98
  • 99. CHAPTER 6: PRINTING IN E-SWORD Printing from the Editors Window To print Topic Notes or Journal Notes, place your cursor in the document you want to print and press the Print Preview icon in the Editors window. Then press the Print icon in the Print Preview window to print the selected document. When printing Study Notes, you may want to print several study notes on the same page. In fact, you might need to print all study notes on a particular chapter, or book of the Bible. Click the Study Notes tab in the Editors window. Then, click the Print Preview icon and select your printing range. Make your selection, and press OK. e-Sword will display the Print Preview window so you can view your document before printing. Printing from the Commentaries Click the Print Preview icon from the Commentaries window to print the text in the window. Press the Print icon to print, or close the Print Preview window to exit. Printing from the Dictionaries Window Click the Print Preview icon from the Dictionaries window to print the text in the window. Press the Print icon to print, or close the Print Preview window to exit. Printing from the Reference Library Window Select Tools from the main menu and then select Reference Library. Click the Print Preview icon from the Reference Library window to print the text in the window. Press the Print icon to print, or close the Print Preview window to exit. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 99
  • 100. CHAPTER 6: PRINTING IN E-SWORD Printing Bible Reading Assuming you already saved a Bible reading plan, you can print any day's Scripture. Select Tools from the main menu and then select Bible Reading. When the popup window appears, select the reading plan from the drop down menu at the bottom of the window. Use the directional arrows in the Bible Reading toolbar to select text for printing. Click the Print Preview icon to setup and print the document. Printing Daily Devotions To print any day's devotion, select Tools from the main menu and then select Daily Devotions. Select the desired day from the drop down menu at the bottom of the window. Once you select the correct day, click the Print Preview icon to setup and print the document. Printing Prayer Lists If you saved prayer requests in e-Sword, you can view each day's requests. Click Tools from the main menu and then select Prayer Requests. Click the Print Prayer Requests icon to open the Print Preview window. Printing with the STEP Reader To print a document in the STEP Reader, select Tools from the main menu and select STEP Reader. Open the STEP file to print, and press the Print Preview icon on the STEP Reader toolbar. Click the Print icon to setup and print the document. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 100
  • 101. Chapter 7: The Commentaries Window Commentaries show an author’s book, chapter, or verse-by-verse comments on the Bible. Commentaries are immensely popular because they allow you to see someone else’s interpretation of the Bible. The dictionaries window integrates with commentaries, so word and Strong’s definitions are just a click away. What’s in this Chapter? Using Commentaries ......................................................................................................102 When to Synchronize/Unsynchronize a Commentary .....................................................102 Selecting Between Verse, Book, and Chapter Comments ..............................................104 Viewing “Next Comment” and “Previous Comment” ........................................................104 Viewing Commentary Information ...................................................................................104 Viewing All Commentary Entries – Birds Eye View .........................................................105 Searching a Commentary ...............................................................................................106 Searching More Than One Commentary Simultaneously................................................106 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 101
  • 102. CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW Using Commentaries This chapter explains the Commentaries window features. The Commentaries Window shows the installed commentaries in commentary resource tabs. When you select a Bible verse in the Bibles window, the Commentaries window displays the comments for that verse. By default, the Synchronize icon is selected, which automatically updates the commentary text for any verse you choose. TIP: If your Commentary window stops displaying new information when you change Bible verses, make sure the Link icon is “pressed”. Also note that some commentaries may not have a comment for every verse or passage. More than one commentary may have a comment for your verse. In the screen below, the blue (i) Information icon shows comments for all commentaries (except for BNTC) for Genesis 1:1: When to Synchronize/Unsynchronize a Commentary Commentaries frequently reference a passage of scripture while explaining a Bible interpretation. Some commentaries show cross references, such as the TSK commentary below. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 102
  • 103. CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW You may want to quickly read a verse without leaving your current reading position in the commentary window. You may hover the mouse pointer over a scripture reference to see a ToolTip popup of that verse. To see the verse in context using the Bibles window, without losing your current reading position in the commentary, disable Synchronization. Click the Synchronize icon so the icon is “raised”. This configuration allows you to view other Bible verses without changing your reading position in the commentary window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 103
  • 104. CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW Selecting Between Verse, Book, and Chapter Comments Commentaries may have three types of comments: Verse, Book, and Chapter. By default, e- Sword shows verse comments because they are the most common. To view Book, Chapter, or Verse comments for the current passage of scripture, click the Book icon, Chapter icon, or Verse icon in the Commentaries toolbar. Some commentaries may not have Bible or Chapter comments. Also, some commentaries may not have a comment on every verse. You may also right click in the Commentaries window to quickly access the Verse, Chapter, and Book view options. Viewing “Next Comment” and “Previous Comment” Thoughts expressed in verses don’t always end when the verse ends. Sometimes a thought is continued to the next verse. Similarly, a commentary may continue its thought on the current verse into the comment for the next verse. To quickly view the next or previous comment in a commentary, use the Next Comment and Previous Comment icons in Commentaries Window (highlighted in red below): Viewing Commentary Information Hover your mouse pointer over any commentary tab to view each commentary's full name. After selecting a commentary, you may find additional information by clicking Commentary from the main menu and then choosing Information. An information window will display with more information on the commentary. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 104
  • 105. CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW Viewing All Commentary Entries – Birds Eye View To view all books, chapters, and verse comments in a commentary: 1. Click the Search Commentary icon on the Commentaries toolbar. 2. Enter the dollar sign character “$”, as shown below. 3. Select “Regular expressions (REGEX)”, as shown below. 4. Click the Search icon. 5. The Commentary Search window shows which verses contain commentary information. 6. Click any verse in the left summary pane, and then click the OK button to accept the search result. The Bibles and Commentaries windows change to that passage. 7. You may press the Cancel button to leave the screen without changing the Bibles or Commentaries windows. WARNING: This is intended for smaller commentaries when you’re not sure which verses have comments. Performing this search on a large commentary may take some time to complete because the search will load every verse into the summary pane above. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 105
  • 106. CHAPTER 7: THE COMMENTARIES WINDOW Searching a Commentary Searching a commentary is nearly the same as searching Bibles and the Reference Library. Click the Search Commentaries icon or click Commentaries from the main menu and choose Search. When the Search window opens, type the word you want to search and select your search criteria. Click the Search icon to search the active commentary. For more information on using the dictionary search features, see the search instructions in Chapter 3 and Chapter 13. Also, see Chapter 22 for an explanation of Regular Expression Searching. Searching More Than One Commentary Simultaneously To search through multiple commentaries simultaneously, select Commentaries from the main menu and choose Extended Search. When the Extended Search window opens, you can select which commentaries you want to search. For more information on using the commentary search features, see the extended search instructions in Chapter 3 and Chapter 13. Also, see Chapter 22 for an explanation of Regular Expression Searching. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 106
  • 107. Chapter 8: Introduction to the Editors The Editors Window is for your personal note taking. e-Sword offers three types of editors, including Journal Notes, Study Notes, and Topical Notes. Journal Notes store your date- based comments. Study Notes store your verse-based comments. And Topic Notes store your topical comments. The next three chapters explain each of the Editors in detail. TIP: In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes Editor window displayed third party Topic Notes (Topic Notes you downloaded). Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library instead of the Topic Notes Editor. This chapter focuses on the Editors’ shared functionality and word processing features. What’s in this Chapter? New Editor Features in e-Sword 10 ................................................................................108 Editor Hotkeys ................................................................................................................108 Using the Editor – Word Processing ...............................................................................110 Understanding Where the Editors Read Notes Files. ......................................................125 How to Backup Your Notes - Advanced ..........................................................................125 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 107
  • 108. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS New Editor Features in e-Sword 10 e-Sword 10’s editor seems less like an editor and more like a word processor. The new editor is more robust and supports an array of new features. Now your Journal, Study, and Topic Notes will benefit from: • Hyperlinks • Bookmarks • Images/Pictures • Tables • Borders • Columns • Headers/Footers • Page Layout View The next few pages explain how to use the Editor’s word processing features. Later in this chapter, advanced users will benefit from instructions on backing up the Editor’s notes files. Editor Hotkeys The Editor supports convenient hotkey shortcuts. When more than one key is shown, press both keys simultaneously. Hotkey Description F4 Copy ToolTip F7 Spell Check F11 Toggle Paste As Formatted CTRL-A Select All CTRL-B Bold CTRL-C Copy CTRL-D Font CTRL-E Center CTRL-F Find CTRL-G Goto Bookmark CTRL-I Italic CTRL-J Format Scripture ToolTip e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 108
  • 109. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Hotkey Description CTRL-R Replace CTRL-U Underline CTRL-V Paste CTRL-X Cut CTRL-Y Redo CTRL-Z Undo CTRL-ENTER Insert Page Break CTRL-(Backspace) Delete Previous Word SHIFT-F7 Thesaurus SHIFT-ENTER Insert Line Feed CTRL-SHIFT-V Paste Formatted Bible Text CTRL-SHIFT- Insert Non-breaking Space (Spacebar) CTRL-TAB Indent Paragraph SHIFT-TAB Outdent Paragraph e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 109
  • 110. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Using the Editor – Word Processing The Topic Notes, Study Notes, and Journal Notes Editors contain new word processor features you can use to format your Notes. You may recognize most icons on the Editor toolbar from your experience with other word processing software. You may hover your mouse pointer over each icon for the name of the feature. Right click an Editor window to show the context menu, shown to the right. Over the next pages, we discuss the toolbar icons and context menu options in the order the icons are shown on the toolbar. Find (Ctrl-F), Replace (Ctrl-R), Go To (Ctrl-G) The Find feature is useful for basic searching while you’re writing Notes. The find feature is not intended as a replacement for the Locate Notes icon, which is a more robust search. The Find and the Find/Replace commands function like any other word processor. These commands work only in the current Editor window. Find and Find/Replace will not search across Journal, Study, or Topic Notes. The Go To tab of this window takes you directly to a bookmark in your text. Instructions for defining and linking to bookmarks are presented later in this chapter. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 110
  • 111. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Spell Check (F7) Even when words “look” right, they may not be spelled right. Now you can know for sure. When Spell Check finds an unrecognized word, you will see a Spelling Check window. Spell Check uses a custom dictionary, as shown at the bottom of the window. By default, this custom dictionary is stored in the e-Sword install folder, usually “c:program filese-sword”. The custom dictionary includes many commonly used religious terms and authors to prevent false reports of misspelled words. If Spell Check identifies a properly spelled word as misspelled, you can add the word (see Add button above) to the custom dictionary to prevent future false reports. Spell Check Options: From the main menu, click Options > Editor Options > Spell Check Options. You can reset the Ignore All list and change which word patterns are ignored. Thesaurus (Shift-F7) Can’t think of exactly the right word? Highlight a word and click the Thesaurus icon. e-Sword will show you synonyms for the word you chose, if available. If you find a replacement you like, click the new word and press the Replace button. Cut (Ctrl-X), Copy (Ctrl-C), Paste (Ctrl-V) Select (or highlight text) by left-clicking and dragging with the mouse. Remove highlighted text with the Cut icon, copy text with the Copy icon, and paste text with the Paste icon. Pasting Formatted Text (F11 Toggle) The F11 toggles the availability of pasting text as formatted. If enabled, the text formatting will paste with the text (including bold, italics, tables, line spacing, etc.). If disabled, your text will be stripped of formatting and will paste as plain text. Undo (Ctrl-Z) and Redo (Ctrl-Y) To undo or redo your last edit, click the Undo and Redo icons. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 111
  • 112. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Insert Bookmark A bookmark is an invisible marker, representing the destination for a hyperlink. The bookmark feature is not accessible from the icon menu. You must right-click in the Editor and choose Bookmarks from the context menu. The name of the bookmark itself is not shown to the reader and serves only as an internal identifier. The bookmark name must be unique—two bookmarks cannot have the same name. You will use the bookmark name later when you insert a hyperlink to the bookmark. Insert Hyperlink A hyperlink connects text to a destination. As shown to the right, the destination may be a Web page, an email address, a file, or a bookmark. You can highlight the word(s) you want to make into a hyperlink and then click the Insert Hyperlink icon. You can also click the icon first and define the hyperlink word(s) in the window shown to the right. Web Page: Links to the web page you specify. Email: Links to an email address, but the e-Sword user’s computer will define if/how this works. The e-Sword user’s computer must have an email client installed. The “Send to” field of the email will pre-populate with the email address from this link. File: Links to a local file on the e-Sword user’s computer. If you send your e-Sword module to someone else, they too must have the file in exactly the same location on their computer. Bookmark: Links to a bookmark (see above for instructions on creating a bookmark). The drop down menu contains bookmarks you defined. You must have created the bookmark by the time you reach this window. A bookmark must be used in the same note where it’s defined. For example, you cannot define a bookmark in one study note and hyperlink to the bookmark from a different study note. The same restrictions apply to journal and topic notes. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 112
  • 113. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Insert Table Tables, like the one shown lower-right, quickly illustrate information in ways sentences cannot. Tables can be used in a variety of ways to align information, illustrate concepts, and compare textual relationships. Creating a New Table After clicking the Insert Table icon, you may begin configuring the table. Specify the number of rows and columns. The example table has three rows and three columns. Fit to page: Expand to the width of the page. Fixed column width: How wide each column should be. Dragging Table Boundaries To change the size of the table or of any cell in the table: 1. Position the mouse pointer over the table or cell boundary. 2. The pointer turns from an arrow pointer into an adjustment pointer (see example table to the right). 3. Drag the pointer in the direction necessary to change the table or cell size. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 113
  • 114. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Table Properties (Table Settings) To edit a table’s settings: 1. Select the whole table or part of the table. Or place the mouse pointer in a table cell. Your edits to the table’s settings only apply to the cells you selected. 2. Right-click and choose Table from the context menu. 3. Click Table Properties (explained below) Frame and Color Tab Frame: Controls the border around the selected cells. If you selected the whole table, the frame applies to the entire table. You may chose from one of the default frames (None, Box, All, or Grid). Or, you may click the illustration of the cells/table to manually set which sides have a border (see mouse pointer to the right). Line Width: Controls the thickness of the frame border. Background Color: Controls the table and/or cell’s background color. The Other button allows for custom colors. Cell Margins: Controls the cell buffer (if any). Tables usually read easier and look better if the table text/image isn’t “up against” the cell borders. Size and Formatting Tab Cell Height: Controls the height of the cell. You can let the word processor distribute the cell height equally according to the text/images in the cell. Or you can maintain a minimum cell height. Formatting: Controls whether the text/image is aligned at the top, middle, or bottom of the cell. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 114
  • 115. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Row Options: Allow row to break across pages – When not enough space exists on the page to show the row, do you want the row to split across two pages or display in its entirety on the next page? This setting applies to the row you selected when loading the Table Properties window. Repeat as header row at the top of each page – The row you selected when loading the Table Properties window will be the header row at the top of each page that the table spans. Adjusting Rows and Columns You may add or delete columns and rows as necessary: To Insert Rows/Columns 1. Right click the table and select the Table option from the context menu. 2. Choose Insert. 3. Choose where to insert rows or columns, as shown below. To Delete Rows/Columns 1. Right click the table and select the Table option from the context menu. 2. Choose Delete. 3. Select either Row or Column in order to delete the row or column of the cell(s) you selected when loading the Table Properties window. Insert Picture You may insert a picture in two ways: 1. Click the Insert Picture icon and select a picture to insert. 2. Copy (Ctrl-C) an image elsewhere and paste (Ctrl-V) the image into the e-Sword editor. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 115
  • 116. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Image Attributes Double-click an image to adjust the image’s settings. Layout and Position Tab Wrapping Style: Controls how text wraps around the image. The “Wrapping Style” diagrams (see screenshot to the right) illustrate how the text will relate to the image. The In- Line option will cause the image to move with the text. Move object with text: If the “Top and Bottom” or “Square” wrapping style is selected, this option will cause the image to move with the text. Fixed Position on Page: If the “Top and Bottom” or “Square” wrapping style is selected, this option will keep the image in place on the page you specify. The image will not move unless you move it. Horizontal Alignment: If the “Top and Bottom” or “Square” wrapping style is selected, this option controls the image’s horizontal position. Absolute Position: If “Other Position” is chosen, you can control how many inches (or fractions of an inch) the image stays to the left of the paragraph. Vertical Alignment: If the “Top and Bottom” or “Square” wrapping style is selected, this option controls the image’s vertical position. Absolute Position: If the “Top and Bottom” or “Square” wrapping style is selected, you can control how many inches (or fractions of an inch) the image stays below the paragraph. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 116
  • 117. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Size and Distance Tab Size: Controls the height and width of the picture, in inches. This setting updates based on values entered for the Scale setting. Scale: Controls the height and width of the image as a percent of its original size. This setting updates based on values entered for the Size setting. TIP: This is a huge factor in the image’s size. In the example to the right, the 10 inch wide image should be downsized by 50% to avoid an unnecessarily large image. Large images create large resources which consume more memory, increase e- Sword startup time, and may cause e-Sword to run slower. Distance from text: Controls how much of a margin exists between side of the image and the text. Options: Controls whether you can move and resize the image with the mouse to prevent accidental movement. Saving Options Tab The settings in this tab are not used by e-Sword. Making changes to these settings will not impact how images are stored. All images are in JPG/JPEG format at 96dpi with 50% compression, regardless of the settings. All images are embedded in the module regardless of the settings. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 117
  • 118. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Header and Footer The Header and Footer icon inserts/removes a header and footer. The header and footer supports paragraph and font formatting found elsewhere in the Editor. Inserting the Header/Footer To insert the Header/Footer: 1. Click the Header/Footer icon and notice the icon changes to a “pressed” position. WARNING: Clicking the Header/Footer icon overwrites any existing Header/Footer. If the Header/Footer icon already has a “pressed” appearance, a Header/Footer already exists in your document. Click the Page Layout icon to view the Header/Footer. 2. After clicking the icon above, your view of the Journal, Study, or Topic Note changes to Page Layout. This is a representation of how the document will look when printed. 3. A default header appears in the Header/Footer and varies depending on which Editor you use (Journal, Study, or Topic Note). 4. Click inside the dotted rectangle to edit the Header/Footer. 5. After making changes, double click outside the dotted rectangle to save the Header/Footer. TIP: The Header and Footer are only visible when the Page Layout icon is “pressed”. TIP: If you accidentally delete the page number special character, you must remove and re-insert the header and footer by toggling the Header/Footer icon. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 118
  • 119. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Removing the Header/Footer To remove the Header/Footer: 1. Click the Header/Footer icon and notice the icon changes from a “pressed” position to an “raised” position (assuming you have an existing Header/Footer). 2. If you are not in Page Layout mode, press the Page Layout icon to confirm the Header and Footer is not visible and has been removed. TIP: The Header/Footer is only visible when the Page Layout icon is “pressed” even when a Header/Footer exists. Page Layout The Page Layout icon controls the view of your document. When clicked, the icon changes to a “pressed” position, showing a Page View of your document. This representation shows the edges of the document, margins, header/footer, and a general view of how the document will appear when printed. To return to the Normal View, click the Page Layout icon again and the icon returns to a “raised” position. Show/Hide Formatting Symbols The Show/Hide icon controls whether you see hidden formatting symbols, such as paragraph symbols and space “dots” between words. Font Selection and Size You can choose a font style and font size for the text you type. You may also highlight text and change the font or font size. Both font controls shown to the right are found on the Editor toolbar. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 119
  • 120. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Bold (Ctrl-B), Italic (Ctrl-I), Underline (Ctrl-U) Bold, Italic, or Underline changes the text accordingly. Font Color The Font Color icon has two parts: • Clicking the “A” icon will change the color of the selected text to the color shown in the icon (green in the icon above). • Clicking the “down-arrow” icon displays a color selection window. Once chosen, that color is available from the “A” icon shown above for quicker reference. More Font Options (Ctrl-D) You can also right-click and choose Font from the context menu (shown to the right). In addition to the font options described above, you can also format text as Bold Italic, and Strikeout. Highlight The Highlight icon has two parts: • Clicking the “ab” icon will change the color of the selected text to the color shown in the icon (yellow in the example above). • Clicking the “down-arrow’ icon displays a color selection window. Once chosen, that color is available from the “ab” icon for quicker reference. For more information on Highlighting, see Chapter 4. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 120
  • 121. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Format Scripture Tooltip (Ctrl-J) e-Sword supports “scripture tooltips”. When verses are in the correct format, e-Sword will show a “popup” of the verse text as you hover your mouse pointer over the scripture reference. • Clicking the Tooltip icon without a verse reference selected shows a Verse Reference window. Enter a valid verse reference and e-Sword will insert the properly formatted verse into your text. • Clicking the Tooltip icon with a verse reference selected will automatically format the verse in your text. Notice the examples below of ToolTipped verse references on the top row, followed by the original text on the bottom row. Align Left, Align Center (Ctrl-E), Align Right, Justify Align Left: Aligns the text with the left side of the page. Center: Centers the text horizontally. Align Right: Aligns the text with the right side of the page. Justify: Adds small spaces between letters and words so the left and right edges of the text meet perfectly with the left and right sides of the page. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 121
  • 122. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Numbering and Bullets You can use the Numbering and Bullets icons in two ways: • Select one or more lines of text and click the Numbering or Bullet icon to convert the lines to numbers or bullets. • Do not select any lines of text before clicking the Numbering or Bullet icon. A numbered or bullet list will begin in your text and each time you press enter, a new line number or bullet appears. To stop the insertion of numbers or bullets , press the Backspace key to erase the final line with the unwanted number or bullet. Bullets and Numbering Format To change the formatting of a numbered or bullet list, right-click the list. Style: Selects between arabic numerals, roman numerals, and letters of the alphabet. Start at: Controls the number that the list starts with. For alphabetical lists, each letter is represented by a number. Format: Controls the formatting of the list, such as “1.”, “1)”, “1”, etc. Level: Controls the number of indents. Restart Numbering: Adds a new line starting over with number “1”, the letter “A”, etc. Indent Paragraph (CTRL-TAB) and Outdent Paragraph (SHIFT-TAB) Indent Paragraph or Outdent Paragraph moves the paragraph text to the right one tab stop or to the left one tab stop. Indent is a useful formatting feature when showing a hierarchy of information. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 122
  • 123. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Format Paragraph The settings in this window apply to the whole paragraph, not just to text you have selected. The Preview window shows a live example of the changes you make. Align Left: Aligns the text to the left side of the page. Center: Centers the text horizontally. Align Right: Aligns the text with the right side of the page. Justify: Adds small spaces between letters and words so the left and right edges of the text meet perfectly with the left and right sides of the page. Indentation Left/Right: Controls the indent for the left and right sides of paragraph. Special … By: Selects between a First Line indent and a Hanging Indent. The hanging line is not indented but subsequent lines are intended. The By field controls the amount of the indent. Spacing Before/After: Controls the amount of space before and after a paragraph to avoid entering blank lines with the Enter key. Line Spacing: Selects the distance between lines. Border The Border icon inserts a border into the text. The different border styles are shown to the right. You can use the Border icon in two ways: • Click the “border layout” icon to insert the border style shown in the icon. • Click the “border down-arrow’ icon to display a Border Selection window. Once chosen, that border is available from the “border layout” icon for quicker reference. If you select text before clicking the Border icon, the border will enclose the text you selected. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 123
  • 124. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Columns You may select how many columns the text will be divided into. This is for display and printing purposes only. Your column preferences will not be saved after restarting e-Sword. If you save a Topics Note file as a Reference Library book (refx), the column setting will also not be saved into that format. The different column layouts are shown to the right. You can use the Columns icon in two ways: • Clicking the “column layout” icon will change the number of columns. • Clicking the “column down-arrow” icon displays a Column Selection window. Once chosen, that column layout is available from the “column layout” icon for quicker reference. Page Break Often used in word processing software, Page Break forces all the text after the “break” to the next page. The Page Layout icon must be “pressed” to view the actual Page Break. Otherwise, a dotted line shows where the page break will occur. Save Notes It’s always a good idea to click the Save icon before using other features in e-Sword. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 124
  • 125. CHAPTER 8: INTRODUCTION TO THE EDITORS Understanding Where the Editors Read Notes Files. When you first installed e-Sword, three default Notes files were installed including: JOURNAL.JNLX (Journal Notes), STUDY.NOTX (Study Notes), and TOPIC.TOPX (Topic Notes). These files store the information you enter into the Editors Window. By default, all three file types are located in your e-Sword user directory (typically "My Documentse-sword"). How to Backup Your Notes - Advanced Advanced users may want to backup their Notes or move their Notes to another computer. This section assumes a basic level of proficiency with Windows, folder navigation, and file copying. By default, e-Sword stores Notes files in your e-sword user folder (typically "My Documentse-sword"). If you changed your storage location, you must use that location in the steps below. 1. Use Windows Explorer to navigate to the “My Documentse-sword” folder. 2. Copy the Journal, Study, and/or Topic Note file(s) to your backup location. By default, the Editors store notes in: JOURNAL.JNLX (Journal Notes), STUDY.NOTX (Study Notes), and TOPIC.TOPX (Topic Notes). If you created additional Notes files, copy them also. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 125
  • 126. Chapter 9: Journal Notes The Journal Notes feature allows you to keep a journal about spiritual growth, issues you struggle with, events in your life, answers to prayer, or anything you choose. Journal Notes are organized by date, similar to a diary. Many Christians find journaling is a key to explosive personal and spiritual growth. What’s in this Chapter? Viewing Journal Notes ....................................................................................................127 Creating a Journal Note ..................................................................................................128 Editing a Journal Note ....................................................................................................128 Deleting a Journal Note ..................................................................................................129 Viewing All Journal Notes – Birds Eye View....................................................................130 Searching Journal Notes.................................................................................................131 Additional Search Options Wheel ...................................................................................131 Copying from the Bible to Your Journal Notes ................................................................132 Copying from Other Windows to Journal Notes ..............................................................133 Importing and Exporting Journal Notes ...........................................................................134 Managing More than One Journal Notes File - Advanced ...............................................135 Changing Where e-Sword Reads Journal Notes - Advanced ..........................................136 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 126
  • 127. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Viewing Journal Notes • To view all Journal Notes, click the Locate Notes icon, shown below in red. • To view a specific Journal Note, click the date drop-down menu on the toolbar and click a date, as shown below: e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 127
  • 128. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Creating a Journal Note To create a Journal Note: 1. Notice the date selected in the date field. By default, today’s date appears but you can change the date, as shown below. 2. Type your Journal Notes. Click the Save icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword. TIP: You can create popup Scripture "ToolTips" in your own Notes! Just select an existing verse reference, like John 3:16, and click the Format Scripture ToolTip icon (or press Ctrl-J). Editing a Journal Note You can edit any Journal Note you previously wrote: 1. Navigate to the date where you made the Journal Note (see calendar above). 2. Click the date of the Journal Note to edit. 3. Edit your Journal Note and click the Save icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 128
  • 129. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Deleting a Journal Note You can delete any Journal Note you previously wrote: 1. Navigate to the date where you made the Journal Note (see calendar below). 2. Click the date of the Journal Note to delete. 3. Select all the text in the window with the mouse or by pressing the Ctrl-A key combination. 4. Press the Delete key to delete the Journal Note. You can undelete the text by pressing Ctrl-Z key combination or clicking the Undo icon. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 129
  • 130. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Viewing All Journal Notes – Birds Eye View If you want to view all of your Journal Notes: 1. Click the Locate Journal Notes icon: 2. The Locate Journal Notes window shows which dates contain Journal Notes. 3. Click any date in the left summary pane to display your Journal Notes in the right window pane. The example below shows the Journal Notes for November 5, 2011. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 130
  • 131. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Searching Journal Notes To search your Journal Notes; 1. Click the Locate Notes icon in the Journal Notes Editor. 2. Searching Journal notes is nearly identical to searching Study Notes, except Study Notes are verse-based and Journal Notes are date-based. See Chapter 10 for more information. Additional Search Options Wheel Searching Journal notes is nearly identical to searching Study Notes, except Study Notes are verse-based and Journal Notes are date-based. Please see Chapter 10 for more information on the Additional Search Options Wheel. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 131
  • 132. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Copying from the Bible to Your Journal Notes In addition to copying with this method, you can also apply formatting to copied verses with the Copy Verses command documented in the Chapter 3, “The Bible Windows In-Depth”. To copy Psalms 33:6 into your Journal Notes: 1. Navigate to the date of the Journal Note. Left-click the mouse where you want to paste the verse. 2. Navigate to Psalms 33:6 in the Bible window. 3. Right click the verse in the Bible window and select Paste Into Journal Notes. (To paste more than one verse, select the verses you want to paste before right-clicking and choosing Paste Into Journal Notes.) 4. The verse appears in your Journal notes. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 132
  • 133. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Copying from Other Windows to Journal Notes When copying from the other windows, such as the Commentaries, Dictionaries, Reference Library, etc. to the Journal Notes editor, you have two options: 1. Copy the entire text to the Journal Notes window, or 2. Copy an excerpt of the text to the Journal Notes window. Copying the Entire Text 1. Place your cursor in the Journal Notes window where you want the copied text to appear. 2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy. 3. Click the Select All icon or right click anywhere in the text and choose Select All from the menu. The complete text appearing in the window will be highlighted. 4. With the text still selected, right click and select Paste into Journal Notes. The selected text will be copied into your Journal Notes at the location where you last placed your cursor. Copying an Excerpt 1. Place your cursor in the Journal Notes window where you want the copied text to appear. 2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy. 3. Select the part of the text you want to copy to Journal Notes by highlighting (left click the mouse and drag to select) the text. 4. Right click and select Paste into Journal Notes. Only the selected text will paste. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 133
  • 134. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Importing and Exporting Journal Notes e-Sword lets you import data (text, images, tables, etc.) into Journal Notes. You can also export your Journal Notes to other file formats. The import option includes (or imports) text into your Journal Notes from other files. You can import the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), and txt (plain text). To import a file: 1. Select the date of the Journal Note in the Journal Notes Editor. The text you import will appear in this Journal Note. 2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Import button. 3. Navigate to the folder containing the file to import, select the file, and click Open. 4. The text from your document will appear in the date of he Journal Note you selected in Step 1 above. The export option creates an external file (separate from e-Sword) containing your Journal Note. You can export the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), txt (plain text), and pdf. To export a Journal note: 1. Select the Journal Note you want to export by navigating to that date in the Journal Notes Editor. 2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Export button. 3. Navigate to the folder that will contain your exported file, provide a name for your file, and click save. You may need to adjust the “Save as type” setting to specify the file format e-Sword uses to export your data. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 134
  • 135. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Managing More than One Journal Notes File - Advanced Advanced users may want to create and edit more than one Journal Notes file. The default name for the Journal Notes file is “journal.jnlx” and it’s typically stored in “My Documentse-sword”, or the location of your e-Sword user folder. This configuration meets the needs of the majority of e-Sword users. If you do not need additional files or do not feel comfortable with the instructions that follow, you may not need this functionality. Creating a New Journal Notes File To create a new Journal Notes file: 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Journal Notes Window. 2. Click the New button. 3. Specify a filename and click the Save button. 4. You now have a new, blank Journal Notes file. Opening a Journal Notes File To open a new Journal Note file: 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Journal Notes Window. 2. Click the Open option. 3. Choose a filename and click the Open button. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 135
  • 136. CHAPTER 9: JOURNAL NOTES Changing Where e-Sword Reads Journal Notes - Advanced Most users do not need to change where e-Sword reads Journal Notes files. Advanced users may want to read from a different location. And some users who upgrade from a previous version may have changed where e-Sword reads Journal Notes files. Each Note Editor uses its own folder setting. By default, all three Editors read from the e- Sword user folder, typically “My Documentse-sword”. However, each Editor Type can read from a different location. WARNING: Changing the folder the Journal Notes Editor reads may result in you not being able to find your other Journal Notes files. For example, if you have multiple Journal Notes files in one folder, but you change where e-Sword reads Journal Notes files, you will not be able to view your other Journal Notes files. In that situation, you must either change the folder where the Journal Notes reads or move your Journal Notes to the new folder. To change the folder where the e-Sword reads Journal Notes: 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Journal Notes window. 2. Click the Open option. 3. Navigate to the folder where e-Sword should read Journal Notes. 4. Choose a filename and click the Open button. 5. e-Sword will now read Journal Notes from this folder. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 136
  • 137. Chapter 10: The Study Notes The Study Notes feature allows you to write notes about individual verses, similar to making notes in the margin of a printed Bible. Here, you can record your personal discoveries, conclusions, and commentary about specific verses. Study Notes are verse-based—the note itself is matched with a verse of the Bible. e-Sword synchronizes your Study Notes with the Bible verse you’re currently reading. When you view a Bible verse containing a study note, the Study Note tab will show the notes you wrote for the verse. What’s in this Chapter? Viewing Study Notes.......................................................................................................138 Creating a Study Note ....................................................................................................138 Editing a Study Note .......................................................................................................140 Deleting a Study Note .....................................................................................................140 Viewing All Study Notes – Birds Eye View ......................................................................141 Searching Study Notes ...................................................................................................142 Additional Search Options Wheel ...................................................................................143 Copying from the Bible to Your Study Notes ...................................................................145 Copying from Other Windows to Study Notes .................................................................146 Importing and Exporting Study Notes..............................................................................147 Managing More than One Study Notes File - Advanced .................................................148 Changing Where e-Sword Reads Study Notes - Advanced ............................................149 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 137
  • 138. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Viewing Study Notes • To view all Study Notes, click the Locate Notes icon, shown below in red. • To view a specific Study Note, click the verse drop-down menu on the toolbar and choose the verse, as shown below. If the Link icon is “pressed”, the current Study Note synchronizes with the active passage in the Bible window. Creating a Study Note To create a study note on Genesis 2:1: 1. Navigate to Genesis 2:1 in the Bible window or from the Editors Window. 2. Click the Study Notes tab in the Editors window (lower right window, by default in e- Sword). Notice that the Book, Chapter and Verse (in the Editors window) automatically changes to the Bible verse you navigate to. TIP: The Link icon synchronizes the verse in the Study Notes Editor with the verse you open in the Bibles window. If you want the Study Note window to display the Study Note for the Bible verse you've chosen, make sure the Link icon is “pressed”. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 138
  • 139. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES 3. Type your notes for Genesis 2:1. Click the Save icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword. TIP: You can create popup Scripture "ToolTips" in your own Notes! Just select an existing verse reference, like John 3:16, and click the Format Scripture ToolTip icon (or press Ctrl-J). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 139
  • 140. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Editing a Study Note You can edit any Study Note you previously wrote: 1. Navigate to the verse in the Editors Window (see red box below): 2. Edit your study note and click the Save icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword. Deleting a Study Note You can delete any Study Note you previously wrote: 1. Navigate to the verse with the Study Note you want to delete. 2. Select all the text in the window with the mouse or by pressing Ctrl-A key combination. 3. Press the Delete key to delete the Study Note. You can undelete the text by pressing Ctrl-Z key combination or clicking the Undo icon. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 140
  • 141. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Viewing All Study Notes – Birds Eye View If you want to view all of your Study Notes: 1. Click the Locate Notes icon: 2. The Locate Study Notes window shows which verses contain Study Notes. 3. Click any verse in the left summary pane to display your study notes in the right window pane. The example below shows the study notes for Genesis 2:1. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 141
  • 142. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Searching Study Notes To search your Study Notes: 1. Click the Locate Notes icon in the Study Notes Editor. 2. The Locate Study Notes window appears, as shown below. Type the search word(s) in the first field. Not sure how to spell your search terms? Take your best guess and then click the spell check icon . 3. In the screenshot above, we typed, "all things" in the search box. 4. We selected Search for all of the words from the drop down menu to find only Study Notes with all words from our search phrase. 5. Click the Search icon in the upper, right corner of this window. The search results are categorized by section on the left, as shown above. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 142
  • 143. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES 6. After reviewing the search results, press the OK button. This closes the search window and displays the full text of the Study Note you chose. TIP: If we selected, Search for any of the words, e-Sword would have displayed search results with both words from our search phrase (“all” and “things”). Study Notes would have been shown if they contained the word “all” and “things” as separate words anywhere in the Study Note. Be careful how you refine your search. Additional Search Options Wheel For an even more specific search, click the search wheel, (shown in red below). You may use this more specific search with or without Regular Expressions, discussed in Chapter 22. Case Sensitive: When checked, this option will make your search case sensitive to find “god” with a lower-case “g” (see above). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 143
  • 144. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Partial Search: Below, we searched for "child". Notice the results for variations of our search phrase, including “child”, “children”, “childless”, etc. (see below). Synonyms: You can search for your search phrase and synonyms of your search phrase. In the example below, the synonyms found include, “redemption” and several others off-screen. The synonym box will be grayed-out (unavailable) unless Search for any of the words is chosen (see below). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 144
  • 145. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Copying from the Bible to Your Study Notes In addition to copying with this method, you can also apply formatting to copied verses with the Copy Verses command documented in the Chapter 3, “The Bible Windows In-Depth”. To copy Psalms 33:6 into the Study Notes for Genesis 2:1: 1. Navigate to Genesis 2:1 in the Study Notes Editor window. Left-click the mouse where you want to paste the verse. 2. Deselect the Link icon in the Study Notes Editor window and navigate to Psalms 33:6 in the Bible window. 3. Right click the verse in the Bible window and select Paste Into Study Notes. (To paste more than one verse, select the verses you want to paste before right-clicking and choosing Paste Into Study Notes.) 4. The verse appears in your Study notes. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 145
  • 146. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Copying from Other Windows to Study Notes When copying from the other windows, such as the Commentaries, Dictionaries, Reference Library, etc. to the Study Notes editor, you have two options: 1. Copy the entire text to the Study Notes window. 2. Copy an excerpt of the text to the Study Notes window. Copying the Entire Text 1. Place your cursor in the Study Notes window where you want the copied text to appear. 2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy. 3. Click the Select All icon or right click anywhere in the text and choose Select All from the menu. The complete text appearing in the window will be highlighted. 4. With the text still selected, right-click and select Paste into Study Notes (be sure your Study Notes are open to the correct verse). The selected text will be copied into your Study Notes at the location where you last placed your cursor. Copying an Excerpt 1. Place your cursor in the Study Note window where you want the copied text to appear. 2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy. 3. Select the part of the text you want to copy to Study Notes by highlighting (left click the mouse and drag to select) the text. 4. Right-click and select Paste into Study Notes. Only the selected text will paste. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 146
  • 147. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Importing and Exporting Study Notes e-Sword lets you import data (text, images, tables, etc.) into Study Notes. You can also export your Study Notes to other file formats. The import option includes (or imports) text into your Study Notes from other files. You can import the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), and txt (plain text). To import a file: 1. Select a verse from the Study Notes Editor. The text you import will appear in this Study Note. 2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Import button. 3. Navigate to the folder containing the file to import, select the file, and click Open. 4. The text from your document will appear in the verse you selected in Step 1 above. The export option creates an external file (separate from e-Sword) containing your Study Note. You can export the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), txt (plain text), and pdf. To export a Study note: 1. Select the Study Note you want to export by navigating to that verse in the Study Notes Editor. 2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Export button. 3. Navigate to the folder that will contain your exported file, provide a name for your file, and click save. You may need to adjust the “Save as type” setting to specify the file format e-Sword uses to export your data. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 147
  • 148. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Managing More than One Study Notes File - Advanced Advanced users may want to create and edit more than one Study Notes file. The default name for the Study Notes file is “study.notx” and it’s typically stored in “My Documentse-sword”, or the location of your e-Sword user folder. This configuration meets the needs of the majority of e-Sword users. If you do not need additional files or do not feel comfortable with the instructions that follow, you may not need this functionality. At the bottom of the screen below, you can see the popup menu, outlined in red. The default Study Note file, study.notx, is the currently selected file. To view a different file, select the Study Note from the menu. Creating a New Study Notes File To create a new Study Notes file: 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Study Notes Window. 2. Click the New button. 3. Specify a filename and click the Save button. 4. The Study Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above will change to the filename you chose in step 3. You now have a new, blank Study Notes file. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 148
  • 149. CHAPTER 10: THE STUDY NOTES Opening a Study Notes File To open a new Study Note file: WARNING: If you open a file from a different folder location, the Study Notes Editor shows only the Study Note files from that folder in the popup menu at the bottom of the Editor window. That means the popup menu will show only the filenames in the folder where you opened the file. 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Study Notes Window. 2. Click the Open option from the menu. 3. Choose a filename and click the Open button. 4. The Study Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the filename you selected in step 3. Changing Where e-Sword Reads Study Notes - Advanced Most users do not need to change where e-Sword reads Study Notes files. Advanced users may want to read from a different location. And some users who upgrade from a previous version may have changed where e-Sword reads Study Notes files. Each Note Editor uses its own folder setting. By default, all three Editors read from the e- Sword user folder, typically “My Documentse-sword”. However, each Editor Type can read from a different location. WARNING: Changing the folder the Study Notes Editor reads may result in you not being able to find your other Study Notes files. For example, if you have multiple study notes files in one folder, but you change where e-Sword reads Study Notes files, you will not be able to view your other Study Notes files. In that situation, you must either change the folder where the Study Notes reads or move your study notes to the new folder. To change the folder where e-Sword reads Study Notes: 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Study Notes window. 2. Click the Open option. 3. Navigate to the folder where e-Sword should read Study Notes. 4. Choose a filename and click the Open button. 5. The Study Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the filename you selected in step 4. And the popup menu at the bottom of the Editors window now shows only the files from the new folder you selected in step 4. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 149
  • 150. Chapter 11: Topic Notes The Topic Notes feature allows you to write topical notes about subjects that interest you, similar to notes some people make on blank pages at the end of their printed Bible. Here, you can record your personal discoveries and conclusions about different subjects in the Bible. Topic Notes are subject-based. My default, e-Sword creates the file “topic.topx” in your e-Sword user folder, usually “My Documentse-Sword”, to store your topic entries. What’s in this Chapter? Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library? .................................................151 e-Sword 9 Users: Can’t Find your Topic Notes? .............................................................152 Viewing Your Topic Notes...............................................................................................152 Creating a Topic Note .....................................................................................................153 Editing a Topic Note .......................................................................................................154 Optimizing Topic Notes Files with Images ......................................................................155 Deleting a Topic Note .....................................................................................................155 Searching Topic Notes ...................................................................................................156 Additional Search Options Wheel ...................................................................................157 Copying from the Bible to Your Topic Notes ...................................................................159 Copying from Other Windows to Topic Notes .................................................................160 Importing and Exporting Topic Notes ..............................................................................161 Managing More than One Topic Notes File - Advanced ..................................................162 Changing Where e-Sword Reads Topic Notes - Advanced .............................................164 Reference Library (.REFX) Files .....................................................................................165 When to Use Reference Book Files ................................................................................165 How to Convert Topic Notes to Reference Book Format .................................................165 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 150
  • 151. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library? In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes Editor displayed third party Topic Notes (Topic Notes you downloaded). Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library instead of the Topic Notes Editor. By comparison, the Topic Notes Editor is now for your personal topical notes (topical notes you wrote), just like the Journal Notes are for your personal journal notes and the Study Notes are for your personal study notes. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 151
  • 152. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES e-Sword 9 Users: Can’t Find your Topic Notes? If you upgraded from e-Sword 9 and cannot find your Topic Notes, you most likely stored your Topic Notes in the “program filese-sword” folder. You can view those Topic Notes from the Reference Library, see Chapter 13. You can control where the Reference Library looks for resources by reading the Changing Your e-Sword Resource Location section. Topic Notes you need to edit: move these files to your e-Sword user folder, usually “My Documentse-Sword”. If necessary, follow the instructions in “Changing Where e-Sword Reads Topic Notes” so e-Sword reads the proper folder to display your Topic Note files. Topic Notes you only need to view: move these files to your e-Sword install folder, usually “Program Filese-Sword”. Then view them from the Reference Library (see Chapter 13). Viewing Your Topic Notes • To view all of your Topic Notes, click the Topic Menu, shown below. • To view a specific topic, left-click the topic with the mouse. • If you have multiple Topic files, you can view a different Topic file by clicking the popup menu at the bottom of the Editor window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 152
  • 153. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Creating a Topic Note To create a topic note: 1. Click the New Topic icon in the Editors window. 2. Enter the title of the topic you want to create. 3. Notice the new entry topic title appears in the Editor toolbar. 4. Type your notes for this topic. Click the Save icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword. TIP: You can create popup Scripture "ToolTips" in your own Notes! Just select an existing verse reference, like John 3:16, and click the Format Scripture ToolTip icon (or press Ctrl-J). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 153
  • 154. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Editing a Topic Note You can edit any Topic Note you previously wrote: 1. Navigate to the topic in the Editors window (see larger red box below): 2. Edit your topic note and click the Save icon to save your notes. It's a good idea to save your notes before navigating elsewhere in e-Sword. 3. Click the Edit Topic Title icon (smaller red box above). 4. A window will appear allowing you to change the name of the topic title. Click the OK button to save changes or CANCEL to cancel changes. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 154
  • 155. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Optimizing Topic Notes Files with Images Chapter 8, “Introduction to the Editors”, explains how to use and embed images in the Notes Editor. How Image Bloat Happens If you insert and then remove images from a Topic Note, the size of the file may become unnecessarily large. e-Sword uses the SQLite database format to store Topic Note data. When you insert an image, the size of the database expands to accommodate the image data. When you delete the image from a Topic Note, the database does not automatically contract. Even though the image is deleted, the database is still the same size! This wastes system resources and if you distribute the module to others, the module requires more downloading time and bandwidth. Removing Image Bloat e-Sword compacts the Topic Notes database when you delete a topic note. To make sure your Topic Notes module is the smallest size possible: 1. Click the New Topic icon. 2. Enter the title of the topic you want to create. 3. Click the Delete Topic icon to delete the topic you just created. You should not worry about this issue if you occasionally use images in your personal Topic Notes. However, if you make modules for downloading by other people, you might consider making this a standard practice to produce the smallest files possible. Deleting a Topic Note Make sure that the specific topic you want to delete appears in the text box of the drop down list. Click the Delete Topic icon. The following dialog box appears: If you are sure you want to delete the topic, click OK. Otherwise, click No. You cannot undelete or undo this action! e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 155
  • 156. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Searching Topic Notes To search your Topic Notes: 1. Click the Locate Notes icon in the Topic Notes Editor. 2. The Locate Topic Notes window will appear. Type the search word(s) in the first field. Not sure how to spell your search terms? Take your best guess and then click the spell check icon . 3. In the screenshot above, we typed, "body of Christ" in the search box. 4. We selected Search for all of the words from the drop down menu to find only Topic Notes with all words from our search phrase. 5. Click the Search icon in the upper, right corner of this window. The search results are categorized by topic on the left, as shown above. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 156
  • 157. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES 6. After reviewing the search results, press the OK button. This closes the search window and displays the full text of the Topic Note you chose. TIP: If we selected, Search for any of the words, e-Sword would have displayed search results with all words from our search phrase (“body” and “of” and “Christ”). Topic Notes would have been shown if they contained all the words as separate words anywhere in the Topic Note. Be careful how you refine your search. Additional Search Options Wheel For an even more specific search, click the search wheel, (shown in red below). You may use this more specific search with or without Regular Expressions, discussed in Chapter 22. Case Sensitive: When checked, this option makes your search case sensitive to find “Word” with an upper-case “W” (see above). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 157
  • 158. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Partial Search: Below, we searched for "bapti". Notice the results for variations of our search phrase, including “baptized”, “baptism”, “baptizing”, etc. (see below). Synonyms: You can search for your search phrase and synonyms of your search phrase. In the example below, the synonyms for atonement include, “redemption”, “atone”, etc. The synonym box will be grayed-out (unavailable) unless Search for any of the words is chosen (see below). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 158
  • 159. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Copying from the Bible to Your Topic Notes In addition to copying with this method, you can also apply formatting to copied verses with the Copy Verses command documented in the Chapter 3, “The Bible Windows In-Depth”. To copy Psalms 33:6 into your Topic Notes: 1. Navigate to Psalms 33:6 in the Topic Notes Editor window. Left-click the mouse where you want to paste the verse. 2. Right-click the verse in the Bible window and select Paste Into Topic Notes. (To paste more than one verse, select the verses you want to paste before right-clicking and choosing Paste Into Topic Notes.) 3. The verse appears in your Topic Notes. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 159
  • 160. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Copying from Other Windows to Topic Notes When copying from the other windows, such as the Commentaries, Dictionaries, Reference Library, etc. to the Topic Notes editor, you have two options: 1. Copy the entire text to the Topic Notes window. 2. Copy an excerpt of the text to the Topic Notes window. Copying the Entire Text 1. Place your cursor in the Topic Notes window where you want the copied text to appear. 2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy. 3. Click the Select All icon or right click anywhere in the text and choose Select All from the menu. The complete text appearing in the window will be highlighted. 4. With the text still selected, right-click and select Paste into Topic Notes (be sure your Topic Notes are open to the correct verse). The selected text will be copied into your Topic Notes at the location where you last placed your cursor. Copying an Excerpt 1. Place your cursor in the Topic Note window where the copied text should appear. 2. Find the window containing the text you want to copy. 3. Select the part of the text you want to copy to Topic Notes by highlighting (left click the mouse and drag to select) the text. 4. Right click and select Paste into Topic Notes. Only the selected text will paste. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 160
  • 161. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Importing and Exporting Topic Notes e-Sword lets you import data (text, images, tables, etc.) into Topic Notes. You can also export your Topic Notes to other file formats. The import option includes (or imports) text into your Topic Notes from other files. You can import the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), and txt (plain text). To import a file: 1. Select a verse from the Topic Notes Editor. The text you import will appear in this Topic Note. 2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Import button. 3. Navigate to the folder containing the file to import, select the file, and click Open. 4. The text from your document will appear in the verse you selected in Step 1 above. The export option creates an external file (separate from e-Sword) containing your Topic Note. You can export the following file types: html, doc (Microsoft Word), rtf (Rich Text Format), txt (plain text), and pdf. To export a Topic note: 1. Select the Topic Note you want to export by navigating to that verse in the Topic Notes Editor. 2. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse. Click the Export button. 3. Navigate to the folder that will contain your exported file, provide a name for your file, and click save. You may need to adjust the “Save as type” setting to specify the file format e-Sword uses to export your data. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 161
  • 162. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Managing More than One Topic Notes File - Advanced Advanced users may want to create and edit more than one Topic Notes file. The default name for the Topic Notes file is “topic.topx” and is typically stored in “My Documentse-sword”, or the location of your e-Sword user folder. This configuration meets the needs of the majority of e-Sword users. If you do not need additional files or do not feel comfortable with the instructions that follow, you may not need this functionality. At the bottom of the screen below, the popup menu is outlined in red. The default Topic Note file, topic.topx, is the currently selected file. To view a different file, select the Topic Note from the menu. Creating a New Topic Notes File To create a new Topic Notes file: 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Topic Notes Window. 2. Click the New button. 3. Specify a filename and click the Save button. 4. The Topic Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the filename you chose in step 3. You now have a new, blank Topic Notes file. 5. See the “Creating a Topic Note” section for instructions on adding a Topic Note to the Topic File. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 162
  • 163. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Opening a Topic Notes File To open a Topic Note file: WARNING: If you open a file from a different folder location, the Topic Notes Editor shows only the Topic Note files from that folder in the popup menu at the bottom of the Editor window. That means the popup menu will show only the filenames in the folder where you opened the file. 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Topic Notes Window. 2. Click the Open option. 3. Choose a filename and click the Open button. 4. The Topic Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the filename you selected in step 3. e-Sword 9 Users: Can’t Find your Topic Notes? If you upgraded from e-Sword 9 and cannot find your Topic Notes, you most likely stored your Topic Notes in your “program filese-sword” folder. You can view those Topic Notes from the Reference Library (see Chapter 13). You can control where the Reference Library looks for resources by reading the Changing Your e-Sword Resource Location section. In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes Editor displayed third party Topic Notes (Topic Notes you downloaded). Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library instead of the Topic Notes Editor. By comparison, the Topic Notes Editor is now for your personal topical notes (topical notes you wrote), just like the Journal Notes are for your personal journal notes and the Study Notes are for your personal study notes. Topic Notes you need to edit: move these files to your e-Sword user folder, usually “My Documentse-Sword”. If necessary, follow the instructions in “Changing Where e-Sword Reads Topic Notes” so e-Sword reads the proper folder to display your Topic Note files. Topic Notes you only need to view: move these files to your e-Sword install folder, usually “Program Filese-Sword”. Then view them from the Reference Library (see Chapter 13). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 163
  • 164. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Changing Where e-Sword Reads Topic Notes - Advanced Most users do not need to change where e-Sword reads Topic Notes files. Advanced users may want to read from a different location. And some users who upgrade from a previous version may have changed where e-Sword reads Topic Notes files. Each Note Editor uses its own folder setting. By default, all three Editors read from the e- Sword user folder, typically “My Documentse-sword”. However, each Editor Type can read from a different location. WARNING: Changing the folder the Topic Notes Editor reads may result in you not being able to find your other Topic Notes files. For example, if you have multiple Topic Notes files in one folder but you change where e-Sword reads Topic Notes files, you will not be able to view your other Topic Notes files. In that situation, you must either change the folder where the Topic Notes Editor reads or move your Topic Notes to the new folder. To change the folder where the e-Sword reads Topic Notes: 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Topic Notes Window. 2. Click the Open option. 3. Navigate to the folder where e-Sword should read Topic Notes. 4. Choose a filename and click the Open button. 5. The Topic Notes file shown at the bottom of the screen above changes to the filename you selected in step 4. And the popup menu at the bottom of the Editors window now shows only the files from the new folder you selected in step 4. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 164
  • 165. CHAPTER 11: TOPIC NOTES Reference Library (.REFX) Files e-Sword supports a new file format for the Reference Library. Reference Book files are identical to Topic files except Reference Book files are compressed to save disk space. If you distribute REFX files to other e-Sword users, Reference Book files cannot be edited or changed. One of the criticisms about Topics files has been that anyone can change the content of a Topic file, effectively “putting words in the mouth” of its author. The Reference Book format prevents such casual tampering. When to Use Reference Book Files You can convert your Topic Notes files (.topx) to Reference Book (.refx) format. You are not required to convert your Topic Notes files to Reference Book format. The Reference Library will read Topic Notes files and Reference Book files. If you simply want to view your Topic Notes in the Reference Library, copy the Topic Note files to your e-Sword resource folder, usually “c:program filese-sword”. You can control where the Reference Library looks for resources by reading the Changing Your e-Sword Resource Location section. Why Convert to Reference Book Files Then? Most of the time, users will not need to create Reference Book files. Reference Book files should be used in three situations: 1. You do not want your content changed. Or if your content is copyrighted and you do not wanted the material easily distributed beyond e-Sword. 2. You used e-Sword’s new image/picture functionality and the resource is large because of the added pictures. The REFX format compresses the data. In one of our tests, a 4mb file compressed to 600kb, a reduction of about 7 times! Smaller files require less hard drive space, less computer memory, and generally help e-Sword run faster. 3. You lack the technical skills to copy your Topic files to the e-Sword resource folder, usually “c:program filese-sword”. During the conversion to Reference Book format , the converted REFX files are moved to your e-Sword install folder. How to Convert Topic Notes to Reference Book Format To convert Topic Notes to Reference Book format: 1. While pressing the Ctrl key, right-click the mouse in the Topic Notes window. 2. Click the Convert to Reference Book option. 3. A confirmation box will tell you to restart e- Sword to see the Reference Library book in the Reference Library. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 165
  • 166. Chapter 12: The Dictionaries Window e-Sword provides a Dictionaries window so you can learn the definition of words and Strong’s numbers while using e-Sword. e-Sword extends dictionary functionality beyond the traditional term/definition format. For example, the "Nave's Topical Bible" (Nave) and "Torrey's New Topical Textbook" (Torrey) are specialty dictionary modules. These excellent resources contain many cross references, perfect for conducting in-depth studies on specific Biblical topics. What’s in this Chapter? Using Dictionaries ...........................................................................................................167 Quick Lookup Inside the Dictionary .................................................................................168 Viewing Your Dictionary Search History..........................................................................169 Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window ......................................170 Searching a Dictionary ....................................................................................................171 Searching More Than One Dictionary Simultaneously ....................................................171 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 166
  • 167. CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW Using Dictionaries When you click a word in any tab or window, all dictionaries containing information about the selected word will display the blue (i) Information Icon. The word you click does not have to be a hyperlink or tooltip link. The word can simply be normal text. TIP: If the Dictionary window stops displaying new information when you click new words, make sure the Link icon is pressed. Also remember that a dictionary may not necessarily have a definition for every word. Topics List and Performance If your dictionary view does not contain a list of entries (see the list above beginning with “Abiding”), click the Dictionary Topics icon. By default, the Dictionary Topics icon is already pressed. PERFORMANCE: If a dictionary reacts or performs slowly, disable the display of Dictionary Topics. If enabled, the Dictionary Topics display must load before you can use the dictionary. This can make switching between resource tabs slow for large dictionaries. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 167
  • 168. CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW Quick Lookup Inside the Dictionary While using a dictionary, you may want to lookup a word appearing in the text of the dictionary itself. 1. Right-click the word to display the following menu options: 2. Click Lookup and the definition displays in your current dictionary (if available) and the blue (i) Information Icon appears for other dictionaries with matching entries. TIP: You can bypass the context menu shown above. While pressing the Ctrl key, click a word in the dictionary to view it’s definition. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 168
  • 169. CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW Viewing Your Dictionary Search History e-Sword “remembers” which dictionary entries you viewed this session. To cycle back through previous entries, click the blue back arrow at the beginning of the Dictionaries toolbar. If you viewed entries from more than one dictionary, the dictionary tab view will not automatically change. The blue (i) Information Icon appears in the dictionary tabs with matching entries to your previous queries. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 169
  • 170. CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW Viewing Strong’s Number Definitions in the Dictionary Window The study of Hebrew and Greek text, without first learning Hebrew or Greek, is one of e- Sword's most powerful features. This is accomplished through the Strong's number system. James Strong assigned every unique Hebrew and Greek word in the Bible a number. Thanks to Strong’s numbers, we are able to easily search the Scriptures to locate Hebrew and Greek words. Strong’s Number Basics The Old Testament was written in Hebrew, and the New Testament was written in Greek. The Strong’s numbering system formats the Old Testament in Hebrew with an “H” in front of the number and the New Testament Greek with a “G” in front of the number. For example, the reference, “H430,” refers to Old Testament. “G430” represents a word in the New Testament and has no correlation to the Hebrew “H430” word. When you find a Strong's number elsewhere in e-Sword, you can view the definition in the Dictionary window: 1. Confirm the link icon is “pressed”. 2. Click the Strong’s number. 3. The blue (i) information icons appear on the resource tabs of the Dictionaries window (be sure the link icon is selected). TIP: Strong’s numbers can be viewed without leaving your current window, if you only need a quick definition. Strong's definitions can be displayed as "ToolTips". Place the mouse pointer over a Strong's number to display the definition in a ToolTip popup. MEGA TIP: Press the F4 button to copy the Strong’s definition to the Windows clipboard. You can paste (Ctrl-V) the definition into the Notes Editor or your own word processor! e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 170
  • 171. CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW Searching a Dictionary The Dictionaries search is nearly identical to the Bible and Reference Library search. Click the Search Dictionaries icon, or click Dictionaries from the main menu and choose Search. When the Search window opens, type the word you want to search and select your search criteria. Click the Search icon and a search will be done in the active dictionary. For more information on using the dictionary search features, see the search instructions in Chapter 3 and Chapter 13. Also see Chapter 22 for an explanation of Regular Expression Searching. Searching More Than One Dictionary Simultaneously To search multiple dictionaries at once, select Dictionary from the main menu and choose Extended Search. When the Extended Search window opens, you can select which dictionaries to search. Click the Dictionaries icon highlighted in red below. For more information on using the dictionary search features, see the extended search instructions in Chapter 3 and Chapter 13. Also see Chapter 22 for an explanation of Regular Expression Searching. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 171
  • 172. CHAPTER 12: THE DICTIONARIES WINDOW e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 172
  • 173. Chapter 13: Reference Library The Reference Library is now the central place to view your downloaded Topic files and a new type of file called Reference Modules (.refx). Material available from the Reference Library includes books, essays, and papers written by other authors. Some may be as short as a few pages, and other resources may contain thousands of pages. For example, BibleSupport.com hosts a number of William Evans’ and F.B. Meyer’s books in Reference Book format. You can also download official Reference Modules through the e-Sword Module Downloader. With the Reference Library you can: • Select resources to read with the drop down menu near the top of the screen. • Filter your resources by title, which is helpful for narrowing large libraries. • Search all of your Topic Notes and Reference Library Books at once! The Reference Library displays .refx modules and .topx modules. What’s in this Chapter? Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library? .................................................174 Why Can’t I View Topic Notes Files in the Reference Library?........................................174 Opening the Reference Library .......................................................................................174 Reference Library: Background, Foreground, Resizing ...................................................175 Viewing Resources in the Reference Library ..................................................................176 Filtering Resources in the Reference Library ..................................................................176 Searching the Reference Library - Basic.........................................................................177 Additional Search Options Wheel ...................................................................................179 Searching the Reference Library - Advanced..................................................................181 Extended Search - Multiple Reference Books .................................................................182 Paste Into Topic Notes ...................................................................................................183 Highlighting Text .............................................................................................................183 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 173
  • 174. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY Viewing Resources: Topic Editor or Reference Library? In previous versions of e-Sword, the Topic Notes Editor displayed third party Topic Notes (Topic Notes you downloaded). Now, this material is viewed through the Reference Library instead of the Topic Notes tab (of the Editors window). The Reference Library is view-only, like Bibles, Commentaries, and Dictionaries. You cannot edit topic notes through the Reference Library. By comparison, the Topic Notes tab (of the Editors Window) is now for your personal topical notes (topical notes you wrote), just like the Journal Notes are for your personal journal notes and the Study Notes are for your personal study notes. Why Can’t I View Topic Notes Files in the Reference Library? By default, e-Sword 10 expects your third party Topic Notes to be in your e-Sword resource folder, usually “c:program filese-sword”. You can control where e-Sword looks for resources by reviewing the “Changing Your e-Sword Resource Location” section. If your downloaded Topic Notes are in the My Documentse-sword folder, or another folder, you must move them to your e-Sword resource folder for the Reference Library to find them. Remember, this only applies to your downloaded, or third party, Topic Notes. Your personal topic notes—the topical notes you wrote—should remain in the “My Documentse-sword” folder so you can continue editing them in the Topic Notes Editor. Opening the Reference Library The Reference Library is represented on the main e-Sword screen with a small icon, highlighted in red below: Reference You can also open the Reference Library by clicking Tools from the Library main menu and then choosing Reference Library. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 174
  • 175. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY Reference Library: Background, Foreground, Resizing The Reference Library window “floats” on top of e-Sword’s main window. You can access the e-Sword main window without closing the Reference Library window. For example, if you need to reference the Bible, lookup a definition, view commentary text, or create a Study Note, click the e-Sword main window in the background. You may also move the e-Sword main window and the Reference Library window so they are offset or in any orientation that suits your monitor. Lastly, you may resize the Reference Library window larger or smaller (see Chapter 2, “Customizing e-Sword”). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 175
  • 176. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY Viewing Resources in the Reference Library With the Reference Library, you can select resources to read with the drop down menu near the top of the screen. Each resource’s sections, or chapters, appear on the left side of the screen. The section or chapter text is shown on the right side of the screen. In the example below, you can see the other resources available in the Reference Library. Filtering Resources in the Reference Library If you have numerous resources, you can filter your resources by title. In the example below, the only resources showing contain the word “evans”. After typing your keyword filter, click the Filter Title icons (shown in red below). . e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 176
  • 177. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY Searching the Reference Library - Basic 1. To search the Reference Library, make sure the Reference Library is open and the active resource is the one you want to search. 2. Click the search icon in the Reference Library window. Or, click Library from the Reference Library menu and then select Search. 3. A search window appears. At the top of the search window, you will see the name of the resource you were viewing when you opened the search window. Your search is limited to this resource. To search a different resource, select a new resource from the drop down menu. 4. Type your search word(s) in the first field. Not sure how to spell your search terms? Take your best guess and then click the Spell Check icon . 5. In the screenshot above, we typed, "new testament" in the search box. 6. We selected Search for all of the words from the drop down menu to find only resources with all the words from our search phrase. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 177
  • 178. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY 7. Click the search icon in the upper, right corner of this window. The search results are categorized by section on the left. 8. After reviewing the search results, press the OK button. This closes the search window and displays the full text of the section or chapter you chose. TIP: If we selected, Search for any of the words, e-Sword would have displayed search results for any chapter with both words from our search phrase (“new” and “testament”). These results would not necessarily have been discussing the New Testament. Be careful how you refine your search. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 178
  • 179. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY Additional Search Options Wheel For an even more specific search, click the search wheel, (shown in red below). You may use this more specific search with or without Regular Expressions, discussed in Chapter 22. Case Sensitive: When checked, this option will make your search case sensitive to find “god” with a lower-case “g” (see above). Partial Search: Below, we searched for "scriptur". Notice the results for variations of our search phrase, including “Scripture”, “Scriptures”, and “Scriptural” (see below). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 179
  • 180. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY Synonyms: You can search for your search phrase and synonyms of your search phrase. In the example below, the synonyms found include, “The word”, “Scripture”, “New Testament” and “Old Testament”. The synonym box will be grayed-out (unavailable) unless Search for any of the words is chosen (see below). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 180
  • 181. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY Searching the Reference Library - Advanced Regular Expressions, also referred to as REGEX or REGEXP, use special codes to match patterns of text in powerful ways. In e-Sword, regular expressions allow you to search the Bible beyond the search methods you previously used. This section is a very brief introduction to searching with Regular Expressions using e-Sword. Chapter 22 covers this functionality in much greater detail. If we select Regular expressions from the drop down list, we can perform a much broader "wild card" search. For example, in the window below, we searched for words starting with “s” and ending in “e” by typing b (the symbol for word boundary) followed by l...e and closed with the word boundary symbol b. For more information on searching with Regular Expressions and it’s exceptional power, see Chapter 22. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 181
  • 182. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY Extended Search - Multiple Reference Books To search for words or phrases across multiple resources, click Library on the Reference Library menu, and then select Extended Search. TIP: The more resources you search at once and the longer the resources are in length, the more time e-Sword will need to complete the search. Searching thousands of resources may require a long time. The progress bar shows the current status of the search. You may press the Escape key to abort a search, while showing the results already found. This window is almost identical to the basic Reference Library Search function, but it allows you to select multiple resources. Reference Books icon: This icon, shown in the red box above, displays the Resource Window (also shown above). The Resource Window lets you choose which resources to include in your search. Search Summary In left column of the window above, the first box shows the name of the chapter (or section) with matching text. The second box shows the name of the resource where the match was found. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 182
  • 183. CHAPTER 13: REFERENCE LIBRARY Paste Into Topic Notes As with most windows in e-Sword, the Reference Library lets you paste selected text into your Journal, Study, or Topic Notes. 1. Click the main e-Sword window behind the Reference Library. 2. Select either the Journal Notes, Study Notes, or Topic Notes tab from the Editors Window. 3. In the Reference Library window, select the text you want to copy. 4. Click the Paste Into Topic Notes icon . TIP: After selecting text to copy, you can also right-click the mouse and choose Paste Into Notes from the context menu. Highlighting Text e-Sword supports highlighting text in the Reference Library window. Select the text you want to highlight and press the Highlight icon . For more information on Highlighting text, see Chapter 4. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 183
  • 184. Chapter 14: The Bible Reading Plan The Bible Reading Plan will organize and structure your Bible reading. Bible Reading plans help you stay on track, often with a specific goal such as reading the entire Bible in a year, reading the Old Testament in six months, or reading the Psalms. Since you can make your own Bible Reading Plans, you control when and how often you read. You can configure the Bible Reading Plan window to automatically launch when you start e- Sword for the first time each day. What’s in this Chapter? Opening Bible Reading Plans .........................................................................................185 Using Bible Reading Plans .............................................................................................186 Creating a Bible Reading Plan ........................................................................................187 Show at Startup ..............................................................................................................187 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 184
  • 185. CHAPTER 14: THE BIBLE READING PLAN Opening Bible Reading Plans To open Bible Reading Plans, select Tools from the main menu and then choose Bible Reading. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 185
  • 186. CHAPTER 14: THE BIBLE READING PLAN Using Bible Reading Plans The Reading Plan Progress meter displays your progress toward accomplishing the plan’s goal. Bible Reading Plans can be organized in different ways but our example below allows for 365 days (see large red box). Previous Reading and Next Reading The Next Reading icon shows you the next passage in the reading plan. You can also click the Previous Reading icon. Incrementing the Reading Plan Progress Bar As you read each passage, click the Completed Reading icon. The icon turns from red to green to remind you the passage has been read. View Chapter as Paragraph This toggle icon switches between the verse view shown on the previous page and a paragraph view that displays each chapter as a paragraph. Changing Bible Reading Plans From the drop down menu at the bottom of the Bible Reading window, select the reading plan: e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 186
  • 187. CHAPTER 14: THE BIBLE READING PLAN Creating a Bible Reading Plan To create a Bible Reading Plan: 1. Click the New Bible Reading Plan icon. 2. Click the plus signs to expand the Books of the Bible lists, starting with “Bible”. 3. Select as little as one book or as much as the entire Bible. 4. Click the Next button. 5. Select the days of the week you will use the Bible Reading Plan. 6. Select the time needed to complete the reading. e-Sword compares the number of books you selected with your chosen timeframe to calculate the time necessary to complete the plan. 7. Save your reading plan by entering a filename and clicking the Finish button. Show at Startup This handy feature reminds you about your Bible Reading Plan when you start e-Sword for the first time that day. The Bible Reading window will not show for subsequent starts during the same day. Tick the box marked, "Show at Startup" at the bottom of the Bible Reading window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 187
  • 188. Chapter 15: Daily Devotions e-Sword includes a Daily Devotions section containing devotions by Spurgeon. You can also download other official e-Sword devotions, such as Hoekstra, Morrison, Meyer and Ryle. To download new devotions, select Download from the main menu and then select Devotions. You may also visit BibleSupport.com for additional, user-created devotionals. You can configure the Daily Devotions window to automatically launch when you start e-Sword for the first time each day. What’s in this Chapter? Opening the Daily Devotions ..........................................................................................189 Using the Daily Devotions ...............................................................................................189 Show Devotions at Startup .............................................................................................190 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 188
  • 189. CHAPTER 15: DAILY DEVOTIONS Opening the Daily Devotions To open the Daily Devotions, select Tools from the main menu and choose Daily Devotions. Your installed devotions are shown in the tabs at the top of the window. Using the Daily Devotions Select the day you want to read using the Date Display Box at the bottom of the window. The current day's devotion appears automatically, but you may select any other day's devotion. Click the date bar and the following popup window appears: Use the forward and back arrows to select the desired month. Then click the day you want to read. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 189
  • 190. CHAPTER 15: DAILY DEVOTIONS Show Devotions at Startup This handy feature allows e-Sword to remind you about Devotions when you start e-Sword for the first time that day. The Devotions window will not show for subsequent starts during the same day. Tick the box marked, "Show at Startup" at the top of the Daily Devotions window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 190
  • 191. Chapter 16: Prayer Requests We should never forget the power of prayer. With this feature, e-Sword reminds us to pray and helps us remember what to pray about. You can configure the Prayer Requests window to automatically launch when you start e-Sword for the first time each day. What’s in this Chapter? Opening Prayer Requests...............................................................................................192 Viewing Prayer Requests................................................................................................192 Adding Prayer Requests .................................................................................................192 Editing or Deleting a Prayer Request ..............................................................................193 Managing Prayer Request Files ......................................................................................195 Show Prayer Requests at Startup ...................................................................................196 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 191
  • 192. CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS Opening Prayer Requests The prayer request feature adds organization and remembrance to your prayer life. To open the window, select Tools from the main menu, and choose Prayer Requests. Each prayer request is labeled with these abbreviations: A - Adoration C - Confession T - Thanksgiving S – Supplication Viewing Prayer Requests You can view your prayer requests by clicking the title of the prayer request from the Today’s Prayer Requests tab. Adding Prayer Requests Add a new request using the Request Maintenance tab: e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 192
  • 193. CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS 1. Click the Add button to add a new Prayer Request. 2. Enter the following information: Prayer Request Type: Select the Prayer Request category. Prayer Request Start Date: The prayer request will not appear in the Today’s Prayer Requests tab until your selected start date. Prayer Request Frequency: Select between Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Answered. If you select “weekly”, the prayer request appears in the Today’s Prayer Requests tab on the same day of the week as your start date. If you select “monthly”, the prayer request appears in the Today’s Prayer Requests tab on the same day of the month as your start date. Prayer Description: Enter what you need to pray for in the bottom half of the window. 3. Click Update to add the request or Cancel to exit without saving. Editing or Deleting a Prayer Request To edit a Prayer Request: 1. Click the Request Maintenance tab. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 193
  • 194. CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS 2. Click the prayer request title you want to edit. 3. Click Edit. 4. Edit any of the following information: • Prayer Request Title • Prayer Request Type • Prayer Request Start Date • The Prayer Request Frequency, and • The Prayer Request Details 5. After you finish editing the prayer request, click the Update button. To delete a prayer request: 1. Click the prayer request title you want to delete. 2. Click the Delete button 3. Confirm your request by clicking Yes. Cancel the delete by clicking No. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 194
  • 195. CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS Managing Prayer Request Files If more than one person uses e-Sword on the same computer or if you want to categorize your prayer requests in different files, you can create a new prayer request file. By default, e-Sword stores prayer requests in the prayer.prlx file in your e-Sword user folder, usually “My Documentse-Sword”. Creating Prayer Request Files To create a Prayer Request file: 1. Click the Request Maintenance tab. 2. Click the New Prayer Requests File button. 3. Specify a new filename and click the Save button. Loading Prayer Request Files After creating at least one other Prayer Request file, e-Sword displays your Prayer Request files in a drop down menu at the bottom of the window. Click another Prayer Request file to show requests from that file: e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 195
  • 196. CHAPTER 16: PRAYER REQUESTS Show Prayer Requests at Startup This handy feature reminds you about Prayer Requests when you start e-Sword for the first time that day. The Prayer Requests window will not show for subsequent starts during the same day. Tick the box marked, "Show at Startup" at the top of the Prayer Requests window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 196
  • 197. Chapter 17: Scripture Memory “I have stored up your word in my heart, that I might not sin against you,” — Psalms 119:11. The Scripture Memory tool organizes your scripture memorization goals and makes memorizing verses entertaining. This feature includes several puzzle-style word games that children (and adults) enjoy playing. You can configure the Scripture Memory window to automatically launch when you start e- Sword for the first time each day. What’s in this Chapter? Opening Scripture Memory .............................................................................................198 Viewing Verses to Memorize ..........................................................................................198 Adding Scripture Memory ...............................................................................................199 Editing or Deleting a Memory Verse ...............................................................................200 Testing Memory Verses ..................................................................................................201 Managing Memory Verse Files .......................................................................................203 Show Memory Verses at Startup ....................................................................................204 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 197
  • 198. CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY Opening Scripture Memory The Scripture Memory feature organizes your scripture memorization goals. To open the Scripture Memory window, select Tools from the main menu and choose Scripture Memory. Viewing Verses to Memorize You can view your memorization verses by clicking the verse in the Today’s Memory Verses tab. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 198
  • 199. CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY Adding Scripture Memory Add a new Memory Verse using the Verse Maintenance tab: 1. Click the Add button to add a new verse. 2. Enter the following information: Memory Verse: Enter the verse you want to memorize. Translation: Select the translation used to display the verse. Verse Memory Category: Select a category for the verse. Hint / General Idea: Displayed as a hint by the Test Memory Verses feature. Start Date: The verse will not appear in the Today’s Memory Verses tab until your selected start date. Verse Frequency: Select between Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Randomly, or Memorized. If you select “weekly”, the verse appears in the Today’s Memory Verses tab on the same day of the week as your start date. If you select “monthly”, the verse appears in the Today’s Memory Verses tab on the same day of the month as your start date. 3. Click the Update button to add the verse or Cancel to exit without saving. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 199
  • 200. CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY Editing or Deleting a Memory Verse To edit a Memory Verse: 1. Click the Verse Maintenance tab. 2. Click the verse you want to edit. 3. Click Edit. 4. Edit any of the following information: Memory Verse: Enter the verse you want to memorize. Translation: Select the translation used to display the verse. Verse Memory Category: Select a category for the verse. Hint / General Idea: Displayed as a hint by the Test Memory Verses feature. Start Date: The verse will not appear in the Today’s Memory Verses tab until your selected start date. Verse Frequency: Select between Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Randomly, or Memorized. If you select “weekly”, the verse appears in the Today’s Memory Verses tab on the same day of the week as your start date. If you select “monthly”, the verse appears in the Today’s Memory Verses tab on the same day of the month as your start date. 5. After you finish editing the verse, click the Update button. To delete a Memory Verse: 1. Click the verse you want to delete. 2. Click the Delete button 3. Confirm your request by clicking Yes. Cancel the delete by clicking No. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 200
  • 201. CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY Testing Memory Verses The multiple choice “tests” and creative word games help you memorize your Memory Verses. The test tabs are shown at the top of the window. The Hint button at the bottom the window displays the “Hint / General Idea” field (see “Editing or Deleting a Memory Verse” above). Each test also includes a color coded error chart. The window background turns a progressively darker shade of red with each error. When the answer is correct, the window background turns a soothing shade of green. Associate Reference Test This is a “multiple choice” style test, requiring you to match the text of the verse with multiple verse references at the bottom of the window (see screenshot above). e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 201
  • 202. CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY Fill In The Blanks Select from the words at the bottom of the screen to fill in the blanks. Start with the first blank word and work your way through the verse. If you make an error, you must try again. Word Position Beginning with the first blank word, you must double click the correct word from the list of words (in the right window pane). Work you way through the blank words until complete. If you make an error, you must try again. First Letter Beginning with the first blank word, enter the first letter of the word. Work you way through the blank words until complete. If you make an error, you must try again. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 202
  • 203. CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY Managing Memory Verse Files If more than one person uses e-Sword on the same computer or if you want to categorize your Memory Verses in different files, you can create a new memory verse file. By default, e-Sword stores memory verses in memory.memx in your e-Sword user folder, usually “My Documentse-Sword”. Creating Memory Verse Files To create a Memory Verse file: 1. Click the Verse Maintenance tab. 2. Click the New Scripture Memory File button. 3. Specify a new filename and click the Save button. Loading Memory Verse Files After creating at least one other Memory Verse file, e-Sword displays your Memory Verse files in a drop down menu at the bottom of the window. Click another Memory Verse file to show verses from that file: e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 203
  • 204. CHAPTER 17: SCRIPTURE MEMORY Show Memory Verses at Startup This handy feature reminds you about Memory Verses when you start e-Sword for the first time that day. The Scripture Memory window will not show for subsequent starts during the same day. Tick the box marked, "Show at Startup" at the top of the Scripture Memory window. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 204
  • 205. Chapter 18: SermonAudio.com e-Sword is integrated with SermonAudio.com. You can listen to sermons while you study the Bible. This window automatically organizes sermons by verse according to the active passage of scripture in the e-Sword Bibles window! After this window opens, you can change the passage of scripture to listen to sermons on other Bible verses. REMEMBER: An active Internet connection is required for e-Sword to connect with SermonAudio.com What’s in this Chapter? Opening the SermonAudio.com Window ........................................................................206 Listening to a Sermon .....................................................................................................206 Listening to Sermons On Different Verses ......................................................................209 Sorting Sermons By Heading ..........................................................................................209 Adjusting the Width of Heading Columns ........................................................................209 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 205
  • 206. CHAPTER 18: SERMONAUDIO.COM Opening the SermonAudio.com Window Click Tools from the main menu and choose SermonAudio.com. This window displays sermons based on the active verse in e-Sword’s Bibles window. The active verse in the Bibles window is highlighted in red. Listening to a Sermon To listen to a sermon, click the sermon title’s blue hyperlink. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 206
  • 207. CHAPTER 18: SERMONAUDIO.COM Learning More About the Speaker or Sermon Click the SermonAudio.com logo to learn more about the speaker or sermon currently playing. If you are not currently playing a sermon, the profile of your last played sermon will load. After the website loads in your browser, you can: • View the speaker’s biographical information. • Download the audio in mp3 format. • Purchase a transcript. • Find podcasts. • Identify the speaker’s most popular sermons. • Browse all the speaker’s sermons. • Locate affiliated churches and broadcasters. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 207
  • 208. CHAPTER 18: SERMONAUDIO.COM Using the Sermon Player You can control the sound with the Sermon Player in the lower, left portion of the window. If you’re unfamiliar with Internet audio players, think of the Sermon Player as an advanced VCR. For ease of explanation, we’ve added a few “sticky notes” to the Sermon Player. The numbered notes are explained below: 1. Rewind: If available, the audio will rewind while you hold this icon. 2. Seek: By moving this icon right or left with your mouse, you can skip forward or backward in the audio playback. 3. Fast Forward: The audio will play at twice the speed while you hold this icon. 4. Play: Click the play icon to start the sermon. 5. Stop: Click the stop icon to stop the sermon. 6. Previous: Skip to the previous sermon, if available. 7. Next: Skip to the next sermon, if available. 8. Mute: Instantly decreases the volume to zero. 9. Volume: Increases or decreases the sound level as you move this icon right or left. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 208
  • 209. CHAPTER 18: SERMONAUDIO.COM Listening to Sermons On Different Verses Initially, the SermonAudio.com window shows sermons based on the active verse in e-Sword’s Bibles window. To display sermon titles on different verses: 1. Click Bible from the SermonAudio.com window menu. 2. Choose Lookup Scripture Reference. The Lookup Scripture Reference window is undocked, meaning the window “floats” and can be moved. Right-click a Bible book name to quickly show sermons from the first verse/chapter. Right-click a chapter number to immediately view sermons on that chapter. Left-click or right-click a verse to show sermons on that verse. Sorting Sermons By Heading You may sort sermons by Reference, Title, Subtitle, Speaker, Date, and Play Count. Click the header field you want to sort by, as shown below with the mouse pointer. By clicking the same header field again, the sort order reverses. Adjusting the Width of Heading Columns You can adjust the width of the heading columns by positioning your mouse pointer over the divider line until the mouse pointer turns into a multi-directional arrow. While left-clicking the mouse, drag the divider line to change width of that heading column e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 209
  • 210. Chapter 19: Sermon Illustrations Sermon Illustrations are helpful for preachers preparing a sermon. Sermon illustrations can bring to life a sermon, illustrating concepts that might otherwise be difficult to explain. You have the option of buying a Sermon Illustration package through e-Sword or building your own Sermon Illustrations database. What’s in this Chapter? Unlocking Sermon Illustrations .......................................................................................211 Opening Sermon Illustrations ..........................................................................................211 Viewing and Copying Sermon Illustrations ......................................................................212 Filtering Sermon Illustrations ..........................................................................................212 Adding Sermon Illustrations ............................................................................................213 Editing or Deleting a Sermon Illustration .........................................................................214 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 210
  • 211. CHAPTER 19: SERMON ILLUSTRATIONS Unlocking Sermon Illustrations The Sermon Illustrations menu option is grayed-out (non-selectable) without the Sermon Illustrations file (illustrations.illx). You can you purchase the fully loaded Sermon Illustrations module from e-Sword.net. The module comes complete with over 4000 Bible illustrations, anecdotes, and poems compiled by AMG Publishers and Pulpit Helps Magazine. You can also download a blank illustrations.illx file from BibleSupport.com to activate the Sermon Illustrations feature. You must add your own sermon illustrations to this blank file, which makes the above purchase option a great deal. Opening Sermon Illustrations To open the Sermon Illustrations window, select Tools from the main menu and then choose Sermon Illustrations. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 211
  • 212. CHAPTER 19: SERMON ILLUSTRATIONS Viewing and Copying Sermon Illustrations 1. View a Sermon Illustration by left-clicking an illustration in the Sermon Illustrations tab. 2. Click the Copy Sermon Illustration button to copy the text. 3. Paste the text into your Topic Notes, Study Notes, or any word processor. Filtering Sermon Illustrations The Illustration Filter is in the Sermon Illustrations tab. The Illustration Filter limits your view of sermon illustrations to help narrow your search. Sermon Illustrations are organized by Scripture and Category. You may also search by keyword. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 212
  • 213. CHAPTER 19: SERMON ILLUSTRATIONS Adding Sermon Illustrations Add a new sermon illustration under the Illustration Maintenance tab: 1. Click the Add button to add a Sermon Illustration. 2. Enter the following information: Illustration Title: Title of your illustration. Illustration Category: Choose an existing category or type a new category. Scripture Reference: Enter any verses this illustration applies to. Sermon Illustration Text: Enter the text into the bottom half of the window. 3. Click the Update button to add the illustration or Cancel to exit without saving. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 213
  • 214. CHAPTER 19: SERMON ILLUSTRATIONS Editing or Deleting a Sermon Illustration To edit a Sermon Illustration: 1. Click the Illustration Maintenance tab. 2. Click the sermon illustration title you want to edit. 3. Click Edit. 4. Edit any of the following information: Illustration Title: Title of your illustration. Illustration Category: Choose an existing category or type a new category. Scripture Reference: Enter any verses this illustration applies to. Sermon Illustration Text: Enter the text into the bottom half of the window. 5. After you finish editing the sermon illustration, click the Update button. To delete a sermon illustration: 1. Click the sermon illustration title you want to delete. 2. Click the Delete button 3. Confirm your request by clicking Yes. Cancel the delete by clicking No. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 214
  • 215. Chapter 20: The Graphics Viewer e-Sword contains a built in Graphics Viewer. Your Bible study will come to life as you explore the maps that coincide with your reading. You can view maps, illustrations and paintings used in your Bible studies or sermons. e-Sword resources will sometimes direct you to a graphic in the Graphics Viewer. What’s in this Chapter? Opening the Graphics Viewer .........................................................................................216 Viewing Graphics ............................................................................................................217 Copying Graphics ...........................................................................................................218 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 215
  • 216. CHAPTER 20: THE GRAPHICS VIEWER Opening the Graphics Viewer The graphics viewer can be accessed by clicking the Graphics Viewer icon on the e-Sword main toolbar. Or, click Tools from the main menu and select Graphics Viewer. TIP: The Graphics Viewer will be inactive if you do not have any installed graphical resources. To use the Graphics Viewer, make sure at least one graphical resource is installed. Download graphics resources by clicking Download from the main menu and choosing Graphics. You may also download graphics files from BibleSupport.com. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 216
  • 217. CHAPTER 20: THE GRAPHICS VIEWER Viewing Graphics Choose from your graphic files by clicking a resource tab above the Map Display window. Selecting Graphics within the Graphic File Many graphics files have more than one graphic. The first graphic in the file is shown after you select a resource tab. Other available graphics are shown in the drop down menu (see below). Panning Graphics Notice how your mouse pointer changes to a hand when you move your mouse inside the Map Display window. Click anywhere in the Map Display window and drag the graphic by holding down the left mouse button. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 217
  • 218. CHAPTER 20: THE GRAPHICS VIEWER Resizing Graphics The Graphics Viewer toolbar contains several icons for resizing graphics: You can resize graphics by clicking the Zoom In and Zoom Out icons . These icons can be clicked repeatedly to adjust the zoom. The Fit All icon resizes the graphic to fit in your viewable window. The Fit Height icon resizes the height of the graphic to fit the viewable window, although the width is allowed to extend beyond the viewable window. The Fit Width icon resizes the width of the graphic to fit the viewable window, although the height is allowed to extend beyond the viewable window. TIP: You can resize the Graphics Viewer window to create a larger viewable window. Then you can see more of a large graphic without panning or resizing the graphic. See Chapter 2, “Customizing e- Sword” for more information on resizing floating windows. Many of these options are also available by clicking View on the Graphics Viewer menu. Copying Graphics You can copy any graphic to your Journal, Study, or Topic Notes in the Editors window or elsewhere on your computer. 1. Display the graphic you want to copy. 2. Click Edit from the Graphics Viewer menu and choose Copy. You may also use the Ctrl-C shortcut to copy. 3. Press Ctrl-V to paste the graphic elsewhere on your computer. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 218
  • 219. Chapter 21: The STEP Reader STEP is an abbreviation for “Standard Template for Electronic Publishing”. This file format was designed for the storage of electronic Bible reference books. STEP is used by QuickVerse, Bible Companion, and other Bible software products. If you already own any of these software titles, the inclusion of the STEP Reader means you can use these resources within e-Sword! If you do not have any STEP files, you may download a sampler step book pack at e-Sword.net under "Extras". You may also download free and purchased Step books at: www.lightbydesign.net What’s in this Chapter? Opening The STEP Reader ............................................................................................220 Viewing STEP Books ......................................................................................................221 Pasting Into Notes .........................................................................................................221 Searching STEP Books ..................................................................................................222 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 219
  • 220. CHAPTER 21: THE STEP READER Opening The STEP Reader To open the STEP Reader, click the Tools from the main menu and choose STEP Reader. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 220
  • 221. CHAPTER 21: THE STEP READER Viewing STEP Books To view STEP books, click File from the STEP Reader menu and choose Open. The STEP Reader divides the screen into two panes: The topical (or scriptural) navigation pane on the left and the text on the right. Pasting Into Notes The STEP Reader supports pasting selected text into your Journal, Study, or Topic Notes. Select the text you want to paste, and click the Paste Into Notes icon. You can also right-click the mouse and choose Paste Into Notes from the context menu. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 221
  • 222. CHAPTER 21: THE STEP READER Searching STEP Books To search a STEP Book: 1. Click the Search tab on the left window pane 2. Select your search criteria and click Search. 3. Your search results appear in the right window pane, with keyword matches shown in yellow. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 222
  • 223. Chapter 22: Searching e-Sword Using Regular Expressions This section is intended for an advanced audience with a technical aptitude. In depth use of this feature requires analytical and complex problem solving skills and knowledge of a search syntax known as Regular Expressions. NOTE: Regular Expressions have been selectively implemented in e-Sword. Not all examples of Regular Expressions found elsewhere will work in e-Sword. If you are running a version earlier than 9.9.1 or newer than 10.0.5, the examples may not work properly because of changes to this feature. Extra contributors to this section include: The tips shown at eStudySource.com and LayHands.com (LayHands.com contains errors in syntax and definition that have been corrected in this manual.). What’s in this Chapter? Regular Expressions.......................................................................................................224 Conventions Used in this Chapter...................................................................................224 Lesson 1: Case sensitive; Characters found anywhere ...................................................225 Lesson 2: Literal vs. Special Meaning Characters...........................................................225 Lesson 3: Word Boundaries ............................................................................................226 Lesson 4: Dot Character .................................................................................................227 Lesson 5: Brackets “[]” ....................................................................................................228 Lesson 6: Range of characters “-”...................................................................................228 Lesson 7: Caret “^” .........................................................................................................229 Lesson 8: Word Characters “w” .....................................................................................230 Lesson 9: Non-Word Characters “W” .............................................................................231 Lesson 10: Pipe Character “|” and Parenthesis “()” ........................................................232 Lesson 11: Digit “d”........................................................................................................233 Lesson 12: Quantifiers "*", "+", and "?" ...........................................................................234 Lesson 13: Curly brackets “{}” .........................................................................................236 Lesson 14: Beginning Verse Anchor “^” ..........................................................................236 Lesson 15: Ending Verse Anchor “$” ..............................................................................237 Lesson 16: Putting It All Together with Useful Examples ................................................238 e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 223
  • 224. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Regular Expressions Regular Expressions, also referred to as REGEX or REGEXP, use special codes to match patterns of text in very powerful (but complicated) ways. In e-Sword, regular expressions allow you to search the Bible beyond the search methods you previously used. Understand that regular expressions see each verse in the Bible as separate characters (letters, numbers, spaces, punctuation, etc.). Humans assemble characters into words as we read, but regular expressions (by default) do not understand words, spaces between words, or punctuation. Regular expressions only see characters. Conventions Used in this Chapter The search pattern examples used in this section may have quotation marks around them. These quotation marks set the text apart from surrounding text for your convenience only. The quotation marks are not apart of the search expression and will cause the expression to fail. Do not include the quotation marks around a search pattern. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 224
  • 225. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 1: Case sensitive; Characters found anywhere If we search for “tax”, e-Sword returns verses with “tax” anywhere in the word. This includes words like taxed, taxes, taxing, and Artaxerxes. The search is also case sensitive, meaning the search will not find “Tax” or “TAX”. Lesson 2: Literal vs. Special Meaning Characters Each character in a search pattern means something to the search. A search for “Jesus Christ” only shows results for “Jesus Christ”, not “Jesus”, “Christ”, or “Christ Jesus”. These search terms are literal characters. e-Sword literally finds these exact characters. Special meaning characters are symbolic. They tell e-Sword how to conduct the search. For example, placing “b” before a search term (like this: “btax) tells e-Sword to only find words beginning with tax. You cannot use special meaning characters to find literal characters. For example, if you want to find every question in the bible, you might search for the “?”. This will not work because the “?” is a special meaning character. e-Sword will attempt to use it’s special meaning, not it’s literal meaning. The following characters have special meaning: ^ . ? * () {} [] | To make a question mark literal, so we can search for it, you must “escape” the question mark by placing a backslash in front, like this: “?” e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 225
  • 226. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 3: Word Boundaries Word boundaries tell e-Sword to match your search using words, not just characters. Search for: btax Explanation: “b” marks the beginning of a word boundary. This tells e-Sword to only find our search letters if they begin a word. Words found: taxed, taxes, taxing, etc. Words not found: Artaxerxes, poll-tax, etc. Search for: taxb Explanation: “b” marks the ending of a word boundary. This tells e-Sword to only find our search letters at the end of a word. Words found: tax, poll-tax etc. Words not found: Artaxerxes, taxes, taxing, taxed Search for: btaxb Explanation: “b” marks the beginning and ending of a word boundary. This tells e-Sword to only find our search letters if “tax” marks the beginning and ending of a word. Words found: tax Words not found: Artaxerxes, taxes, taxing, taxed, poll-tax, etc. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 226
  • 227. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 4: Dot Character The dot represents any one character. Search for: bl.e Explanation: The dot represents any one character. So, the search will return “lie”, “lies”, “lye”, etc. But not “like” or “life” because those words would require more than one character and we only have one dot, allowing for one character. Words found: lie, lies, lye, etc. Words not found: like, life, etc. Search for: bl..e Explanation: The dot represents any one character and we have two dots. So, the search will match “like”, “life”, etc. But not “lie”, “lies”, “lye”, etc. Words found: like, life, etc. Words not found: lie, lies, lye etc. Search for: b.ord Explanation: The dot represents any one character, whether uppercase or lowercase. Words found: lord, Lord, cord, word, etc. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 227
  • 228. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 5: Brackets “[]” Square brackets mean any single character within the square brackets. Search for: [Ll]ord Explanation: Searching for "[Ll]ord" will return all verses containing "Lord" or "lord". Verses found: Verses with Lord or lord. Search for: gr[ae]y Explanation: Searching for gr[ae]y will return all verses containing “gray” or “grey” Verses found: Verses with gray or grey. This is useful when you are not sure how a translation spells a word, gray/grey, color/colour, etc. Lesson 6: Range of characters “-” A range of characters can be specified with [ - ] syntax. Several ranges can be given in one expression. Search for: H307[0-4] Explanation: Locate all verses containing "H3070", "H3071", "H3072", "H3073", or "H3074". Verses found: Verses with "H3070", "H3071", "H3072", "H3073", or "H3074". Verses not found: Verses with “H3075”, “H3076”, etc. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 228
  • 229. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 7: Caret “^” If a character class starts with “^”, then specified characters will not be selected. Search for: H307[^5-9] Explanation: Locate all verses containing "H3070", "H3071", "H3072", "H3073", or "H3074", but it will also match "H307". Verses found: Verses with "H3070", "H3071", "H3072", "H3073", "H3074", “H3080”, etc. Verses not found: Verses with “H3075”, “H3076”, “H3077”, “H3078”, “H3079”. Search for: man[^k] Explanation: Locate all verses containing the characters “man” as long as the characters are not “mankind” or any other word with “man” + “k”. Verses found: Verses with “man” and any other variation of “man” except “mankind” and any other word with “man” + “k”. Verses not found: Verses with “mankind”. A cleaner way to accomplish the above search is to use a negative lookahead assertion: man(?!kind) e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 229
  • 230. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 8: Word Characters “w” This code matches a word character. Word characters include the letters from A - Z (upper-case and lower-case), plus the digits from 0 - 9, plus the underscore _ character. All other characters (spaces, punctuation, etc.) are non-word characters. Building on the brackets in Lesson 5, understand that “w” is an abbreviation for: “[A-Za- z0-9_]”. Search for: selw Explanation: Finds all words which contain "sel" followed immediately by a word character. Words found: "self”, “selves”, “Methuselah, “himself”, “themselves”, etc. Search for: selwb Explanation: Finds all words which contain "sel" followed immediately by a word character and the end of the word. Words found: "self”, “sell”, “closely, “himself”, “myself”, etc. Words not found: " Methuselah”, “themselves”, “selves”, etc. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 230
  • 231. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 9: Non-Word Characters “W” This code matches a non-word character. Word characters include the letters from A - Z (upper-case and lower-case), plus the digits from 0 - 9, plus the underline character. All other characters (spaces, punctuation, etc.) are "non-word characters". Building on the brackets in Lesson 5, understand that “W” is an abbreviation for: "[^A- Za-z0-9_]”. Search for: Wself Explanation: Finds all words which begin with " self". More specifically, this finds a string of characters containing a non-word character (such as a space) followed immediately by "self". Words found: " self", " selfish", " self-control", etc. Words not found: "itself", "herself", "yourself", etc. Search for: "WselfW" Explanation: Finds all occurrences of the word "self" as a stand-alone word. More specifically, this finds a string of characters containing a non-word character (such as a space) followed immediately by "self", followed immediately by a non-word character (such as a space or punctuation). Words found: "self". Since a hyphen is a non-word character, this search will also find words such as "self-control", "self-indulgence", and so on. In a moment we'll see how to exclude hyphenated words. Words not found: "selfish", "yourself", etc. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 231
  • 232. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 10: Pipe Character “|” and Parenthesis “()” The pipe | sign means “or”. Search for: Jesus|God Explanation: Finds all verses with “Jesus” or “God”. The search will return a verse with either term. Verses found: Verses with “Jesus” or “God” Verses not found: Verses not having “Jesus” and not having “God” Parenthesis allow for grouping or to apply a quantifier to all characters in parenthesis (see Lesson 12 for Quantifiers). Search for: lov(e|ed|er|es) Explanation: Alternating text can be enclosed in parentheses "()" and alternatives separated with "|". Searching for "lov(e|ed|er|es|ing)" will locate all verses containing: "love", "loved", "lover", "loved", or "loving". Verses found: Verses "love", "loved", "lover", "loved". Verses not found: Verses containing: “loving”. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 232
  • 233. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 11: Digit “d” "d" matches any digit. “d” is equivalent to "[0-9]" (see Lesson 5 for Brackets). "D" matches any non-numeric character. This is equivalent to "[^0-9]". The examples below are based on a search of the KJV+ Bible. Search for: Hdddb Explanation: Locate all verses containing the a 3 digit Strong’s number H100- H999. The b boundary prevents the search from finding a 3 digit number within a 4 digit number. Verses found: Any 3 digit Strong’s number, such as H100-H999. Verses not found: All other Strong’s numbers. Search for: Ddddb Explanation: Locate all verses containing a non-numeric character, followed by 3 digits. Verses found: Any 3 digit Strong’s number, such as H100-H999 and G100-G999. Verses not found: All other Strong’s numbers. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 233
  • 234. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 12: Quantifiers "*", "+", and "?" Quantifiers specify how many times a character can occur. The asterisk “*” character finds previous character zero or more times. The plus “+” character finds find the previous character one or more times. The question mark “?” character finds the previous character zero or one times. It’s difficult to find practical Bible examples that only use quantifiers (without using other commands in conjunction with quantifiers). So let’s take two hypothetical examples, just to gain an understanding of the concepts. Some of the examples that follow will make practical use of quantifiers. Search for: abc* Explanation: Finds the letter "c" zero or more times. Words found: “ab", "abc", "abcc", "abccc", etc. Search for: ro*t Explanation: Finds the letter "o" zero or more times. Words found: “rot", "brother", "root", "rooted", "birth", words containing “rt”, etc. Search for: abc+ Explanation: Finds the letter "c" one or more times. Words found: “abc", "abcc", "abccc", etc. Words not found: “ab” Search for: ro+t Explanation: Finds the letter "o" one or more times. Words found: rot", "brother", "root", "rooted", etc. If a word had three “o’s”, it would be found. Words not found: words containing “rt”, like birth, because the “o” must be found at least once. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 234
  • 235. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Search for: abc? Explanation: Finds the letter "c" zero or one times only. This differs from the + and * characters because they could find the character one or more times. The question mark is limited to a maximum of one. Words found: “ab”, “abc” Words not found: “abcc”, “abccc”, etc. Search for: ro?t Explanation: Finds the letter "o" zero or one times only. This differs from the + and * characters because they could find the character one or more times. The question mark is limited to a maximum of one. Words found: rot", "brother", "root", "rooted", "birth", words containing “rt”, etc. Words not found: If a word had three “o’s”, it would not be found. Searching for "Saviou?r", “Saviou*r”, or Saviou+r”, will each locate 29 verses in the KJV containing "Savior" or "Saviour”. This illustrates that sometimes there isn’t a difference which quantifier you use. But in our later examples, you will see a quantifier choice can be critical. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 235
  • 236. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 13: Curly brackets “{}” Curly brackets "{}" enable precise specification of character repetitions: • “(abc){2}” matches the “abc” characters two times. • “(abc){2,4}” matches “abc” a minimum of two times and a maximum of four times, • “(abc){2,}” matches abc a minimum of two times, and “{,4}” matches “abc” maximally four times. Quantifiers "*", "+", and "?" (Lesson 12) are really special cases of the bracket notation. "*" is equivalent to “{0,}” and "+" is equivalent to “{1,}” and "?" is equivalent to “{0,1}”. In Lesson 6, we searched for “Hdddb” in the KJV+ Bible to locate all verses containing a three digit Strong’s number, such as H100-H999. Using what we just learned, we can search for “Hd{3}b” to return the same result as Lesson 6. Since “d” stands for any digit and “{3}” limits our digits to three, only H100- H999 will match. Lesson 14: Beginning Verse Anchor “^” The “^” anchor tells e-Sword to find our search term at the beginning of a verse. Search for: ^ God Explanation: Locates all verses starting with the characters “God”. Verses found: All verses starting with the characters “God”. Verses not found: Verses with “God” anywhere else in the verse. Because each e-Sword verse begins with a space, we have a space in “^ God”. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 236
  • 237. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 15: Ending Verse Anchor “$” The “$” anchor tells e-Sword to find our search term at the end of a verse. Search for: man $ Explanation: Locates all verses ending with the characters “man”. Verses found: All verses ending with the characters “man”. Verses not found: Verses with “man” anywhere else in the verse. Will NOT find verses ending in “man.”, “man?”, “man;” etc. Search for: manW? $ Explanation: Locate all verses ending with the characters “man”, including between zero and one non-word character. “W” specifies the non- word character. “?” quantifies the non-word character to say zero or one non-word characters. Non word characters are all characters other than a-z, A-Z, 0-9, and the underscore _ sign. Verses found: All verses ending with the characters “man” plus a non-word character. This search locates “man”, “man.”, “man?”, etc. Verses not found: Verses with “man” anywhere else in the verse. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 237
  • 238. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Lesson 16: Putting It All Together with Useful Examples Many people may skip to this section and hope to use these examples to solve their search goals. The in-depth examples and discussions of these commands were methodically given in the previous examples. If you’re confused by these examples, please read the previous section(s) the command(s) where the commands were presented. Example 1: Verses Starting/Ending with a Specific Characters Let’s search for verses where the word “God” starts the verse. Search for: ^ God Explanation: The caret “^” command anchors our search to the beginning of the verse. All e-Sword verses begin with a space, resulting in our space above between “^” and “God”. Verses found: All verses starting with “God”. Verses not found: All verses beginning with text other than “God”. Let’s search for verses where the word “God” ends the verse. Search for: God(W)* $ Explanation: The “$” command will anchor our search to the end of a verse. But since verses can end with non-word characters, like punctuation, we must account for that or those instances of “God” will be excluded. Non-word characters are represented by “W”. We must also include a space between our last character and our “$” anchor. Verses found: All verses ending with “God”, “God,”, “God;”, etc. Verses not found: All verses not ending with the above. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 238
  • 239. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Example 2: Finding Words Beginning/Ending with Specific Characters Let’s search for all names starting with “P” and ending with “r”. Since both first names and place are capitalized in the Bible, this search will find both. Search for: bP(w)+rb Explanation: The “b” commands define our word boundary. “P” represents the first letter. “r” represents the last letter. “w” means all word characters and the parenthesis forces the “+” to apply only to the “w”. The “+” matches one or more word characters in between the “P” and “r”. Verses found: All verses containing: Peter, Potiphar, etc. Verses not found: All verses are excluded unless they contain a word starting with “P” and ending with “r”. TIP: The above search has word boundaries. So if a verse ends with “Peter.” or “Peter;” our search will not find those verses! For our search to include punctuation (or non-word characters), we must modify our search to include zero or more non-word characters. Non-word characters are represented by “W” and we can find zero or more instances of the previous character with “*”: bP(w)+rb(W)* e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 239
  • 240. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Example 3: Finding Verses Only If They Contain Two+ Specific Words. Let’s search for “Jesus” and “Peter” and only find verses containing both words. You can easily find a third, fourth, fifth, etc. word by adding additional pipe | symbol. Search for: (Jesus).+Peter|(Peter).+Jesus Explanation: We should ideally use “b” word boundaries around our search words, “Jesus” and “Peter” but for ease of presentation, we are not. The search finds “Jesus” and then skips one or more characters in search of “Peter”. The dot “.” represents any character. The “+” sign quantifies the dot wildcard character to unlimited. The pipe “|” sign says “or”. The flip side of this pattern searches for “Peter” then “Jesus”. The first side of our pattern would only find “Jesus” then “Peter”. Verses found: All verses containing both “Jesus” and “Peter”, including “Simon Peter”. Verses not found: All verses not containing the text “Jesus” and “Peter”. LIMITATION: Using e-Sword’s implementation of Regular Expressions, I’m unaware of a way to ignore “Simon Peter” but still find “Jesus” and “Peter”. This should be possible through several methods, including a negative assertion, but this appears unsupported. If can show otherwise, contact Josh Bond on BibleSupport.com We can achieve the same results with a look-ahead assertion. A look-ahead assertion requires one string to the right of another to return a match. So, our search expression is: Jesus(?=.*Peter)|Peter(?=.*Jesus) These expressions aren’t completely identical, there are slight differences depending on whether the expression is greedy or lazy. Please refer to Regular-Expressions.info for more information. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 240
  • 241. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Example 4: Finding “Wildcard” Verses References. You may use a Regular Expression to find verse references in a commentary or dictionary. Let’s search for any Bible verse. Search for: w+.d{1,3}:d{1,3} Explanation: “w” finds any word character, “+” repeats the search as long as the search finds more word characters, the “.” finds any character (like a space or a _ in a verse reference), “d” represents any digit, “{1,3}” matches the digit at least once and up to three times, the “:” is a literal character to find the “:” in the verse, and the final “{1,3}” behaves the same as the first. Verses found: When running this search in a commentary, dictionary, or topic, the search matches all entries containing ANY Bible verse reference, including Genesis 1:1 and Gen_1:1. What if you only want to find e-Sword verse references (tool tipped verses)? The difference between an e-Sword verse reference and a traditional verse reference is that e-Sword uses a three character book abbreviation and underscore _ sign between the book abbreviation and the chapter, like “Gen_1:1”. Our search expression is: w{3}_d{1,3}:d{1,3} What if you want to find specific verse references, such as all references to a specific bible book? Search for: Gen_d{1,3}:d{1,3} Explanation: “Gen_” is literal text—the book of the Bible we want to find. The remaining search expression is the same as our example above. Verses found: When running this search in a commentary, dictionary, or topic, the search matches all entries containing all e-Sword verse references from Genesis. We can further refine our search to the first chapter of Genesis with this search: Gen_1:d{1,3} e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 241
  • 242. CHAPTER 22: SEARCHING E-SWORD USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS Example 5: Finding a Verse with Words in Proximity to other Words. You may use a Regular Expression to find verses with specific words in proximity other words. This example is a more complex version of a previous example, Example 3. In our example below, let’s search for “Jesus” followed by “Christ” with no more than six words between them. Search for: bJesusW+(?:w+W+){1,6}Christb Explanation: “b” sets a word boundary, “Jesus” is our first word to find. “W+” finds one or more non-word characters (like a space for example). The parenthesis sets the precedence and scope of the look-ahead assertion. “w+” finds one or more word characters, “W+” finds one or more non-word characters. “{1,6}” skips a minimum of one word and a maximum of six words. “Christ” is the second word to find. Verses found: This search only finds verses with Jesus followed by Christ, with at least one word in between and no more than six words in between. What if we want to find the opposite—“Christ” followed by “Jesus” with at least one word in between and no more than six words in between? A few translations will show additional results. We must insert, a pipe | symbol and reverse the order of our words. Our expression is now: bJesusW+(?:w+W+){1,6}Christb|bChristW+(?:w+W+){1,6}Jesusb We can achieve the same results with a look-ahead assertion. A look-ahead assertion requires one string to the right of another to return a match. So, our search expression is: Jesus(?=.*Peter)|Peter(?=.*Jesus) Reference Information on Regular Expressions. Regular Expressions have been selectively implemented in e-Sword. This means many examples of Regular Expressions you find elsewhere will not work in e-Sword. A great Regular Expression command summary is available: http://www.autohotkey.com/docs/misc/RegEx-QuickRef.htm. A wealth of reference material for Regular Expressions may be found here, although much of this material is either not applicable to searching the Bible in e- Sword or not supported by e-Sword: http://www.regular-expressions.info. e-Sword User’s Guide, Copyright © 2012 by BibleSupport.com P a g e 242